Kia, the COMPANY Thank You for Becoming the Owner of a New Kia Vehicle

Kia, THE COMPANY Thank you for becoming the owner of a new Kia vehicle. As a global car manufacturer focused on building high-quality vehicles with exceptional value, Kia Motors is dedicated to providing you with a customer service experience that exceeds your expectations.

All information contained in this Owner’s Manual is accurate at the time of publication. However, Kia reserves the right to make changes at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement can be carried out.

This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, you may encounter material in this manual that is not applicable to your specific Kia vehicle.

Drive safely and enjoy your Kia! Foreword

Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle. The information and specifications provided in this manual When you require service, remember that your Kia dealer were accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the right to knows your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained tech- discontinue or change specifications or design at any time nicians, recommended special tools and genuine Kia replace- without notice and without incurring any obligation. If you ment parts. It is dedicated to your complete customer satisfac- have questions, always check with your Kia dealer. tion. We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoring Because subsequent owners require this important information pleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle. as well, this publication should remain with the vehicle if it is sold. This manual will familiarize you with operational, maintenance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is supplemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manual that provides important information on all warranties regarding your vehicle. We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow the recommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operation of your new vehicle. © 2014 Kia MOTORS AMERICA, Inc. Kia offers a great variety of options, components and features All rights reserved. May not be reproduced or translated in for its various models. Therefore, some of the equipment whole or in part without the written consent of Kia Motors described in this manual, along with the various illustrations, America, Inc. may not be applicable to your particular vehicle. Printed in Korea

i Introduction How to use this manual / Fuel requirements / Vehicle break-in process / 1 Vehicle data collection and event data recorders Your vehicle at a glance Exterior overview / Interior overview / Instrument panel overview / Engine compartment 2

Safety features of your vehicle Seats / Seat belts / Child restraint system / Air bag 3 Features of your vehicle Keys / Door locks / Tailgate / Windows / Hood / Fuel filler lid / Panoramic sunroof / Steering wheel / Mirrors 4 / Instrument cluster / Lighting / Wipers & Washers / Climate control system / Audio system / Etc. table of contents Driving your vehicle Before driving / Engine start/stop button / Transaxle / Brake system / Cruise control system 5 Active ECO system / ISG (Idel Stop and Go) system / Winter driving / Vehicle load limit / Etc.

What to do in an emergency Road warning / Emergency while driving / Emergency starting / Engine overheat / TPMS / Flat tire / Towing / Etc. 6

Maintenance Engine compartment / Maintenance service / Engine oil / Engine coolant / Brake fluid / Washer fluid / 7 Parking brake / Air cleaner / Wiper blades / Battery / Tire and wheels / Fuses / Light bulbs / Etc. Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 8

Index I

ii Introduction

How to use this manual ...... 1-2 1 Fuel requirements ...... 1-3 • Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol...... 1-3 • Do not use methanol ...... 1-4 • Fuel Additives ...... 1-4 Vehicle handling instructions ...... 1-5 Vehicle Break-In Process ...... 1-5 Vehicle data collection and event data recorders. . 1-6 Introduction

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL We want to help you get the greatest The general layout of the manual is You will find various types of safety possible driving pleasure from your provided in the Table of Contents. instructions in this manual. These vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can Use the index when looking for a instructions were prepared to assist you in many ways. We strong- specific area or subject; it has an enhance your personal safety. ly recommend that you read the alphabetical listing of all located in Carefully read and follow ALL proce- entire manual. In order to minimize the back of this manual. dures and recommendations provid- the chance of death or injury, you Sections: This manual has eight sec- ed in these instructions. must read the WARNING and CAU- tions plus an index. Each section TION sections in the manual. begins with a brief list of contents so Illustrations complement the words you can tell at a glance if that section WARNING in this manual to best explain how to has the information you want. A WARNING indicates a situation enjoy your vehicle. By reading your in which harm, serious bodily manual, you will learn about fea- injury or death could result if the tures, important safety information, warning is ignored. and driving tips under various road conditions. CAUTION A CAUTION indicates a situation in which damage to your vehicle could result if the caution is ignored.

✽ NOTICE A NOTICE indicates interesting or helpful information is being provided.

21 Introduction

FUEL REQUIREMENTS Your new Kia vehicle is designed to Gasoline containing alcohol and use only unleaded fuel having a WARNING - Refueling methanol pump octane number ((R+M)/2) of • Do not "top off" after the noz- Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or zle automatically shuts off. ethanol (also known as grain alcohol), higher. Attempts to force more fuel and gasoline or gasohol containing into the tank can cause fuel methanol (also known as wood alco- Your new vehicle is designed to overflow onto you and the hol) are being marketed along with or ground causing a risk of fire. instead of leaded or unleaded gaso- obtain maximum performance with line. UNLEADED FUEL, as well as mini- • Always check that the fuel cap mize exhaust emissions and spark is installed securely to pre- Pursuant to EPA regulations, ethanol plug fouling. vent fuel spillage, especially may be used in your vehicle. Do not in the event of an accident. use gasohol containing more than 10% ethanol, and do not use gasoline Never add any fuel system cleaning or gasohol containing any methanol. agents to the fuel tank other than ✽ Ethanol provides less energy than what has been specified. (Consult an NOTICE gasoline and it attracts water, and it is authorized Kia dealer for details.) Tighten the cap until it clicks one thus likely to reduce your fuel efficien- time, otherwise the fuel cap open cy and could lower your MPG results. warning indicator light (or LCD Methanol may cause drivability prob- display) will illuminate. lems and damage to the fuel system. Discontinue using gasohol of anykind if drivability problems occur. Vehicle damage or drivability problems may not be covered by the manufacturer's warranty if they result from the use of: 1. Gasoline or gasohol containing methanol. 2. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.

13 Introduction

"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com- Gasoline containing MMT Fuel Additives prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15 Some gasoline contains harmful Kia recommends that you use good percent gasoline, and is manufac- manganese-based fuel additives quality gasolines treated with deter- tured exclusively for use in Flexible such as MMT (Methylcyclopentadi- gent additives such as TOP TIER Fuel Vehicles. “E85” is not compati- enyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). Detergent Gasoline, which helps ble with your vehicle. Use of “E85” prevent deposit formation in the may result in poor engine perform- Kia does not recommend the use of gasoline containing MMT. engine. These gasolines will help the ance and damage to your vehicle's engine run cleaner and enhance per- engine and fuel system. Kia recom- This type of fuel can reduce vehicle formance of the Emission Control mends that customers do not use performance and affect your emis- System. For more information on fuel with an ethanol content exceed- sion control system. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, ing 10 percent. The malfunction indicator lamp on please go to the website (www.top- the cluster may come on. tiergas.com). ✽ NOTICE For Customers who do not use TOP Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty Do not use methanol TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly, does not cover damage to the fuel Fuels containing methanol (wood and have problems starting or the system or any performance prob- alcohol) should not be used in your engine does not run smoothly, addi- lems caused by the use of “E85” fuel. vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce tives that you can buy separately vehicle performance and damage may be added to the gasoline. If components of the fuel system. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive added to the fuel tank at 7,500 miles ✽ NOTICE or every engine oil change is recom- Your New Vehicle Limited mended. Additives are available from Warranty may not cover damage to your authorized Kia dealer along with the fuel system and any perform- information on how to use them. Do ance problems that are caused by not mix other additives. the use of fuels containing methanol.

41 Introduction

VEHICLE HANDLING VEHICLE BREAK-IN Operation in foreign countries INSTRUCTIONS PROCESS If you are going to drive your vehicle As with other vehicles of this type, No special break-in period is need- in another country, be sure to: failure to operate this vehicle corrected. By following a few simple precau- • Observe all regulations regarding ly may result in loss of control, an tions for the first 600 miles (1,000 registration and insurance. accident or vehicle rollover. km) you may add to the perform- Specific design characteristics (high- ance, economy and life of your vehi- • Determine that acceptable fuel is cle. available. er ground clearance, track, etc.) give this vehicle a higher center of gravity • Do not race the engine. than other types of vehicles. It is not • While driving, keep your engine designed for cornering at the same speed (rpm, or revolutions per speeds as a conventional 2-wheel minute) between 2,000 rpm and drive sedans or sports coupe. Avoid 4,000 rpm. sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. Failure to operate this vehicle cor- • Do not maintain a single speed for rectly may result in loss of control, an long periods of time, either fast or accident or vehicle rollover. Be sure slow. Varying engine speed is need- to read the “Reducing the risk of a ed to properly break-in the engine. rollover” driving guidelines, in • Avoid hard stops, except in emer- section 5 of this manual. gencies, to allow the brakes to seat properly. • Don't tow a trailer during the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of operation.

15 Introduction

VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS This vehicle is equipped with an These data can help provide a bet- To read data recorded by an EDR, event data recorder (EDR). The ter understanding of the circum- special equipment is required, and main purpose of an EDR is to stances in which crashes and access to the vehicle or the EDR is record, in certain crash or near injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data needed. In addition to the vehicle crash-like situations, such as an are recorded by your vehicle only manufacturer, other parties, such air bag deployment or hitting a if a non-trivial crash situation as law enforcement, that have the road obstacle, data that will assist occurs; no data are recorded by special equipment, can read the in understanding how a vehicle's the EDR under normal driving con- information if they have access to systems performed. The EDR is ditions and no personal data (e.g., the vehicle or the EDR. designed to record data related to name, gender, age, and crash loca- Your rights with respect to the vehicle dynamics and safety sys- tion) are recorded. However, other information discussed above may tems for a short period of time, parties, such as law enforcement, vary from state to state. In some typically 30 seconds or less. The could combine the EDR data with states, such information is con- EDR in this vehicle is designed to the type of personally identifying sidered private, is exclusively record such data as: data routinely acquired during a owned by the owner of the motor * How various systems in your crash investigation. vehicle, and is not retrievable or vehicle were operating; usable by another person or enti- * Whether or not the driver and ty. passenger safety belts were buckled/ fastened; * How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, * How fast the vehicle was traveling.

61 Your vehicle at a glance

Exterior overview ...... 2-2 Interior overview ...... 2-4 Instrument panel overview ...... 2-5 Engine compartment ...... 2-6 2 Your vehicle at a glance

EXTERIOR OVERVIEW

■ Front view

1. Hood ...... 4-29 2. Head lamp...... 4-86, 7-75 3. Fog lamp ...... 4-89, 7-80 4. Tire and wheel...... 7-46, 8-4 5. Outside rearview mirror ...... 4-47 6. Panoramic sunroof...... 4-34 7. Front windshield wiper blades .....4-90, 7-40 8.Windows ...... 4-24

❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration. OPS013001N

22 Your vehicle at a glance

■ Rear view

9. Door...... 4-17 10. Fuel filler lid ...... 4-31 11. Rear combination lamp...... 7-81 12. Tail gate ...... 4-22 13. High mounted stop lamp ...... 7-83 14. Rear window defroster...... 4-98 15. Antenna ...... 4-143 16. Rearview camera...... 4-84

❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration. OPS013002N

23 Your vehicle at a glance

INTERIOR OVERVIEW

1. Inside door handle ...... 4-18 2. Power window switch ...... 4-24 3. Power window lock button...... 4-28 4. Central door lock switch...... 4-19 5. Outside rearview mirror control...... 4-48 6. Outside rearview mirror folding...... 4-49 7. Fuel filler lid open lever...... 4-31 8. Instrument panel illumination control switch ...... 4-51 9. Steering wheel heater On/Off button ....4-42 10. Idle Stop and Go (ISG) OFF button....5-44 11. ESC Off button...... 5-29 12. Speaker lighting ...... 4-146 13. Steering wheel ...... 4-40 14. Tilt and telescopic steering control lever...... 4-41 15. Inner panel fuse panel ...... 7-62 16. Hood release lever...... 4-29 17. Seat...... 3-2 18. Transaxle shift lever ...... 5-14, 5-17

❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration. OPS013004N

42 Your vehicle at a glance

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

1. Audio remote control buttons...... 4-144 2. Driver’s front air bag ...... 3-49 3. Horn...... 4-42 4. Cruise control button ...... 5-37 5. Instrument cluster ...... 4-50 6. Lighting control lever...... 4-86 7.Wiper and washer control lever...... 4-90 8. Ignition switch or Engine start/stop button...... 5-6, 5-9 9. Audio...... 4-143 10. Hazard warning flasher...... 6-2 11. Climate control system...... 4-100, 4-110 12. Front seat warmer/ Seat air ventilation...... 4-132, 4-134 13. Power outlet...... 4-135 14. Center console storage box...... 4-128 15. Glove box...... 4-128 16. Passenger’s front air bag...... 3-49 17. Parking brake...... 5-25

❈The actual shape may differ from the illustration. OPS013003N

25 Your vehicle at a glance

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

■ 1.6L GDI

1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....7-34 2. Engine oil filler cap ...... 7-27 3. Engine oil dipstick ...... 7-27 4. Engine coolant reservoir...... 7-30 5. Radiator cap ...... 7-31 6. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir ...... 7-32 7. Positive battery terminal ...... 7-43 8. Negative battery terminal...... 7-43 9. Fuse box ...... 7-64 10. Air cleaner...... 7-35

* The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

OPS073001

62 Your vehicle at a glance

■ 2.0L GDI

* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

OPS073002

27 Safety features of your vehicle

Seats...... 3-2 • Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the air bag . . 3-54 • Front seat adjustment - Manual ...... 3-5 • SRS care ...... 3-59 • Front seat adjustment - Power...... 3-6 • Adding equipment to or modifying your • Seatback pocket...... 3-11 air bag-equipped vehicle...... 3-60 • Rear seat adjustment ...... 3-11 • Air bag warning label ...... 3-60 Seat belts ...... 3-16 • Seat belt restraint system ...... 3-16 • Pre-tensioner seat belt ...... 3-24 3 • Seat belt precautions ...... 3-27 • Care of seat belts ...... 3-28 Child restraint system ...... 3-29 • Using a child restraint system ...... 3-30 • Tether anchor system ...... 3-34 • Lower anchor system ...... 3-35 Air bag - advanced supplemental restraint system...... 3-37 • How does the air bag system operate ...... 3-38 • Do not Installing a child restraint on a front passenger's seat ...... 3-40 • Air bag warning light ...... 3-40 • SRS components and functions ...... 3-41 • Occupant Detection System (ODS) ...... 3-44 • Driver's and passenger's front air bag ...... 3-49 • Side air bag ...... 3-52 • Curtain air bag ...... 3-53 Safety features of your vehicle

SEATS Front seat (1) Forward and backward (2) Seatback angle

Manual seat (3) Seat cushion height (Driver’s seat) (4) Lumbar support (Driver’s seat) (5) Headrest

Rear seats (6) Seatback folding Power seat (7) Headrest

OPS033001N

23 Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING - Loose WARNING - Driver respon- WARNING - Seat cushion objects sibility for passengers Occupants should never sit on Do not place anything in the dri- seat cushions. The passenger's ver's foot well or under the front hips may slide under the lap seats. Loose objects in the dri- portion of the seat belt during ver's foot area could interfere an accident or a sudden stop. with the operation of the foot pedals.

WARNING - Uprighting seat 1KMN3662 Do not press the release lever on a manual seatback without The driver must advise the pas- holding and controlling the senger to keep the seatback in seatback. The seatback will an upright position whenever spring upright possibly impact- the vehicle is in motion. If a seat ing you or other passengers. is reclined during an accident, the occupant's hips may slide under the lap portion of the seat belt, applying great force to the unprotected abdomen.

33 Safety features of your vehicle

WARNING - Driver’s seat WARNING - Rear seat- WARNING - Unexpected • Never attempt to adjust the backs Seat Movement seat while the vehicle is mov- Always lock the rear seatback After adjusting a manual seat, ing. This could result in loss before driving. Failure to do so always check that it is locked by of control. could result in passengers or shifting your weight to the front • Do not allow anything to inter- objects being thrown forward and back. Sudden or unexpect- fere with the normal position of injuring vehicle occupants. ed movement of the driver's the seatback. Storing items seat could cause you to lose against a seatback or in any control of the vehicle. other way interfering with prop- WARNING - Luggage and er locking of a seatback could Cargo result in serious or fatal injury Do not stack pile or stack lug- WARNING - Seat adjust- in a sudden stop or collision gage or cargo higher than the ment • Sit as far back as possible from seatback in the cargo area. In an • Do not adjust the seat while the steering wheel while still accident the cargo could strike wearing seat belts. Moving the maintaining comfortable con- and injury a passenger. If seat forward will cause strong trol of the your vehicle. A dis- objects are large, heavy or must pressure on the abdomen. tance of at least 10" from your be piled, they must be secured • Do not place your hand near chest to the steering wheel is in the cargo area. the seat adjusting the seat. recommended. Failure to do so Your hand could get caught in can result in airbag inflation the seat mechanism. injuries to the driver.

43 Safety features of your vehicle

Front seat adjustment - manual Seatback angle Seat height (for driver’s seat) Forward and backward

OPS033003 OPS033004 OPS033002 To recline the seatback: To change the height of the seat, push the lever upwards or down- To move the seat forward or back- 1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the wards. ward: seatback recline lever. • To lower the seat cushion, push the 1. Pull the seat slide adjustment 2. Carefully lean back on the seat lever down several times. lever up and hold it. and adjust the seatback of the seat to the position you desire. • To raise the seat cushion, pull the 2. Slide the seat to the position you lever up several times. desire. 3. Release the lever and make sure the seatback is locked in place. 3. Release the lever and make sure (The lever MUST return to its orig- the seat is locked in place. inal position for the seatback to Adjust the seat before driving, and lock.) make sure the seat is locked securely by trying to move forward and backward without using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not locked properly.

35 Safety features of your vehicle

Front seat adjustment - power When in operation, the power seat- (if equipped) CAUTION - Power seat consumes a large amount of electri- adjustments cal power. To prevent unnecessary The front seat can be adjusted by charging system drain, don’t adjust using the control switches located on The power seating controls the power seat longer than neces- the outside of the seat cushion. function by electronic motor. sary while the engine is not running. Before driving, adjust the seat to the Excessive operation may cause proper position so you can easily con- damage to the electrical equip- trol the steering wheel, pedals and ment. switches on the instrument panel.

CAUTION - Power Seating WARNING - Unattended Do not operate two or more children power seat control switches at Do not leave children unattend- the same time. Doing so may ed in the vehicle. Children might damage the power seat motor or operate features of the vehicle electrical components. that could injure them.

63 Safety features of your vehicle

Forward and backward Seatback angle Seat height (for driver’s seat)

OPS033005 OPS033006 OPS033007 Push the control switch forward or Push the control switch forward or Pull the front portion of the control backward to move the seat to the backward to move the seatback to switch up to raise or press down to desired position. Release the switch the desired angle. Release the lower the front part of the seat cush- once the seat reaches the desired switch once the seat reaches the ion. Pull the rear portion of the con- position. desired position. trol switch up to raise or press down to lower the rear part of the seat cushion. Release the switch once the seat reaches the desired position.

37 Safety features of your vehicle

Lumbar support (for driver’s seat) Headrest (for front seat) For maximum effectiveness in case of an accident, the headrest should be adjusted so the middle of the headrest is at the same height of the center of gravity of an occupant's head. Generally, the center of gravity of most people's head is similar with the height of the top of their eyes. Also, adjust the headrest as close to your head as possible. For this reason, the use of a cushion that holds the body away from the seatback is not recommended.

OPS033008 OPS034058N The lumbar support can be adjusted The driver's and front passenger's WARNING - Headrest by pressing the button. seats are equipped with a headrest removal/adjustment for the occupant's safety and comfort. • Do not operate the vehicle The headrest not only provides com- with the headrests removed. fort for the driver and front passenger, Headrests can provide critical but also helps protect the head and neck and head support in a neck in the event of a rear collision. crash. • Do not adjust the headrest height while the vehicle is in motion. Driver may lose control of the vehicle.

83 Safety features of your vehicle

OPS033009 OPS033010 OYFH034205 Forward and rearward adjustment Adjusting the height up and down The headrest may be adjusted for- To raise the headrest, pull it up to the CAUTION ward to 4 different positions by desired position (1). To lower the If you recline the seatback pulling the headrest forward to the headrest, push and hold the release towards the front with the head desired detent. To adjust the head- button (2) on the headrest support restraint and seat cushion rest to it’s furthest rearward position, and lower the headrest to the desired raised, the head restraint may pull it fully forward to the farthest position (3). come in contact with the sunvi- position and release it. Adjust the sor or other parts of the vehicle. headrest so that it properly supports the head and neck.

39 Safety features of your vehicle

■ Type A ■ Type A WARNING NEVER allow anyone to ride in a seat with the headrest removed.

OPS033047L OPS033048L ■ Type B ■ Type B

OPS033049L OPS033050L Removal and installation To reinstall the headrest : To remove the headrest: 1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the 1. Recline the seatback (2) with the holes while pressing the release recline lever or switch (1). button (1). 2. Raise headrest as far as it can go. 2. Recline the seatback (4) with the 3. Press the headrest release button recline lever or switch (3). (3) while pulling the headrest up (4). 3. Adjust the headrest to the appropriate height.

3 10 Safety features of your vehicle

Seatback pocket (if equipped) Rear seat adjustment WARNING - Headrest Folding the rear seat Reinstallation The rear seatbacks can be folded to To reduce the risk of injury to facilitate carrying long items or to the head or neck, always make increase the luggage capacity of the sure the headrest is locked into vehicle. position and adjusted properly after reinstalling. WARNING - Folded down seatback Never allow passengers sit on top of the folded down seatback while the vehicle is moving.This is not a OPS033016 proper seating position and no The seatback pocket is provided on seat belts are available for use. the back of the front passenger’s This could result in serious injury seatbacks. or death in case of an accident or sudden stop. WARNING - Seatback pockets WARNING - Objects Do not put heavy or sharp Objects carried on the folded objects in the seatback pocket. down seatback should not extend An occupant could contact such higher than the top of the front objects in a crash. Heavy objects seatbacks.This could allow cargo in the front passenger seatback to slide forward and cause injury could also interfere with the or damage during sudden stops. airbag sensing system.

311 Safety features of your vehicle

2. Set the front seatback to the upright position and if necessary, slide the front seat forward. 3. Lower the rear headrests to the lowest position.

OPS033017

OPS033018 4.Pull on the seatback folding lever, then fold the seat toward the front of the vehicle. When you return the seatback to its upright position, always be sure it has locked into position by pushing on the top of the seatback. 5.To use the rear seat, lift and pull OPS033015 the seatback backward by pulling To fold down the rear seatback on the folding lever. 1. Insert the rear seat belt buckle in Pull the seatback firmly until it the pocket (if equipped) between clicks into place. the rear seatback and cushion, Make sure the seatback is locked and insert the rear seat belt web- in place. bing in the guide to prevent the 6.Return the rear seat belt to the seat belt from being damaged. proper position.

3 12 Safety features of your vehicle

Headrest For maximum effectiveness in case WARNING - Cargo of an accident, the headrest should Do not place heavy objects in be adjusted so the middle of the the rear seats, since they can- headrest is at the same height as the not be properly secured and center of gravity of an occupant's may hit vehicle occupants in a head. frontal collision. * Generally, the center of gravity of most people's head is similar with * the height of the top of their eyes. Make sure the engine is off, the Also adjust the headrest as close to automatic transaxle is in P (Park) or your head as possible. For this rea- the manual transaxle is in R son, the use of a cushion that holds (Reverse) or 1st, and the parking the body away from the seatback is OPA039053 brake is securely applied whenever not recommended. loading or unloading cargo. Failure to The rear seat(s) is equipped with take these steps may allow the vehi- headrests in all the seating positions cle to move if the shift lever is inad- for the occupant's safety and com- vertently moved to another position. fort. The headrest not only provides comfort for passengers, but also helps protect the head and neck in the event of a collision.

313 Safety features of your vehicle

Adjusting the height up and down Removal and installation WARNING - Headrest removal/adjustment • Do not operate the vehicle with the headrests removed. Headrests can provide critical neck and head support in a crash. • Do not adjust the headrest height while the vehicle is in motion. Driver may lose control of the vehicle. OPS033033 OPS033034 To raise the headrest : To remove the headrest : 1. Pull it up to the desired position (1). 1. Raise it as far as it can go then press the release button (1) while pulling the headrest up (2). To lower the headrest : 1. Push and hold the release button To reinstall the headrest : (2) on the headrest support 1. Put the headrest poles (3) into the 2. Lower the headrest to the desired holes while pressing the release position (3). button (1). 2. Adjust it to the appropriate height.

Make sure the headrest locks in position after adjusting it to properly protect the occupants.

3 14 Safety features of your vehicle

Armrest WARNING - Headrest installation After installing the headrest, make sure that it is installed in the right direction. A headrest installed reversely could increase whiplash injury during rear impact.

OPS033032 To use the armrest, pull it forward from the seatback.

315 Safety features of your vehicle

SEAT BELTS Seat belt restraint system Seat belts are designed to bear upon - Shoulder Belt • For maximum restraint system pro- WARNING the bony structure of the body, and tection, the seat belts must always • Never wear the shoulder belt should be worn low across the front be used whenever the vehicle is under your arm or behind of the pelvis or the pelvis, chest and moving. A properly positioned your back. An improperly shoulders, as applicable; wearing the shoulder belt should be positioned positioned shoulder belt can- lap section of the belt across the midway over your shoulder across not protect the occupant in a abdominal area must be avoided. your collarbone. crash. Seat belts should be adjusted as • Never allow children to ride in the • Always wear both the shoul- firmly as possible, consistent with front passenger seat. See child der portion and lap portion of comfort, to provide the protection for restraint system section for further the lap/shoulder belt. which they have been designed. discussion. A slack belt will greatly reduce the protection afforded to the wearer. WARNING - Damaged Care should be taken to avoid con- seat belt tamination of the webbing with pol- Replace the entire seat belt ishes, oils and chemicals, and partic- assembly if any part of the web- ularly battery acid. Cleaning may bing or hardware is damage as safely be carried out using mild soap you can no longer be sure that a and water. The belt should be damage seat belt will provide replaced if webbing becomes frayed, protection in a crash. contaminated or damaged.

3 16 Safety features of your vehicle

• No modifications or additions Seat belt warning (for driver’s seat) should be made by the user which WARNING - Seat belt will either prevent the seat belt buckle adjusting devices from operating to Do not allow foreign material remove slack, or prevent the seat (gum, crumbs, coins, etc.) to belt assembly from being adjusted obstruct the seat belt buckle. to remove slack. This may prevent the seat belt • When you fasten the seat belt, be from fastening securely. careful not to latch the seat belt in buckles of other seat. It's very dangerous and you may not be protected by the seat belt properly. • Do not unfasten the seat belt and 1GQA2083 do not fasten and unfasten the seat belt repeatedly while driving. This The driver's seat belt warning light could result in loss of control, and and chime will activate pursuant to an accident causing death, serious the following table when the ignition injury, or property damage. switch is in "ON" position. • When fastening the seat belt, make sure that the seat belt does not pass over objects that are hard or can break easily.

317 Safety features of your vehicle

Conditions Warning Pattern Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system The seat belt automatically adjusts to Vehicle Chime- with emergency locking retractor the proper length only after the lap Seat Belt Light-Blink Speed Sound belt portion is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips. If Unbuckled 6 seconds you lean forward in a slow, easy Buckled 6 seconds None motion, the belt will extend and let Below 3 mph 6 seconds None you move around. If there is a sud- (5 km/h) den stop or impact, however, the belt Buckled → 3 mph~ will lock into position. It will also lock 6 seconds Unbuckled 6 mph if you try to lean forward too quickly. Above 6 mph 6 sec. on / 24 sec. off If you are not able to pull out the seat (10 km/h) (11 times) belt from the retractor, firmly pull the Above 6 mph belt out and release it. Then you will (10 km/h) 6 seconds *1 be able to pull the belt out smoothly. B180A01NF-1 Unbuckled ↓ ↓ To fasten your seat belt: Below 3 mph Stop *2 (5 km/h) To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert the metal tab *1 Warning pattern repeats 11 times with (1) into the buckle (2). There will be an interval of 24 seconds. If the driver's an audible "click" when the tab locks seat belt is buckled, the light will stop into the buckle. within 6 seconds and chime will stop immediately. *2 The light will stop within 6 seconds and chime will stop immediately.

3 18 Safety features of your vehicle

Front seat Release the button to lock the anchor into position. Try sliding the height adjuster to make sure that it has locked into position.

WARNING - Shoulder belt positioning Never position the shoulder belt across your neck or face.

OXM039026 B200A02NF Height adjustment WARNING - Seat belt You can adjust the height of the shoul- replacement WARNING der belt anchor to one of the 3 posi- Replace your seat belts after You should place the lap belt tions for maximum comfort and safety. being in an accident. Failure to portion as low as possible and The height of the adjusting seat belt replace seat belts after an acci- snugly across your hips, not on should not be too close to your neck. dent could leave you with dam- your waist. If the lap belt is locat- The shoulder portion should be aged seat belts that will not pro- ed too high on your waist, it may adjusted so that it lies across your vide protection in the event of increase the chance of injury in chest and midway over your shoulder another collision. the event of a collision. Both near the door and not your neck. arms should not be under or To adjust the height of the seat belt over the belt. Rather, one should anchor, lower or raise the height be over and the other under, as adjuster into an appropriate position. shown in the illustration. To raise the height adjuster, pull it up Never wear the seat belt under (1). To lower it, push it down (3) while the arm that is near the door. pressing the height adjuster button (2).

319 Safety features of your vehicle

Seat belts - Front passenger and It automatically adjusts to the proper Do NOT fold down the left portion of rear seat 3-point system with length only after the lap belt portion the rear seat back when the rear combination locking retractor of the seat belt is adjusted manually center seat belt is buckled. ALWAYS To fasten your seat belt: so that it fits snugly around your hips. UNBUCKLE the rear center seat belt before folding down the left portion of Combination retractor type seat belts When the seat belt is fully extended from the retractor to allow the instal- the rear seat back. If the rear center are installed in the rear seat posi- seat belt is buckled when the left por- tions to help accommodate the lation of a child restraint system, the seat belt operation changes to allow tion of the rear seat back is folded installation of child restraint systems. down, distortion and damage to the Although a combination retractor is the belt to retract, but not to extend (Automatic Locking Retractor Type). top portion of the seat back and seat also installed in the front passenger belt garnish may result, causing the seat position, it is strongly recom- Refer to “Using a child restraint system” in this section. seat back to lock into the folded mended that children always be down position. seated in the rear seat. NEVER place any infant restraint system in ✽ NOTICE the front seat of the vehicle. Although the combination retractor This type of seat belt combines the provides the same level of protection features of both an emergency lock- for seated passengers in either emer- ing retractor seat belt and an auto- gency or automatic locking modes, matic locking retractor seat belt. To have the seated passengers use the fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the emergency locking feature for retractor and insert the metal tab into improved convenience. The auto- the buckle. There will be an audible matic locking function is intended to "click" when the tab locks into the facilitate child restraint installation. buckle. When not securing a child To convert from the automatic lock- restraint, the seat belt operates in the ing feature to the emergency locking same way as the driver's seat belt operation mode, allow the unbuck- (Emergency Locking Retractor Type). led seat belt to fully retract.

3 20 Safety features of your vehicle

Stowing the rear seat belt

B210A01NF-1 OPS033015

To release the seat belt: OPS033017 Routing the seat belt webbing through the rear seat belt guides will The seat belt is released by pressing The rear seat belt buckles can be the release button (1) on the locking help keep the belts from being stowed in the pocket between the trapped behind or under the seats. buckle. When it is released, the belt rear seatback and cushion when not should automatically draw back into in use. After inserting the seat belt, tighten the retractor. the belt webbing by pulling it up. If this does not happen, check the belt to be sure it is not twisted, then CAUTION - Seat belt guide try again. Remove the seat belt from the guides before using. If you pull on the seat belt when it is stored in the guides, it may damage the guides and/or belt webbing.

321 Safety features of your vehicle

3 Point rear center belt WARNING - Rear center seat belt Do not separate mini tongue and mini buckle even if there is not an occupant. If it is separated, It may hit the rear seat occupants in a collision or sudden stops.

ORP032074

ORP032073C 2.Pull the tongue plate (B) and insert the tongue plate (B) into the open To fasten the rear center belt end of the buckle (D) until an audi- 1.Insert the mini tongue (A) into the ble “click” is heard, indicating the open end of the anchor connector latch is locked. Make sure the belt (C) until an audible “click" is heard, is not twisted. indicating the latch is locked. Make When using the rear center seat sure the belt is not twisted. belt, the buckle with the “CENTER” mark must be used.

3 22 Safety features of your vehicle

There will be an audible “click” when To unfasten the rear center belt the tab locks in the buckle. The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips, if you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will extend and let you move around. If there is a sudden stop or impact, the belt will lock into position. It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly. ORP032076K When using the rear seat center belt, When you fold the rear seatback you must lock all tongue plates and ORP032075 buckles. Press the release button on the To retract the rear center seatbelt, buckle (D) and remove the tongue insert the tongue plate or similar plate (B) from the buckle (D). small rigid device into the web release hole (C). Pull up on the seat belt web (A) and allow the webbing to retract automatically.

323 Safety features of your vehicle

Pre-tensioner seat belt (1) Retractor Pretensioner The purpose of the retractor pre- tensioner is to make sure that the shoulder belts fit in tightly against the occupant's upper body in certain frontal collisions. (2) EFD (Emergency Fastening Device) The purpose of the EFD is to make sure that the pelvis belts fit in tightly against the occupant's lower body in certain frontal collisions. OPS033036N/Q OXMA033101 The seat belt pre-tensioner system If the system senses excessive ten- consists mainly of the following com- Your vehicle is equipped with driver's ponents. Their locations are shown in and front passenger's pre-tensioner sion on the driver or passenger's seat belt when the pre-tensioner sys- the illustration: seat belts (retractor pretensioner and 1. SRS air bag warning light EFD (Emergency Fastening Device)). tem activates, the load limiter inside The pre-tensioner seat belts may be the retractor pre-tensioner will release 2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly activated, when a frontal collision is some of the pressure on the affected 3. SRS control module seat belt. severe enough, together with the air 4. Emergency fastening device (EFD) bags. When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if the occupant tries to lean forward too quickly, the seat belt retractor may lock into position. In certain frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner will activate and pull the seat belt into tighter contact against the occupant's body.

3 24 Safety features of your vehicle

• Both the driver's and front passen- If the pre-tensioner seat belt system ger's seat belt pre-tensioner sys- are not working properly, this warn- WARNING - Hot preten- tem may be activated not only in ing light will illuminate even if there is sioner certain frontal collision but also in no malfunction of the SRS air bag. If Do not touch the pre-tensioner certain side collision or rollover, if the SRS air bag warning light does seat belt assemblies for several the vehicle is equipped with a side not illuminate when the ignition minutes after they have been or curtain air bag. switch is turned ON, or if it remains activated. When the pre-ten- • Because the sensor that activates illuminated after illuminating for sioner seat belt mechanism the SRS air bag is connected with approximately 6 seconds, or if it illu- fires during a collision the pre- the pre-tensioner seat belt, the minates while the vehicle is being tensioner becomes hot and can SRS air bag warning light on driven, have an authorized Kia deal- burn you. the instrument panel will illuminate er inspect the pre-tensioner seat belt for approximately 6 seconds after and SRS air bag system as soon as the ignition switch has been turned possible. Pre-tensioners are designed to oper- to the ON position, and then it ate only one time. After activation, should turn off. pre-tensioner seat belts must be replaced. If the pre-tensioner must be replaced, contact an authorized Kia dealer.

325 Safety features of your vehicle

Seat belt precautions ✽ NOTICE Larger children Infant or small child Small children are best protected Children who are too large for child restraint systems should always All 50 states have child restraint from injury in an accident when occupy the rear seat and use the laws. You should be aware of the properly restrained in the rear seat available lap/shoulder belts. The lap specific requirements in your state. by a child restraint system that portion should be fastened and Child and/or infant seats must be meets the requirements of the snugged on the hips and as low as properly placed and installed in the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety possible. Check if the belt fits period- rear seat. For more information Standards. Before buying any child ically. A child's squirming could put about the use of these restraints, restraint system, make sure that it the belt out of position. Children are refer to “Child restraint system” in this has a label certifying that it meets given the most safety in the event of section. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. The restraint must be an accident when they are restrained appropriate for your child's height by a proper restraint system in the and weight. Check the label on the rear seat. If a larger child (over age child restraint for this information. 12) must be seated in the front seat, Refer to “Child restraint system” in the child should be securely this section. restrained by the available lap/shoulder belt and the seat should be placed in the rearmost position. Children age 12 and under should be restrained securely in the rear seat. NEVER place a child age 12 and under in the front seat. NEVER place a rear facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle.

3 26 Safety features of your vehicle

If the shoulder belt portion slightly Restraint of pregnant women Injured person touches the child’s neck or face, try Pregnant women should wear A seat belt should be used when an placing the child closer to the center of lap/shoulder belt assemblies when- injured person is being transported. the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still ever possible according to specific When this is necessary, you should touches their face or neck they need to recommendations by their doctors. consult a physician for recommenda- be returned to a child restraint system. The lap portion of the belt should be tions. worn AS SECURELY AND LOW AS POSSIBLE. WARNING - Small children One person per belt Do not allow small children to Two people (including children) ride in the vehicle without an WARNING - Pregnant should never attempt to use a single appropriate child restraint sys- women seat belt. This could increase the tem. If the shoulder belt comes Pregnant women must never severity of injuries in case of an acci- in contact with your child's neck place the lap portion of the seat dent. or face your child is too small to belt above or on the abdomen ride in the vehicle. In a crash the where the fetus is located. The seat belt will inflict injury to your force of the seat belt during a child's neck, throat and face. collision will crush the fetus.

327 Safety features of your vehicle

Do not lie down Care of seat belts Periodic inspection To reduce the chance of injuries in Seat belt systems should never be All seat belts should be inspected the event of an accident and to disassembled or modified. In addi- periodically for wear or damage of achieve maximum effectiveness of tion, care should be taken to assure any kind. Any damaged parts should the restraint system, all passengers that seat belts and belt hardware are be replaced as soon as possible. should be sitting up and the front and not damaged by seat hinges, doors rear seats should be in an upright or other abuse. position when the vehicle is moving. Keep belts clean and dry A seat belt cannot provide proper Seat belts should be kept clean and protection if the person is lying down WARNING - Pinched seat dry. If belts become dirty, they can be in the rear seat or if the front and rear belt cleaned by using a mild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye, seats are in a reclined position. Make sure that the webbing strong detergents or abrasives and/or buckle does not get should not be used because they caught or pinched in the rear may damage and weaken the fabric. seat when returning the rear seatback to its upright position. A caught or pinched When to replace seat belts webbing/buckle may become The entire in-use seat belt assembly damaged and could fail during a or assemblies should be replaced if collision or sudden stop. the vehicle has been involved in an accident. This should be done even if no damage is visible. Additional questions concerning seat belt operation should be directed to an authorized Kia dealer.

3 28 Safety features of your vehicle

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM Children riding in the vehicle should Children could be injured or killed in sit in the rear seat and must always a crash if their restraints are not WARNING - Hot child be properly restrained to minimize properly secured. For small children restraint the risk of injury in an accident, sud- and babies, a child seat or infant seat A child restraint system can den stop or sudden maneuver. must be used. Before buying a par- become very hot if it is left in a According to accident statistics, chil- ticular child restraint system, make closed vehicle on a sunny day. dren are safer when properly sure it fits your vehicle seat and seat Be sure to check the seat cover, restrained in the rear seats than in belts, and fits your child. buckles and latches before the front seat. Larger children not in Follow all the instructions provided placing a child in the restraint a child restraint should use one of by the manufacturer when installing system. the seat belts provided. the child restraint system. You should be aware of the specific requirements in your country. Child When the child restraint system is and/or infant safety seats must be WARNING - Restraint not in use, store it in the luggage properly placed and installed in the location area or fasten it with a seat belt so rear seat. You must use a commer- Never install a child or infant that it will not be thrown forward in cially available child restraint system seat on the front passenger's case of a sudden stop or an acci- that meets the requirements of the seat. A child riding in the front dent. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety passenger seat can be forceful- Standards (FMVSS). ly struck by an inflating airbag. Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt, or by a tether anchor and/or LATCH anchors (if equipped).

329 Safety features of your vehicle

Using a child restraint system WARNING - Holding chil- WARNING - Seat belt use Rearward-facing child restraint system dren Do not use one seat belt for two Never hold a child in your arms occupants at the same time. or lap when riding in a vehicle. This will eliminate any safety The violent forces created dur- benefit provided by the seat belt ing a crash will tear the child to the occupants. from your arms and throw the child against the car’s interior. Always use a child restraint After an accident, have an author- system which is appropriate for ized Kia dealer check the child restraint system, seat belt, tether your child's height and weight. CRS09 anchor and lower anchor. Forward-facing child restraint system

WARNING - Unattended Children Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. The car can heat up very quickly, resulting in injuries to the child in the vehicle.

OUN026150 For small children and babies, the use of a child seat or infant seat is required. The child seat or infant seat should be of appropriate size for the child and should be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

3 30 Safety features of your vehicle

For safety reasons, we recommend Placing a passenger seat belt that the child restraint system be WARNING - Child seat into the auto lock mode used in the rear seats. installation Never place a rear-facing child • Always follow the instructions restraint in the front passenger seat, provided by the child restraint because of the danger an inflating system manufacturer. Child passenger-side air bag could impact restraint system manufactur- the rear-facing child restraint and kill ers know their products best. the child. • Failure to observe this manu- Since all passenger seat belts move al's instructions regarding freely under normal conditions and child restraint system and the only lock under extreme or emer- instructions provided with the gency conditions (emergency lock child restraint system could mode), you must manually change result in the improper installa- these seat belts to the auto lock tion of the child restraint sys- E2MS103005 mode to secure a child restraint. tem which may reduce the The auto lock mode will help prevent If the seat belt does not operate as protection to your child in a the normal movement of the child in described in this section, have the crash or a sudden stop. the vehicle from causing the seat belt system checked immediately by your • If the vehicle headrest pre- to loosen and compromise the child authorized Kia dealer. vents proper installation of a restraint system. To secure a child child seat (as described in the restraint system, use the following child seat system manual), the procedure. headrest of the respective seating position shall be read- justed or entirely removed.

331 Safety features of your vehicle

OEN036101 OEN036102 OEN036103 To install a child restraint system on 3. Pull the shoulder portion of the 4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion the outboard or center rear seats, do seat belt all the way out. When the of the seat belt to retract and listen the following: shoulder portion of the seat belt is for an audible “clicking” or “ratchet- 1. Place the child restraint system in fully extended, it will shift the ing” sound. This indicates that the the seat and route the lap/shoul- retractor to the “Auto Lock” (child retractor is in the “Auto Lock” der belt around or through the restraint) mode. mode. If no distinct sound is restraint, following the restraint heard, repeat steps 3 and 4. manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure the seat belt webbing is not twisted. 2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into the buckle. Listen for the distinct “click” sound. Position the release button so that it is easy to access in case of an emergency.

3 32 Safety features of your vehicle

The lap/shoulder belt automatically returns to the “emergency lock WARNING - Auto lock mode” whenever the belt is allowed mode to retract fully. Therefore, the preced- Set the retractor to Automatic ing seven steps must be followed Lock mode when installing any each time a child restraint is child restraint system. If the installed. retractor is not in the Automatic To remove the child restraint, press Locking mode, the child the release button on the buckle and restraint can move when your then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of vehicle turns or stops suddenly. the restraint and allow the seat belt OEN036104 to retract fully. 5. Remove as much slack from the When the seat belt is allowed to belt as possible by pushing down retract to its fully stowed position, on the child restraint system while the retractor will automatically feeding the shoulder belt back into switch from the “Auto Lock” mode the retractor. to the emergency lock mode for normal adult usage. 6. Push and pull on the child restraint system to confirm that the seat belt is holding it firmly in place. If it is not, release the seat belt and repeat steps 2 through 6. 7. Double check that the retractor is in the “Auto Lock” mode by attempting to pull more of the seat belt out of the retractor. If you cannot, the retractor is in the “Auto Lock” mode.

333 Safety features of your vehicle

Securing a child restraint seat with tether anchor system WARNING - Tether strap Never mount more than one child restraint to a single tether or to a single lower anchorage point. The increased load caused by multiple seats may cause the tethers or anchorage points to break.

OXM039034N Check that the child restraint system is secure by pushing and pulling it in 1.Route the child restraint seat strap different directions. Incorrectly fitted over the seatback. OPS033019 child restraints may swing, twist, tip Child restraint hook holders are For vehicles with adjustable head- or separate causing death or serious located on the back of the rear seat- rests, route the tether strap under injury. backs. the headrest and between the headrest posts, otherwise route This symbol indicates the the tether strap over the top of the position of the tether anchor. seatback. In case of interference between the child restraint seat and the headrest remove the particular head restraint for better fit- ment of the child restraint seat. 2.Connect the tether strap hook to the appropriate child restraint hook holder and tighten to secure the child restraint seat.

3 34 Safety features of your vehicle

Securing a child restraint seat with Lower Anchor child seat lower anchor system Position Indicator WARNING - Unused rear seatbelts Always fasten the seatbelts behind the child restraint seat when they are not used to secure the child seat. Failure to do so may result in child stran- gulation.

Lower Anchor

OXM039060N Install the child restraint seat fully rearward against the seatback with Child restraint symbols are located the seatback reclined two positions on the left and right 2nd row seat OPS034059N from the most upright latched posi- backs to indicate the position of the tion. Some child seat manufacturers lower anchors for child restraints. make child restraint seats that are labeled as LATCH or LATCH-compatible child restraint seats. LATCH stands for "Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children". These seats include two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to two LATCH anchors at specific seating positions in your vehicle. This type of child restraint seat eliminates the need to use seat belts to attach the child seat in the rear seats.

335 Safety features of your vehicle

Once you have installed the LATCH child restraint, assure that the seat is WARNING - LATCH lower properly attached to the LATCH and anchors tether anchors. Never attempt to attach a Also, test the child restraint seat LATCH equipped seat in the before you place the child in it. Tilt center seating position. LATCH the seat from side to side. Also try to lower anchors are only to be tug the seat forward. Check to see if used with the left and right rear the anchors hold the seat in place. outboard seating positions. You may damage the anchors or the anchors may fail and break in a OXM039036N collision. LATCH anchors have been provided in your vehicle. The LATCH anchors ✽ are located in the left and right out- NOTICE board rear seating positions. Their The recommended weight for the locations are shown in the illustra- LATCH system is under 65 lb (30 tion. There is no LATCH anchor pro- kg). vided for the center rear seating How to calculate the child restraint position. weight : The LATCH anchors are located Child restraint weight = between the seatback and the seat 65 lb (30 kg) - Child weight cushion of the 2nd row seat left and right outboard seating positions. Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions to properly install child restraint seats with LATCH or LATCH-compatible attachments.

3 36 Safety features of your vehicle

AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (1) Driver’s front air bag (2) Passenger’s front air bag (3) Side air bag (4) Curtain air bag

Even in vehicles with air bags, you and your passengers must always wear the safety belts provided in order to minimize the risk and severity of injury in the event of a collision or rollover.

❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. OAM032026

337 Safety features of your vehicle

How does the air bag system • The front air bags will completely • In order to help provide protection, operate inflate and deflate in an instant. the air bags must inflate rapidly. • Air bags are activated (able to It is virtually impossible for you to The speed of the air bag inflation is inflate if necessary) only when the see the air bags inflate during an a consequence of extremely short ignition switch is turned to the ON accident. time in which to inflate the air bag or START position. between the occupant and the It is much more likely that you will vehicle structures before the occu- • The appropriate air bags inflate simply see the deflated air bags pant impacts those structures. This instantly in the event of a serious hanging out of their storage com- speed of inflation reduces the risk frontal collision or side collision in partments after the collision. of serious or life-threatening order to help protect the occupants • In addition to inflating in serious injuries and is thus a necessary from serious physical injury. side collisions, side and/or curtain part of the air bag design. • There is no single speed at which air bags will inflate if the sensing However, air bag inflation can also the air bags will inflate. system detects a rollover. cause injuries which can include Generally, air bags are designed to • When a rollover is detected, cur- facial abrasions, bruises and bro- inflate based upon the severity of a tain air bags will remain inflated ken bones because the inflation collision and its direction. These longer to help provide protection speed also causes the air bags to two factors determine whether the from ejection, especially when expand with a great deal of force. sensors produce an electronic used in conjunction with the seat • There are even circumstances deployment/ inflation signal. belts. under which contact with the • Air bag deployment depends on a steering wheel or passenger air number of factors including vehicle bag can cause fatal injuries, speed, angles of impact and the especially if the occupant is density and stiffness of the vehi- positioned excessively close to cles or objects which your vehicle the steering wheel or passenger hits in the collision. The determin- air bag. ing factors are not limited to those mentioned above.

3 38 Safety features of your vehicle

Noise and smoke WARNING - Airbag infla- When inflated, the air bags make a WARNING - Hot compo- tion loud noise and leave smoke and nents Sit as far back as possible from powder in the air inside the vehicle. Do not touch the air bag storage the steering wheel while still This is normal and is a result of the area's internal components maintaining comfortable con- ignition of the air bag inflator. After immediately after airbag infla- trol of your vehicle. A distance the air bag inflates, you may feel sub- tion. The air bag related parts in of at least 10" from your chest stantial discomfort in breathing due the steering wheel, instrument to the steering wheel is recom- to the contact of your chest with both panel and the roof rails above mended. Failure to do so can the seat belt and the air bag, as well the front and rear doors are result in airbag inflation injuries as from breathing the smoke and very hot. Hot components can to the driver. powder. Open your doors and/or result in burn injuries. windows as soon as possible after impact in order to reduce discomfort and prevent prolonged exposure to the smoke and powder. Though smoke and powder are non- toxic, it may cause irritation to the skin (eyes, nose and throat, etc). If this is the case, wash and rinse with cold water immediately and consult a doctor if the symptom persists.

339 Safety features of your vehicle

Do not install a child restraint on Air bag warning light the front passenger’s seat. WARNING - Air bag deployment When children are seated in the rear outboard seats of a vehicle equipped with side and/or curtain air bags, install the child restraint system as far away from the door side as possible. Inflation of the side and/or curtain air bags could impact the child.

W7-147 1JBH3051 The purpose of air bag warning light Never place a rear-facing child in your instrument panel is to alert restraint in the front passenger’s you of a potential problem with your seat. If the air bag deploys, it would air bag system, which could include impact the rear-facing child restraint, your side and/or curtain air bags causing serious or fatal injury. used for rollover protection. In addition, do not place front-facing child restraints in the front passenger’s seat either. If the front passenger air bag inflates, it could cause serious or fatal injuries to the child.

3 40 Safety features of your vehicle

When the ignition switch is turned SRS components and functions 10. PASSENGER “AIR BAG OFF” ON, the warning light should illumi- indicator (Front passenger’s seat nate for approximately 6 seconds, ,, only) then go off. Have the system 11. Occupant detection system checked by an authorized Kia dealer- (Front passenger’s seat only) ship if: 12. Driver’s and front passenger’s • The light does not turn on briefly seat belt buckle sensors when you turn the ignition ON. 13. Emergency fastening device • The light stays on after illuminating (EFD) for approximately 6 seconds. 14. Side pressure impact sensor • The light comes on while the vehicle is in motion. ,, The SRSCM continually monitors all • The light blinks when the ignition OPS034060N/Q switch is in ON position. SRS components while the ignition The SRS consists of the following switch is ON to determine if a crash components: impact is severe enough to require 1. Driver's front air bag module air bag deployment or pre-tensioner 2. Passenger's front air bag module seat belt deployment. 3. Side air bag modules 4. Curtain air bag modules 5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies 6. Air bag warning light 7. SRS control module (SRSCM)/ Rollover sensor 8. Front impact sensors 9. Side impact sensors

341 Safety features of your vehicle

If any of the following conditions Driver’s front air bag (1) occurs, this indicates a malfunction in the air bag system. Have an authorized Kia dealer inspect the air bag system as soon as possible. • The light does not turn on briefly when you turn the ignition ON. • The light stays on after illuminating for approximately 6 seconds. • The light comes on while the vehicle is in motion. W7-147 B240B01L • The light blinks when the ignition If the air bag warning light illuminat- switch is in ON position. The front air bag modules are located for more than, 6 seconds after the ed both in the center of the steering ignition is turned on, or of it illumi- wheel and in the front passenger's nates during vehicle operation, an panel above the glove box. When the SRS component may not be func- SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe tioning properly and you should have impact to the front of the vehicle, it your vehicle checked by an author- will automatically deploy the front air ized Kia dealer. bags.

3 42 Safety features of your vehicle

Driver’s front air bag (2) Driver’s front air bag (3) Passenger’s front air bag

B240B02L B240B03L B240B05L Upon deployment, tear seams mold- A fully inflated air bag, in combina- ed directly into the pad covers will tion with a properly worn seat belt, WARNING - Air bag separate under pressure from the slows the driver's or the passenger's obstructions expansion of the air bags. Further forward motion, reducing the risk of opening of the covers then allows full head and chest injury. Do not install or place any inflation of the air bags. accessories on the steering wheel, instrument panel, or on After complete inflation, the air bag the front passenger's panel immediately starts deflating, enabling above the glove box in a vehi- the driver to maintain forward visibility cle. Such objects may become and the ability to steer or operate dangerous projectiles if the air other controls. bag deploys.

343 Safety features of your vehicle

• The SRS can function only when Occupant Detection System WARNING - Flying objects the ignition switch is in the ON (ODS) Do not place any objects (an position. If the SRS air bag warning umbrella, bag, etc.) between the light does not illuminate, or contin- front door and the front seat. uously remains on after illuminat- Such objects may become dan- ing for about 6 seconds when the gerous projectiles if the side ignition switch is turned to the ON airbag inflates. position, or after the engine is started, comes on while driving, the SRS is not working properly. If • If an air bag deploys, there may be this occurs, have your vehicle a loud noise followed by a fine dust immediately inspected by an released in the vehicle. These con- authorized Kia dealer. ditions are normal and are not hazardous - the air bags are packed in ✽ NOTICE OPS033020 this fine powder. The dust generat- Before you replace a fuse or discon- Your vehicle is equipped with an ed during air bag deployment may occupant detection system in the cause skin or eye irritation as well nect a battery terminal, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi- front passenger's seat. as aggravate asthma for some per- The occupant detection system is sons. Always wash all exposed tion and remove the ignition switch. Never remove or replace the air bag designed to detect the presence of a skin areas thoroughly with luke- properly-seated front passenger and warm water and a mild soap after related fuse(s) when the ignition switch is in the ON position. Failure determine if the passenger's front air an accident in which the air bags bag should be enabled (may inflate) were deployed. to heed this warning will cause the SRS air bag warning light to illumi- or not. Only the front passenger front nate. air bag is controlled by the Occupant Detection System. Do not put anything in front of the passenger air bag indicator.

3 44 Safety features of your vehicle

Main components of the occu- If the front passenger seat is occupied • The ODS (Occupant Detection pant detection system by a person that the system deter- System) may not function properly if • A detection device located within mines to be of appropriate size, and the passenger takes actions which the front passenger seat cushion. he/she sits properly (sitting upright can defeat the detection system. with the seatback in an upright posi- These include: • An electronic system which deter- tion, centered on the seat cushion with (1) Failing to sit in an upright position. mines whether the passenger air their seat belt on, legs comfortably bag systems should be activated extended and their feet on the floor), (2) Leaning against the door or cen- or deactivated. the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” ter console. • A indicator light located on the indicator will turn off and the front pas- (3) Sitting towards the sides or the instrument panel which illuminates senger's air bag will be able to inflate, front of the seat. the words PASSENGER AIR BAG if necessary, in frontal crashes. (4) Putting legs on the dashboard or “OFF” indicating the front passen- You will find the PASSENGER AIR resting them on other locations ger air bag system is deactivated. BAG “OFF” indicator on the center which reduce the passenger • The instrument panel air bag warn- facia panel. This system detects the weight on the front seat. ing light is interconnected with the conditions 1~4 in the following table (5) Improperly wearing the safety occupant detection system. and activates or deactivates the front belt. passenger air bag based on these (6) Reclining the seat back. conditions. (7) Wearing a thick cloth like ski wear Always be sure that you and all vehicle or hip protection wear. occupants are seated and restrained properly (sitting upright with the seat in (8) Put on the seat an additional thick an upright position, centered on the cushion. seat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably extended, feet on the floor, and wearing the safety belt properly) for the most effective protection by the air bag and the safety belt.

345 Safety features of your vehicle

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant detection ✽ NOTICE system Do not modify or replace the front Indicator/Warning light Devices passenger seat. Don't place anything Condition detected by the "PASSENGER AIR on or attach anything such as a blan- occupant detection Front passenger BAG OFF" indicator SRS warning light ket, front seat cover or after market system air bag light seat heater to the front passenger seat. This can adversely affect the 1. Adult or child*1 Off Off Activated occupant detection system. 2. Child restraint system*2 On Off Deactivated 3. Unoccupied On Off Deactivated WARNING - ODS System 4. There is a malfunction Off On Activated in the system Riding in an improper position adversely affects the Occupant *1 : The ODS system uses a field to evaluate a person's size to determine whether the Detection System and may air bag should deploy. It is possible for a child to be detected and activate the ODS, result in the deactivation of the thus allowing the air bag to deploy.To maximize safety, do not allow children to ride front passenger airbag. It is in the front passenger seat. important for the driver to

2 instruct the passenger as to the * : Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat. proper seating instructions as contained in this manual. (Continued)

3 46 Safety features of your vehicle

(Continued)

OVQ036013N 1KMN3663 1KMN3665 - Never put a heavy load or an - Never sit with hips shifted - Never place feet on the dash- active electronic device on towards the front of the seat. board. the front passenger seat or seatback pocket.

OVQ036014N 1KMN3662 1KMN3664 - Never place feet on the front - Never excessively recline the - Never lean on the door or cen- passenger seatback. front passenger seatback. ter console. - Never sit on one side of the front passenger seat.

347 Safety features of your vehicle

Proper position If the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” ✽ NOTICE indicator is still on, ask the passen- The PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” ger to move to the rear seat. indicator illuminates for about 4 seconds after the ignition switch is WARNING - “AIR BAG turned to the ON position or after OFF” light the engine is started. If the front passenger seat is occupied, the occu- Do not allow an adult passenger pant detection sensor will then clas- to ride in the front seat when the sify the front passenger after several PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” more seconds. indicator is illuminated, because the air bag will not deploy in the B990A01O event of a crash. The driver When an adult is seated in the front must instruct the passenger to passenger seat, if the PASSENGER reposition himself in the seat. AIR BAG “OFF” indicator is on, turn Failure to properly position the ignition switch to the LOCK posi- yourself may lead to air bag tion and ask the passenger to sit deactivation resulting in air bag properly (sitting upright with the seat non-deployment in a collision. If back in an upright position, centered the PASSENGER AIR BAG on the seat cushion with their seat “OFF” indicator remains illumi- belt on, legs comfortably extended nated after the passenger repo- and their feet on the floor). Restart sitions themselves properly and the engine and have the person the car is restarted, it is recom- remain in that position. This will allow mended that passenger move to the system to detect the person and the rear seat because the pas- to enable the passenger air bag. senger's front air bag will not deploy.

3 48 Safety features of your vehicle

Any child age 12 and under should Driver's and passenger's front The indication of the system's pres- ride in the rear seat. Children too air bag ence are the letters "AIR BAG" large for child restraints should use embossed on the air bag pad cover the available lap/shoulder belts. No Driver’s front air bag on the steering wheel and the pas- matter what type of crash, children of senger's side front panel pad above all ages are safer when restrained in the glove box. the rear seat. If the occupant detection system is The SRS consists of air bags not working properly, the SRS air installed under the pad covers in the bag warning light on the instrument center of the steering wheel and the panel will illuminate because the passenger's side front panel above passenger's front air bag is connect- the glove box. ed with the occupant detection sys- OPS033021 The purpose of the SRS is to provide tem. If there is a malfunction of the Passenger’s front air bag occupant detection system, the PAS- the vehicle's driver and/or the front SENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indicator passenger with additional protection will not illuminate and the passen- than that offered by the seat belt sys- ger's front air bag will inflate in frontal tem alone in case of a frontal impact impact crashes even if there is no of sufficient severity. The SRS uses occupant in the front passenger's sensors to gather information about seat the driver's and front passenger's seat belt usage and impact severity. The seat belt buckle sensors determine if the driver and front passen- OPS033022 ger's seat belts are fastened. Your vehicle is equipped with an Advanced Supplemental Restraint (Air Bag) System and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver and passenger seating position.

349 Safety features of your vehicle

These sensors provide the ability to Additionally, your vehicle is equipped WARNING - Replacement control the SRS deployment based on with an occupant detection system in / modifica- whether or not the seat belts are fas- the front passenger's seat. The occu- tions tened, and how severe the impact is. pant detection system detects the The front passenger seat, dash- presence of a passenger in the front passenger's seat and will turn off the board or door should not be The advanced SRS offers the ability replaced except by an authorized front passenger's air bag under cer- to control the air bag inflation with tain conditions. For more detail, see Kia dealer using original Kia parts two levels. A first stage level is pro- designed for this vehicle and "Occupant detection system" in this vided for moderate-severity impacts. section. model. Any other such replace- A second stage level is provided for ment or modification could more severe impacts. adversely affect the operation of WARNING - Modification the occupant detection system and your advanced air bags. The passenger’s front air bag is Modification to the seat struc- designed to help reduce the injury of ture can cause the air bag to children sitting close to the instru- deploy at a different level than ment panel in low speed collisions. should be provided. - Seat Track CAUTION However, children are safer if they Sensor are restrained in the rear seat. Do not place any objects underneath the front seats as they could damage the seat track According to the impact severity and position sensor or interfere with seat belt usage, the SRSCM (SRS the occupant detection system. Control Module) controls the air bag inflation. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

3 50 Safety features of your vehicle

Manufacturers are required by gov- Advanced air bags are combined Rear impact ernment regulations to provide a with pre-tensioner seat belts to help contact point concerning modifica- provide enhanced occupant protec- tions to the vehicle for persons with tion in frontal crashes. Front air bags disabilities, which modifications may are not intended to deploy in colli- affect the vehicle’s advanced air bag sions in which sufficient protection system. That contact is Kia’s toll-free can be provided by the pre-tensioner Customer Assistance center at 1- seat belt. 800-333-4Kia. However, Kia does OEP036096N not endorse nor will it support any WARNING - SRS Wiring Side impact changes to any part or structure of the vehicle that could affect the Do not tamper with or discon- advanced air bag system, including nect SRS wiring or other com- the occupant detection system. ponents of the SRS system. Doing so could result in injury, due to accidental deployment of WARNING - Replacement / the air bags or by rendering the Modifications SRS inoperative. The front passenger seat, dash- OVQ036018N Rollover board or door should not be Front air bags are not intended to replaced except by an authorized deploy in side-impact, rear-impact or Kia dealer using original Kia parts rollover crashes. In addition, front air designed for this vehicle and bags will not deploy in frontal crash- model. Any other such replace- es below the deployment threshold. ment or modification could adversely affect the operation of the occupant detection system and your advanced air bags. 1VQA2091

351 Safety features of your vehicle

Side air bag Your vehicle is equipped with a side air • The side air bag is supplemental to bag in each front seat. The purpose of the driver's and the passenger's the air bag is to provide the vehicle's seat belt systems and is not a sub- driver and/or the front passenger with stitute for them. Therefore your additional protection than that offered seat belts must be worn at all times by the seat belt alone. while the vehicle is in operation. • The side air bags are designed to • For best protection from the side deploy during certain side-impact air bag system and to avoid being collisions, depending on the crash injured by the deploying side air severity, angle, speed and point of bag, both front seat occupants impact. should sit in an upright position OPS033023 • The side and/or curtain air bags do with the seat belt properly fas- not only deploy on the side of the tened. The driver's hands should impact but also on the opposite side. be placed on the steering wheel at • The side and/or curtain air bags on the 9:00 and 3:00 positions. The both sides of the vehicle will deploy if passenger's arms and hands a rollover or possible rollover is should be placed on their laps. detected. • The side air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact or rollover situations.

OPS033037 ❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may dif- WARNING - Unexpected fer from the illustration. deployment Avoid impact to the side impact airbag sensor when the ignition switch is ON to prevent unexpected deployment of the side impact air bag.

3 52 Safety features of your vehicle

Curtain air bag They are designed to help protect WARNING - Deployment occupants in certain side impacts Do not install any accessories and to help prevent them from eject- including seat covers, on the ing out of the vehicle as a result of a side or near the side impact air rollover, especially when the seat- bag as this may affect the belts are also in use. The curtain air deployment of the side air bags. bags are designed to deploy during certain side impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed • If seat or seat cover is damaged, and point of impact. The side and/or have the vehicle checked and curtain air bags do not only deploy on repaired by an authorized Kia deal- the side of the impact but also on the er. Inform the dealer that your vehi- OPS033024 opposite side. Also, the curtain air bags cle is equipped with side air bags on both sides of the vehicle will deploy and an occupant detection system. in certain rollover situations.The curtain air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact or rollover situations. Do WARNING - Flying not allow the passengers to lean their objects heads or bodies against the doors, put Do not place any objects (an their arms on the doors, stretch their umbrella, bag, etc.) between the arms out of the window or place objects front door and the front seat. between the doors and passengers when they are seated on seats Such objects may become dan- OPS033038 gerous projectiles if the side equipped with side impact and/or cur- airbag inflates. ❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may dif- tain air bags. fer from the illustration. Curtain air bags are located along ✽ NOTICE both sides of the roof rails above the Never try to open or repair any com- front and rear doors. ponents of the side and curtain air bag system. This should only be done by an authorized Kia dealer. 353 Safety features of your vehicle

Why didn’t my air bag go off in a Air bag collision sensors collision? (Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the air bag) There are many types of accidents in which the air bag would not be expected to provide additional protection. These include rear impacts, second or third collisions in multiple impact accidents, as well as low speed impacts.

1 2 3 4

OPS033025N/OPS033026/OPS033027/OPS033028/OPS033029 (1) SRS control module/Rollover (3) Side impact sensor sensor (4) Side pressure sensor (2) Front impact sensor 3 54 Safety features of your vehicle

• Problems may arise if the sensor Air bag inflation conditions WARNING - Air bag sen- installation angles are changed sors due to the deformation of the front • Do not hit or allow any objects bumper, front end module, body or to impact the locations where front doors and/or B pillar where air bags or sensors are side collision sensors are installed. installed. Have the vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized Kia deal- This may cause unexpected er. air bag deployment, which could result in serious per- • Installing bumper guards (or side sonal injury or death. step or running board) or replacing a bumper (or front door module) • If the installation location or with non-genuine parts may angle of the sensors is altered adversely affect your vehicle’s col- 1VQA2084 in any way, the air bags may lision and air bag deployment per- Front air bags deploy when they should not formance. or they may not deploy when Front air bags are designed to inflate they should. in a frontal collision depending on Therefore, do not try to per- the intensity, speed or angles of form maintenance on or impact of the front collision. around the air bag sensors. Have the vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized Kia dealer.

355 Safety features of your vehicle

Also, the side and curtain air bags are If the vehicle chassis is impacted by designed to inflate when a rollover is bumps or objects on unimproved detected by a rollover sensor. roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive Although the front air bags (driver’s carefully on unimproved roads or on and front passenger’s air bags) are surfaces not designed for vehicle designed to inflate in frontal colli- traffic to prevent unintended air bag sions, they also may inflate in other deployment. types of collisions if the front impact sensors detect a sufficient frontal force in another type of impact. Side OVQ036018N and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in certain side impact collisions. They may inflate in other type of collisions where a side force is detected by the sensors. Side air bag and/or curtain air bags may also inflate where rollover sensors indicate the possibility of a rollover occurring (even if none actually occurs) or in other situations, incluid- ing when the vehicle is tilted while OPS033039 being towed. Even where side and/or ❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may dif- curtain air bags would not provide fer from the illustration. impact protection in a rollover, how- Side and/or curtain air bags ever, they will deploy to prevent ejec- Side air bags (side and/or curtain air tion of occupants, especially those bags) are designed to inflate when an who are restrained with seat belts. impact is detected by side collision sensors depending on the strength, speed or angles of impact resulting from a side impact collision. 3 56 Safety features of your vehicle

Air bag non-inflation conditions

OUN036087 OVQ036018N

1VQA2086 • Air bags are not designed to inflate • Front air bags may not inflate in in rear collisions, because occu- side impact collisions, because • In certain low-speed collisions the pants are moved backward by the occupants move to the direction of air bags may not deploy. The air force of the impact. In this case, the collision, and thus in side bags are designed not to deploy in inflated air bags would not be able impacts, frontal air bag deployment such cases because they may not to provide any additional benefit. would not provide additional occu- provide benefits beyond the pro- pant protection. tection of the seat belts in such collisions.

357 Safety features of your vehicle

1VQA2089 1VQA2090 1VQA2091 • In an angled collision, the force of • Just before impact, drivers often • Front air bags may not inflate in impact may direct the occupants in brake heavily. Such heavy braking rollover accidents because front a direction where the air bags lowers the front portion of the vehi- airbag deployment would not pro- would not be able to provide any cle causing it to “ride” under a vehi- vide additional occupant protection. additional benefit, and thus the cle with a higher ground clearance. sensors may not deploy any air Air bags may not inflate in this bags. "under-ride" situation because deceleration forces that are detected by sensors may be significantly reduced by such “under-ride” collisions.

3 58 Safety features of your vehicle

SRS Care • For cleaning the air bag pad cov- The SRS is virtually maintenance- ers, use only a soft, dry cloth or free and so there are no parts you can one which has been moistened safely service by yourself. If the SRS with plain water. Solvents or clean- air bag warning light does not illumi- ers could adversely affect the air nate, or continuously remains on, bag covers and proper deployment have your vehicle immediately of the system. inspected by an authorized Kia dealer. • If components of the air bag system must be discarded, or if the vehicle must be scrapped, certain Any work on the SRS system, such safety precautions must be 1VQA2092 as removing, installing, repairing, or observed. An authorized Kia dealer any work on the steering wheel, the knows these precautions and can • Air bags may not inflate if the vehi- front passenger’s panel, front seats cle collides with objects such as give you the necessary informa- and roof rails must be performed by tion. Failure to follow these precau- utility poles or trees, where the an authorized Kia dealer. Improper point of impact is concentrated to tions and procedures could handling of the SRS system may increase the risk of personal injury. one area and the full force of the result in serious personal injury. impact is not delivered to the sensors.

359 Safety features of your vehicle

Adding equipment to or modi- Air bag warning label WARNING - Tampering fying your air bag-equipped with SRS vehicle Do not tamper with or discon- If you modify your vehicle by changing nect SRS wiring, or other com- your vehicle's frame, bumper system, ponents of the SRS system. front end or side sheet metal or ride Doing so could result in the height, this may affect the operation of accidental inflation of the air your vehicle's air bag system. bags or by rendering the SRS inoperative.

OAM039041 WARNING - Towing Vehicle Always have the ignition off when your vehicle is being towed. The side air bags may inflate if the vehicle is tilted such as when being towed because of the rollover sensors in the vehicle.

OPS033030 Air bag warning labels, some required by the U.S. National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), are attached to the sunvisor to alert the driver and passengers of potential risks of the air bag system.

3 60 Features of your vehicle

Key ...... 4-4 Windows ...... 4-24 • Record your key number ...... 4-4 • Power windows ...... 4-25 • Key operations ...... 4-4 Hood...... 4-29 • Transmitter precautions ...... 4-6 • Opening the hood ...... 4-29 • Battery replacement ...... 4-7 • Closing the hood ...... 4-29 • Immobilizer system ...... 4-8 Fuel filler lid ...... 4-31 Smart key ...... 4-10 • Opening the fuel filler lid ...... 4-31 • Record your key number ...... 4-10 • Closing the fuel filler lid ...... 4-31 • Smart key function ...... 4-10 Panoramic sunroof ...... 4-34 • Loss of the smart key ...... 4-13 • Sunroof open warning...... 4-35 • Smart key precautions ...... 4-13 • Sliding the sunroof ...... 4-35 4 • Smart key immobilizer system...... 4-14 • Tilting the sunroof...... 4-36 • Battery replacement ...... 4-16 • Sunshade ...... 4-37 Door locks ...... 4-17 • Resetting the sunroof ...... 4-38 • Operating door locks from outside the vehicle . . . . 4-17 Steering wheel...... 4-40 • Operating door locks from inside the vehicle...... 4-18 • Electric power steering (EPS) ...... 4-40 • Impact sensing door unlock system...... 4-20 • Tilt and telescopic steering ...... 4-41 • Auto door lock/unlock feature ...... 4-20 • Heated steering wheel ...... 4-42 • Speed sensing door lock system ...... 4-20 • Horn ...... 4-42 • Child-protector rear door lock ...... 4-21 • FLEX steer...... 4-43 Tailgate ...... 4-22 Mirrors ...... 4-45 • Opening the tailgate ...... 4-22 • Inside rearview mirror ...... 4-45 • Closing the tailgate ...... 4-22 • Outside rearview mirror ...... 4-47 • Emergency tailgate safety release ...... 4-23 Instrument cluster ...... 4-50 • Lighting control ...... 4-86 • Instrument Cluster Control ...... 4-51 • High beam operation ...... 4-87 • LCD Display Control ...... 4-51 • Turn signals and lane change signals ...... 4-88 • Gauges ...... 4-52 • Front fog light ...... 4-89 • Transaxle Shift Indicator ...... 4-56 Wipers and Washers ...... 4-90 LCD Display ...... 4-58 • Windshield wiper/washer ...... 4-90 • LCD Modes ...... 4-58 • Rear window wiper/washer ...... 4-90 • Service Mode ...... 4-59 • Windshield wipers ...... 4-90 • User Settings Mode ...... 4-60 • Windshield washers...... 4-91 • A/V Mode ...... 4-62 • Rear window wiper and washer switch ...... 4-92 4 • Turn By Turn Mode ...... 4-62 Interior light ...... 4-93 • Warning Messages...... 4-63 • Interior lamp auto cut...... 4-93 Trip computer...... 4-68 • Map lamp ...... 4-93 • Overview...... 4-68 • Room lamp...... 4-94 • Trip A/B ...... 4-69 • Luggage room lamp ...... 4-95 • Fuel Economy ...... 4-70 • Portable lamp usage ...... 4-95 Warning and indicator lights ...... 4-72 • Glove box lamp ...... 4-97 • Warning lights ...... 4-72 • Vanity mirror lamp ...... 4-97 • Indicator Lights...... 4-79 Defroster ...... 4-98 Rear camera display ...... 4-84 • Rear window defroster ...... 4-98 Lighting ...... 4-85 Manual climate control system ...... 4-100 • Headlamp escort ...... 4-85 • Heating and air conditioning ...... 4-101 • Battery saver function...... 4-85 • System operation ...... 4-106 • Daytime running light...... 4-85 • Climate control air filter...... 4-108 • Checking the amount of Interior features ...... 4-131 air conditioner refrigerant and • Cup holder ...... 4-131 compressor lubricant ...... 4-108 • Sunvisor ...... 4-132 • Air Conditioning refrigerant label ...... 4-109 • Seat warmer...... 4-132 Automatic climate control system...... 4-110 • Seat air ventilation ...... 4-134 • Automatic heating and air conditioning ...... 4-111 • Rear seat warmer ...... 4-135 • Manual heating and air conditioning ...... 4-112 • Power outlet ...... 4-136 • System operation ...... 4-118 • Clothes hanger...... 4-137 • Climate control air filter...... 4-120 • Floor mat anchor(s)...... 4-138 • Checking the amount of • Luggage net holder ...... 4-139 air conditioner refrigerant and • Cargo area cover ...... 4-139 4 compressor lubricant ...... 4-121 Exterior features...... 4-141 • Air Conditioning refrigerant label ...... 4-122 • Mounting bracket for roof carrier...... 4-141 Windshield defrosting and defogging...... 4-123 Audio system...... 4-143 • Manual climate control system ...... 4-123 • Antenna ...... 4-143 • Automatic climate control system ...... 4-124 • Audio remote control...... 4-144 • Defogging logic...... 4-125 • Aux, USB and iPod® port ...... 4-145 Clean air ...... 4-127 • Speaker lights...... 4-146 Storage compartment...... 4-128 • Center console storage ...... 4-128 • Glove box ...... 4-128 • Cool box ...... 4-129 • Sunglass holder ...... 4-129 • Luggage box...... 4-130 Features of your vehicle

KEY Record your key number Key operations • To unfold the key, press the release button (1) then the key will unfold The key code num- ■ Type A ber is stamped on automatically. To fold the key, fold the key code tag the key manually while pressing attached to the key the release button (1). set. Should you lose your keys, this number will CAUTION enable an authorized Kia dealer to duplicate the keys easily. Remove Do not fold the key without the key code tag and store it in a safe pressing the release button. place. Also, record the key code This may damage the key. number and keep it in a safe and OED036001A handy place, but not in the vehicle. ■ Type B WARNING - Aftermarket key Use only Kia original parts for the ignition key in your vehicle. If an aftermarket key is used, the ignition switch may not return to ON after START. If this happens, the starter will continue to operate causing damage OXMA043331 to the starter motor and possi- • Used to start the engine. ble fire due to excessive current in the wiring. • Used to lock and unlock the doors.

44 Features of your vehicle

Door Lock (1) Door Unlock (2) WARNING - Ignition 1. Press the unlock button(2). key(smart key) 2. The driver's door will unlock. The Never leave the keys in your hazard warning lights will blink two vehicle with unsupervised chil- times. dren. Leaving children unat- 3. Press the unlock button(2) twice tended in a vehicle with a man- within 4 seconds and all doors and ual ignition key or a smart key tailgate will unlock. The hazard is dangerous. Children copy warning lights will blink two times. adults and they could place the key in the ignition switch or press the start button. The key ✽ NOTICE would enable children to oper- OXMA043317 You can activate or deactivate the ate power windows or other Two Turn Unlock function. Refer to controls, or even make the vehi- 1. Close all doors, engine hood and "User settings" in this chapter. cle move, which could result in tailgate. serious bodily injury or death. 2. Press the lock button(1). result in serious bodily injury or 3. All doors and tailgate will lock. The death. hazard warning lights will blink once. 4. If the lock button is pressed once more within 4 seconds, the hazard warning lights will blink and the horn will sound once. 5. Make sure that doors are locked by checking the door lock button inside or pulling the outside door handle.

45 Features of your vehicle

Tailgate unlock (3) Transmitter precautions • When the transmitter does not work correctly, open and close the The tailgate is unlocked if the button • The transmitter will not work if any door with the ignition key. If you is pressed for more than 1 second. of following occur: have a problem with the transmit- Also, once the tailgate is opened and - The ignition key is in the ignition ter, contact an authorized Kia deal- then closed, the tailgate will be switch. er. locked automatically. - You exceed the operating dis- • If the transmitter is in close proxim- tance limit (about 30 feet [10 m]). ity to your mobile phone, the signal Panic (4) - The battery in the transmitter is could be blocked by your mobile The horn sounds and hazard warn- weak. phones normal operational signals. ing lights flash for about 30 seconds - Other vehicles or objects may be This is especially important when if this button is pressed for more than blocking the signal. the phone is active such as making and receiving calls, text messag- 1 second. To stop the horn and lights, - The weather is extremely cold. press any button except the trunk ing, and/or sending/receiving button on the transmitter. - The transmitter is close to a radio emails. Avoid placing the transmit- transmitter such as a radio sub- ter and your mobile phone in the station or an airport which can same pants or jacket pocket and interfere with normal operation of always try to maintain an adequate the transmitter. distance between the two devices.

64 Features of your vehicle

Battery replacement For replacement transmitters, see an CAUTION authorized Kia dealer for transmitter Keep the transmitter away from reprogramming. water or any liquid as it can • The transmitter is designed to give become damaged and not func- you years of trouble-free use, how- tion properly. ever it can malfunction if exposed to moisture or static electricity. If you are unsure how to use your trans- ✽ NOTICE mitter or replace the battery, contact If the keyless entry system is inoper- an authorized Kia dealer. ative due to exposure to water or liq- • Using the wrong battery can cause uids, it will not be covered by your the transmitter to malfunction. Be manufacturer’s vehicle warranty. sure to use the correct battery. OYDDCO2005 • To avoid damaging the transmitter, The transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it battery which will normally last for to heat or sunlight. several years. When replacement is necessary, use the following proce- • An inappropriately disposed dure. battery can be harmful to the environment and may cause 1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and human health. Dispose the gently pry open the transmitter battery according to your center cover. local law(s) or regulation. 2. Replace the battery with a new battery (CR2032). When replacing the battery, make sure the battery is positioned battery. 3. Install the battery in the reverse order of removal.

47 Features of your vehicle

Immobilizer system To activate the immobilizer sys- CAUTION - Transmitter (if equipped) tem: damage Your vehicle is equipped with an Turn the ignition key to the OFF posi- Do not drop, wet or expose the electronic engine immobilizer system tion. The immobilizer system acti- keyless entry system transmit- to reduce the risk of unauthorized vates automatically. Without a valid ter to heat or sunlight. vehicle use. ignition key for your vehicle, the Your immobilizer system is com- engine will not start. prised of a small transponder in the ignition key and electronic devices To deactivate the immobilizer inside the vehicle. system: With the immobilizer system, when- Insert the ignition key into the key ever you insert your ignition key into cylinder and turn it to the ON position. the ignition switch and turn it to ON, In order to prevent theft of your vehi- it checks and determines and verifies cle, do not leave spare keys any- if the ignition key is valid. where in your vehicle. Your If the key is determined to be valid, Immobilizer password is a customer the engine will start. unique password and should be kept If the key is determined to be invalid, confidential. Do not leave this num- the engine will not start. ber anywhere in your vehicle.

84 Features of your vehicle

✽ NOTICE This device complies with Part 15 CAUTION - Immobilizer of the FCC rules. When starting the engine, do not use damage the key with other immobilizer keys Operation is subject to the following around. Otherwise the engine may Do not expose your immobilizer two conditions: not start or may stop soon after it system to moisture, static elec- 1. This device may not cause harm- starts. Keep each key separate in tricity and rough handling. This ful interference, and may damage your immobilizer. order to avoid a starting malfunction. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including inter- Do not put metal accessories near ference that may cause undesired the ignition switch. CAUTION - Immobilizer operation. Metal accessories may interrupt the alterations Do not change, alter or adjust transponder signal and may prevent ✽ NOTICE the engine from being started. the immobilizer system because it could cause the immobilizer Changes or modifications not system to malfunction. expressly approved by the party ✽ NOTICE responsible for compliance could If you need additional keys or lose void the user’s authority to operate your keys, contact an authorized the equipment. If the keyless entry Kia dealer. system is inoperative due to changes or modifications not approved by the party responsible for compliance, it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.

49 Features of your vehicle

SMART KEY Record your key number Smart key function Door Lock The key code number is stamped on the key code tag attached to the key set. Should you lose your keys, this number will enable an authorized Kia dealer to duplicate the keys easily. Remove the key code tag and store it in a safe place. Also, record the key code number and keep it in a safe and handy place, but not in the vehicle. OXMA043316 OPS043010 To remove the mechanical key, press Using the door handle button and hold the release button(1) and 1. Carry the smart key. remove the mechanical key (2). 2. Close all doors, engine hood and To reinstall the mechanical key, put tailgate. the key into the hole and push it until 3. Press the button of the outside a click sound is heard. door handle. With a smart key, you can lock or 4. The hazard warning lights will blink unlock a door (and Tailgate) and start and the chime will sound once. the engine. 5. Make sure that doors are locked Refer to the following for more details. by pulling the outside door handle.

4 10 Features of your vehicle

The button will only operate when Unlocking the smart key is within 28~40 in. Using the door handle button (0.7~1m) from the outside door handle. 1. Carry the smart key. Even though you press the outside 2. Press the button of the driver's door handle button, the doors will not outside door handle. lock and the chime will sound for 3 3. The driver’s door will unlock. The seconds if any of following occur: hazard warning lights will blink and • The smart key is in the vehicle. the chime will sound two times. 4. Press the button twice within 4 • The engine start/stop button is in OXMA043316/Q ACC or ON position. seconds and all doors and the tail- Using the button on the smart key gate will unlock and the hazard • Any door except the tailgate is 1 Close all doors, engine hood and warning lights will blink and the open. tailgate. chime will sound two times. 2. Press the lock button(1). 3. The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound once. 4. Make sure that doors are locked by pulling the outside door handle.

411 Features of your vehicle

• The button will only operate when Using the button on the smart key Tailgate unlocking the smart key is within 28~40 in. 1. Press the unlock button(2) of the Using the tailgate handle button (0.7~1m) from the outside door smart key. 1. Carry the smart key. handle. 2. The driver’s door will unlock. The 2. Press the tailgate handle button. • When the smart key is recognized hazard warning lights will blink and 3. When all doors are locked, the in the area of 28~40 in. (0.7~1m) the chime will sound two times. hazard warning lights will blink two from the front outside door handle, 3. Press the unlock button(2) twice times. other people can also open the within 4 seconds and all doors and Once the tailgate is opened and doors. the tailgate will unlock. The hazard then closed, the tailgate will lock • After unlocking the driver’s door or warning lights will blink and the automatically. all doors, the door(s) will lock auto- chime will sound two times. matically unless the door is If you are within 28~40 in. (0.7~1 m) opened. ✽ NOTICE from the outside tailgate handle, with your smart key in possession, the After pressing the button, the doors tailgate will unlock and open when will lock automatically unless any you press the tailgate handle switch. door is opened within 30 seconds.

✽ NOTICE You can activate or deactivate the Two Turn Unlock function. Refer to "User settings" in this chapter.

4 12 Features of your vehicle

Using the button on the smart key Loss of the smart key Smart key precautions 1. Press the tailgate unlock button(3) A maximum of 2 smart keys can be • The smart key will not work if any for more than 1 second. registered to a single vehicle. of the following occur: 2. When all doors are locked, the If you happen to lose your smart key, - The smart key is close to a radio hazard warning lights will blink two you will not be able to start the transmitter such as a radio sta- times. engine. You should immediately take tion or an airport which can inter- the vehicle and remaining key to your fere with normal operation of the Panic authorized Kia dealer(tow the vehi- smart key. cle, if necessary) to protect it from - The smart key is near a mobile 1. Press the panic button(4) for more potential theft. than 1 second. two way radio system or a cellular phone. 2. The horn sounds and hazard warning light flash for about 30 - Another vehicle’s smart key is seconds. being operated close to your vehicle. • When the smart key does not work Start-up correctly, open and close the door You can start the engine without with the mechanical key and contact inserting the key. For detailed infor- an authorized Kia dealer. mation refer to the “Engine start/stop button” in chapter 5.

413 Features of your vehicle

• If the smart key is in close proximi- Smart key immobilizer system To deactivate the immobilizer ty to your cell phone or smart Your vehicle is equipped with an system: phone, the signal from the smart electronic engine immobilizer system Turn the engine start/stop button to key could be blocked by normal to reduce the risk of unauthorized the ON position by pressing the but- operation of your cell phone or vehicle use. ton while carrying the smart key. smart phone. This is especially important when the phone is active Your immobilizer system is com- such as making a call, receiving prised of a small transponder in the To activate the immobilizer system: calls, text messaging, and/or send- smart key and electronic devices Turn the engine start/stop button to ing/receiving emails. Avoid placing inside the vehicle. the OFF position. The immobilizer the smart key and your cell phone With the immobilizer system, when- system activates automatically. or smart phone in the same pants ever you turn the engine start/stop Without a valid smart key for your or jacket pocket and maintain ade- button to the ON position by pressing vehicle, the engine will not start. quate distance between the two the button while carrying the smart In order to prevent theft of your vehi- devices. key, it checks and determines and cle, do not leave spare keys any- verifies if the smart key is valid or not. where in your vehicle. Your CAUTION If the key is determined to be valid, Immobilizer password is a customer the engine will start. unique password and should be kept Keep the smart key away from If the key is determined to be invalid, confidential. Do not leave this num- water or any liquid as it can ber anywhere in your vehicle. become damaged and not func- the engine will not start. tion properly.

✽ NOTICE If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to exposure to water or liquids, it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.

4 14 Features of your vehicle

✽ NOTICE This device complies with Part 15 CAUTION - Immobilizer of the FCC rules. When starting the engine, do not use damage the key with other immobilizer keys Operation is subject to the following around. Otherwise the engine may Do not expose your immobilizer two conditions: not start or may stop soon after it system to moisture, static elec- 1. This device may not cause harm- starts. Keep each key separate in tricity and rough handling. This ful interference, and may damage your immobilizer. order to avoid a starting malfunction. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including inter- Do not put metal accessories near ference that may cause undesired the smart key. CAUTION - Immobilizer operation. The engine may not start because alterations Do not change, alter or adjust the metal accessories may interrupt ✽ NOTICE the transponder signal from transmit- the immobilizer system because ting normally. it could cause the immobilizer Changes or modifications not system to malfunction. expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could ✽ NOTICE void the user’s authority to operate If you need additional keys or lose the equipment. If the keyless entry your keys, contact an authorized system is inoperative due to changes Kia dealer. or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance, it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.

415 Features of your vehicle

Battery replacement 4.Install the battery in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION - Smart key • The smart key is designed to give damage you years of trouble-free use, how- Do not drop, get wet or expose ever it can malfunction if exposed the smart key to heat or sun- to moisture or static electricity. If light, or it will be damaged. you are unsure how to use or replace the battery, contact an authorized Kia dealer. • Using the wrong battery can cause the smart key to malfunction. Be sure to use the correct battery.

OPS043002 • To avoid damaging the smart key, don't drop it, get it wet, or expose it A smart key battery should last for to heat or sunlight. several years, but if the smart key is not working properly, try replacing • An inappropriately disposed the battery with a new one. If you are battery can be harmful to unsure how to use your smart key or the environment and human replace the battery, contact an health. Dispose the battery authorized Kia dealer. according to your local 1.Remove the mechanical key. law(s) or regulation. 2.Pry open the rear cover. 3.Replace the battery with a new battery (CR2032). When replacing the battery, make sure the battery position.

4 16 Features of your vehicle

DOOR LOCKS Operating. door locks from • From the driver's door ✽ NOTICE outside the vehicle - turn the key to the left once to • In cold and wet climates, door lock ■ Type A ■ Type B unlock the door and once more and door mechanisms may not within 4 seconds to unlock all work properly due to freezing con- doors. (for normal key). ditions. Lock - turn the key to the left once to • If the door is locked/unlocked Lock unlock the driver's door. (for fold- multiple times in rapid succession ing key, smart key. with either the vehicle key or door Unlock Unlock • Doors can also be locked and lock switch, the system may stop unlocked with the transmitter. operating temporarily in order to protect the circuit and prevent • Once the doors are unlocked, they damage to system components. may be opened by pulling the door handle. OPS043011 • When closing the door, push the • Turn the key clockwise to lock and door by hand. Make sure the doors counterclockwise to unlock. are closed securely. • If you lock the driver's door with a key - all vehicle doors will lock automatically. (for normal key) - only the driver's door will lock. (for folding key, smart key)

417 Features of your vehicle

Operating door locks from • To open a door, pull the door han- inside the vehicle dle (3) outward. With the door lock button • If the inner door handle of the driver’s (or front passenger’s) door is pulled when the door lock button is in the lock position, the button will unlock and the door will open. (if equipped) • Front doors cannot be locked if the ignition key is in the ignition switch and any front door is opened. Lock OPS043012 Unlock • To lock a door without the key, push the inside door lock button (1) or central door lock switch (2) to the “Lock” position and close the OPS043013 door (3). • To unlock a door, push the door • If you lock the door with the central lock button (1) to the “Unlock” posi- door lock switch (2), all vehicle tion. The red mark (2) on the button doors will lock automatically. will be visible. • To lock a door, push the door lock ✽ NOTICE button (1) to the “Lock” position. If the door is locked properly, the red Always remove the ignition key, mark (2) on the door lock button engage the parking brake, close all will not be visible. windows and lock all doors when leaving your vehicle unattended.

4 18 Features of your vehicle

If a power door lock ever fails to func- With central door lock switch • When pressing the rear portion (2) tion while you are in the vehicle, try of the switch, all vehicle doors will one or more of the following tech- Driver’s door unlock. niques to exit: • If the key is in the ignition switch • Operate the door unlock feature and any front door is opened, the repeatedly (both electronic and doors will not lock even though the manual) while simultaneously front portion (1) of the central door pulling on the door handle. lock switch is pressed. • Operate the other door locks and handles, front and rear. • Lower a front window and use the key to unlock the door from out- OPS043014 side. Passenger’s door • Move to the cargo area and open the tailgate.

OPS043015 Operate by pressing the central door lock switch. • When pressing the front portion (1) of the switch, all vehicle doors will lock.

419 Features of your vehicle

Impact sensing door unlock Speed sensing door lock sys- WARNING - Doors system tem (if equipped) The doors should always be In the event of air bag deployment All doors will be automatically locked fully closed and locked while resulting from a vehicle impact, all after the vehicle speed exceeds 9.3 the vehicle is in motion to pre- doors will automatically unlock. mph (15 km/h). And all doors will be vent accidental opening of the automatically unlocked when you door. Auto door lock/unlock feature turn the engine off or when you (if equipped) remove the ignition key. • All doors will automatically lock WARNING - Unattended when the transaxle shift lever is ✽ NOTICE children/ani- shifted out of P(Park). mals You can select some auto door • All doors will automatically unlock lock/unlock features in “User Never leave children or animals when the transaxle shift lever is Settings” as follows; unattended in your vehicle. An shifted into P (Park). • Speed sensing auto door lock enclosed vehicle can become • Auto door unlock when the igni- extremely hot, causing death or tion key is removed from the igni- severe injury to unattended tion switch or engine is turned off. children or animals who cannot • Auto door lock/unlock by shifting escape the vehicle. the shift lever out of P(Park) or into P(Park). For more information, refer to “User Settings” in this chapter.

4 20 Features of your vehicle

Child-protector rear door lock 3. Close the rear door. To open the rear door, pull the outside door handle. Even though the doors may be unlocked, the rear door will not open by pulling the inner door handle (1) until the rear door child safety lock is unlocked.

WARNING - Rear door locks Use the rear door safety locks OPS043016 whenever children are in the The child safety lock is provided to vehicle. If a child accidently help prevent children from acciden- opens the rear doors while the tally opening the rear doors from vehicle is motion, he can fall out. inside the vehicle. The rear door safety locks should be used whenever children are in the vehicle. 1. Open the rear door. 2. Push the child safety lock located on the rear edge of the door to the lock ( ) position. When the child safety lock is in the lock position, the rear door will not open even when the inner door handle is pulled.

421 Features of your vehicle

TAILGATE Opening the tailgate ✽ NOTICE Closing the tailgate In cold and wet climates, door lock and door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

The tailgate swings upward. Make sure no objects or people are near the rear of the vehicle when opening the tailgate.

CAUTION - Tailgate lift Make certain that you close the OPS043017 tailgate before driving your OPS043018 • The tailgate is locked or unlocked vehicle. Possible damage may To close the tailgate, lower and push when all doors are locked or occur to the tailgate lift cylin- down the tailgate firmly. Make sure unlocked with the key, transmitter ders and attached hardware if that the tailgate is securely latched. (or smart key) or central door lock the tailgate is not closed prior to Make sure your hands, feet and switch. driving. other parts of your body are safely • If unlocked, the tailgate can be out of the way before closing the tail- opened by pressing the handle gate. switch and then pulling the handle up. • Only the tailgate is unlocked if the tailgate unlock button on the smart key is pressed (if equipped). Once the tailgate is opened and then closed, the tailgate is locked automatically.

4 22 Features of your vehicle

Emergency tailgate safety CAUTION - Exhaust fumes release WARNING Driving with the tailgate open is • No one should be allowed to not advisable. Dangerous occupy the cargo area of the exhaust fumes can enter the vehicle at any time. The cargo passenger compartment. If you area is a very dangerous loca- must drive with the tailgate tion in the event of a crash. opened, keep the air vents and • Use the release lever for all windows open so that addi- emergencies only. Use with tional outside air can enter. extreme caution, especially while the vehicle is in motion. WARNING - Rear cargo area OPS043019 Occupants should never ride in the rear cargo area where no Your vehicle is equipped with an restraints are available. emergency tailgate safety release Occupants should always be lever located on the bottom of the properly restrained. tailgate. When someone is inadvertently locked in the cargo area, the tailgate can be opened by pushing the release lever and pushing open the tailgate.

423 Features of your vehicle

WINDOWS (1) Driver’s door power window switch (2) Front passenger’s door power window switch (3) Rear door (left) power window switch (4) Rear door (right) power window switch (5) Window opening and closing (6) Automatic power window up/down (7) Power window lock switch

In cold and wet climates, power windows may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

OPS043020

4 24 Features of your vehicle

Power windows ✽ NOTICE Window opening and closing The ignition switch must be in the ON While driving with the rear windows position for power windows to operate. down or with the sunroof (if Each door has a power window equipped) in an open (or partially switch that controls the door's win- open) position, your vehicle may dow. The driver has a power window demonstrate a wind buffeting or lock button which can block the oper- pulsation noise. This noise is a nor- ation of the rear passenger windows. mal occurrence and can be reduced The power windows can be operated or eliminated by taking the follow- for approximately 30 seconds after ing actions. If the noise occurs with the ignition key is removed or turned one or both of the rear windows to the ACC or LOCK position. down, partially lower both front windows approximately one inch. If However, if the front doors are OPS043021 opened, the power windows cannot you experience the noise with the be operated even within the 30 sec- sunroof open, slightly reduce the The driver’s door has a master power ond period. size of the sunroof opening. window switch that controls all the windows in the vehicle. To open or close a window, press down or pull up the front portion of the corresponding switch to the first detent position (5).

425 Features of your vehicle

Auto down window (if equipped) Auto up/down window 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON (if equipped) position. 2. Close the driver’s window and continue pulling up the driver’s power window switch for at least 1 second after the window is completely closed.

OPS043203 Pressing the power window switch OPS043022 momentarily to the second detent Pressing or pulling up the power win- position (6) completely lowers the dow switch momentarily to the sec- driver’s window even when the ond detent position (6) completely switch is released. To stop the win- lowers or raises the window even dow at the desired position while the when the switch is released. To stop window is in operation, momentarily the window at the desired position pull up the switch to the opposite while the window is in operation, pull direction of the window movement. up or press down and release the switch. If the power window does not operate normally, the automatic power window system must be reset as follows:

4 26 Features of your vehicle

And if the power window switch is pulled up continuously again within 5 WARNING seconds after the window is lowered Always check for obstructions by the automatic window reversal before raising any window to feature, the automatic window rever- avoid injuries or vehicle damage. sal will not operate. If an object less than 4 mm (0.16 in.) in diameter is caught The automatic reverse feature for the between the window glass and driver’s window is only active when the upper window channel, the the “auto up” feature is used by fully automatic reverse window may pulling up the switch. The automatic not detect the resistance and will OUN026013 reverse feature will not operate if the not stop and reverse direction. Automatic reversal window is raised using the halfway If the upward movement of the win- position on the power window switch. dow is blocked by an object or part of the body, the window will detect the resistance and will stop upward movement. The window will then lower approximately 11.8 in. (30 cm) to allow the object to be cleared. The distance may vary based on the size or position of the window. If the window detects the resistance while the power window switch is pulled up continuously, the window will stop upward movement then lower approximately 1 in. (2.5 cm).

427 Features of your vehicle

Power window lock button • When the power window lock Always double check to make sure switch is pressed : all arms, hands, head and other - The driver's master control can obstructions are safely out of the way operate all the power windows. before closing a window. - The front passenger's control can operate the front passenger's WARNING - Power win- power window. dows - The rear passenger's control can- Do not allow children to play not operate the rear passenger's with the power windows. Keep power window. the power window lock switch (on the driver's door) in the CAUTION - Opening /clos- LOCK (pressed) position. OPS043023 ing Window • The driver can disable the power window switches on the passenger To prevent possible damage to doors by pressing the power win- the power window system, do dow lock button located on the dri- not open or close two windows ver’s door to the LOCK position or more at the same time. This (pressed). will also ensure the longevity of the fuse.

4 28 Features of your vehicle

HOOD Opening the hood Closing the hood 1. Before closing the hood, check the following: • All filler caps in the engine compartment must be correctly installed. 2. Lower the hood halfway and push down to securely lock in place.

OPS043025

OPS043024 2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the hood slightly, pull the second- 1. Pull the release lever to unlatch ary latch (1) inside of the hood the hood. The hood should pop center and lift the hood (2). open slightly. 3. Raise the hood. It will completely Open the hood after turning off the rise by itself after it has been engine on a flat surface, shifting the raised about halfway. shift lever to the P (Park) position for automatic transaxle and to the 1st (First) gear or R (Reverse) for manual transaxle, and setting the parking brake.

429 Features of your vehicle

WARNING WARNING - Unsecured Before closing the hood, ensure engine hood that all obstructions are Always double check to be sure removed from the hood open- that the hood is firmly latched ing. Closing the hood with an before driving away. If it is not obstruction present in the hood latched, the hood could fly open opening may result in severe while the vehicle is being driv- personal injury. en, causing a total loss of visibility, which might result in an accident. ODMNMC2034 WARNING - Fire risk When you check the engine com- Do not leave gloves, rags or any partment, Take caution to avoid con- other combustible material in the tacting your head with the safety engine compartment. Doing so hook which is located inside of the may cause a heat-induced fire. hood.

4 30 Features of your vehicle

FUEL FILLER LID Opening the fuel filler lid Closing the fuel filler lid 1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until it “clicks” once. This indicates that the cap is securely tightened. 2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it in lightly making sure that it is securely closed.

✽ NOTICE There may be an intermittent noise OPS043027 near the refueling hole while the OPS043026 1. Stop the engine. engine is idling if the fuel cap is not 2. To open the fuel filler lid, push the closed securely. This occurs normal- The fuel filler lid must be opened ly with the OBD system. from inside the vehicle by pulling up fuel filler lid opener button. the fuel filler lid opener. 3. Pull open the fuel filler lid (1). ✽ NOTICE If the fuel filler lid does not open 4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel When refueling fully at an up hill, because ice has formed around it, filler cap (2) counterclockwise. the fuel gauge may not point to the F tap lightly or push on the lid to break 5. Refuel as needed. position. the ice and release the lid. Do not pry It is not a malfunction. If you move on the lid. If necessary, spray around your vehicle to a level ground, the fuel the lid with an approved de-icer fluid gauge will move to the full position. (do not use radiator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt.

431 Features of your vehicle

WARNING - Refueling WARNING - Fire/explo- WARNING - Static elec- Always remove the fuel cap sion risk tricity carefully and slowly. If the cap Read and follow all warnings • Before touching the fuel nozzle, is venting fuel or if you hear a posted at the gas station facili- you should eliminate potentially hissing sound, wait until the ty. Failure to follow all warnings dangerous static electricity dis- condition stops before com- will result in severe personal charge by touching another pletely removing the cap. If injury, severe burns or death metal part of the vehicle, a safe pressurized fuel sprays out, it due to fire or explosion. distance away from the fuel can cover your clothes or skin filler neck, nozzle, or other gas and subject you to the risk of source. fire and burns. • Do not get back into a vehicle once you have begun refueling since you can generate static Always check that the fuel cap is electricity by touching, rubbing installed securely to prevent fuel or sliding against any item or spillage in the event of an accident. fabric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.) capable of producing static ✽ NOTICE electricity. Static electricity discharge can ignite fuel vapors Tighten the cap until it clicks once, resulting in rapid burning. If you otherwise the fuel cap open warning must reenter the vehicle, you indicator light will illuminate should once again eliminate potentially dangerous static electricity discharge by touching a metal part of the vehicle, away from the fuel filler neck, nozzle or other gasoline source.

4 32 Features of your vehicle

Make sure to refuel your vehicle WARNING - Portable fuel WARNING - Smoking according to the “Fuel requirements” container DO NOT use matches or a lighter suggested in chapter 1. When using an approved portable and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit If the fuel filler cap requires replace- fuel container, be sure to place cigarette in your vehicle while at ment, use only a genuine Kia cap or the container on the ground prior a gas station especially during the equivalent specified for your vehi- to refueling. Static electricity dis- refueling. Automotive fuel is cle. An incorrect fuel filler cap can charge from the container can highly flammable and can, when result in a serious malfunction of the ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. ignited, result in fire. fuel system or emission control sys- Once refueling has begun, con- tem. tact with the vehicle should be maintained until the filling is com- WARNING - Refueling & CAUTION - Exterior paint plete. Use only approved portable Vehicle fires Do not spill fuel on the exterior plastic fuel containers designed When refueling, always shut the to carry and store gasoline. surfaces of the vehicle. Any engine off. Sparks produced by type of fuel spilled on painted electrical components related surfaces may damage the paint. to the engine can ignite fuel WARNING - Cell phone vapors causing a fire. Once fires refueling is complete, check to Do not use cellular phones make sure the filler cap and while refueling. Electric current filler door are securely closed, and/or electronic interference before starting the engine. from cellular phones can potentially ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.

433 Features of your vehicle

PANORAMIC SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED) ✽ NOTICE ✽ NOTICE • In cold and wet climates, the sun- The sunroof cannot tilt when it is in roof may not work properly due to the slide position but can be slid freezing conditions. while in a tilt position. • After a vehicle is washed or in a rainstorm be sure to wipe off any water that is on the sunroof before WARNING - Roof cargo operating it. Do not operate the sun roof while using the roof rack to transport cargo.This may cause CAUTION - Sunroof control the cargo to come loose and OPS043028 Do not continue to pull or push distract the driver. If your vehicle is equipped with a the sunroof glass control lever sunroof, you can slide or tilt your after the sunroof is fully sunroof with the sunroof glass con- opened, closed, or tilted. trol lever located on the overhead Damage to the motor or system console (1). components could occur.

The sunroof can only be opened, closed, or tilted when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

4 34 Features of your vehicle

Sunroof open warning Sliding the sunroof When the sunshade is opened (if equipped) If you pull the sunroof glass control lever backward, the sunroof glass will slide all the way open. To stop the sunroof glass movement at any point, pull or push the sunroof control lever momentarily.

To close the sunroof glass pull (or push) the sunroof glass control lever downward (or forward). • Type A OPS043029 When you push the sunroof glass OPS043120 When the sunshade is closed control lever forward or pull it If the driver removes the ignition key If you pull the sunroof control lever downward, the sunshade will be (smart key: turns off the engine) backward, both the sunshade and closed halfway and glass will be when the sunroof is not fully closed, sunroof glass will slide all the way closed at the same time. And then the warning chime will sound for a open. To stop the sunroof movement sunshade will be fully closed final- few seconds and a message will at any point, pull or push the sunroof ly. appear on the LCD display or warn- control glass lever momentarily. • Type B ing indicator will illuminate. When you push the sunroof glass Close the sunroof securely when control lever forward or pull it leaving your vehicle. downward while the sunshade opened, the glass will be closed.

435 Features of your vehicle

Automatic reversal Tilting the sunroof To tilt down (or close) the sunroof - Push the sunroof glass control lever forward or pull it downward • Type A When you push the sunroof glass control lever forward or pull it downward while the sunshade opened, the sunshade will be closed halfway and then glass will be tilt down and then sunshade will be fully closed finally. • Type B OXM049029 OPS043030 When you push the sunroof glass If an object or part of the body is Before opening or closing the sun- control lever forward or pull it detected while the sunroof is closing roof, open the sunshade (refer to the downward while the sunshade automatically, it will reverse the direc- following page for instructions on opened, the glass will be tilt down. tion, and then stop. how to use the sunshade). Do not leave the sunshade closed The auto reverse function does not To tilt up the sunroof while the sunroof is opened. work if a tiny obstacle is between the - Push the sunroof glass control sliding glass and the sunroof sash. lever upward. You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from ❈ When you push the sunroof glass the sunroof before closing it. control lever upward while the sunshade closed, the sunshade will be opened halfway and then glass will be tilt up.

4 36 Features of your vehicle

Do not extend the face, neck, arms Sunshade or body outside the sunroof while CAUTION - Sunroof motor driving. damage • Periodically remove any dirt that may accumulate on the WARNING - Panoramic guide rail. sunroof • If you try to open the sunroof Your panoramic sunroof is when the temperature is below made of glass which can break freezing or when the sunroof is if impacted with sufficient force. covered with snow or ice, the If your sunroof breaks while you glass or the motor could be are driving your vehicle, remain damaged. calm, safely pull your vehicle out of traffic and park your vehi- OPS043031 cle in a safe location where you To open the sunshade can call for assistance. Press the sunshade open button (1). To stop the sliding at any point, press WARNING - Sunroof the sunshade control switch momen- Operation tarily. When closing the sunroof, make sure there are no body parts in the movement range of the sliding roof. Parts of the body could become trapped or crushed.

437 Features of your vehicle

To close the sunshade when the ✽ NOTICE Resetting the sunroof sunroof glass is closed Wrinkles formed on the sunshade as Whenever the vehicle battery is dis- - Press the sunshade close button (2). material characteristic are normal. connected or discharged, you must ❈ When you press the sunshade reset your sunroof system as follows: close button(2) with the sunroof CAUTION - Automatic glass opened sunroof shade 1.Turn the ignition switch to the ON • Type A position. • Do not pull or push the sun- The sunshade will be closed shade by hand as such action 2.Close the sunshade and sunroof halfway. may damage the sunshade or completely if opened. • Type B cause it to malfunction. 3.Release the sunroof control lever. The sunshade will be closed • Close the sunroof when driv- 4.Push the sunroof control lever for- halfway, then sunroof glass will be ing in dusty environments. ward in the direction of close (about closed and then sunshade will be Dust may cause a malfunction 10 seconds) until the sunroof moves fully closed finally. of the vehicle system. a little. Then, release the lever. - Push the sunroof control lever forward or pull it down. To stop the sliding at any point, press the sunshade control switch momentarily.

4 38 Features of your vehicle

5.Push the sunroof control lever forward in the direction of close, until the sunroof operates as follows again:

The sunshade and sunroof glass slide open → The sunroof glass slide close → The sunshade close

Then, release the lever.

When this is complete, the sunroof system has been reset.

✽ NOTICE If you do not reset the sunroof, it may not work properly.

439 Features of your vehicle

STEERING WHEEL Electric power steering (EPS) • If the Electric Power Steering ✽ NOTICE The power steering uses a motor to System does not operate normally, The following symptoms may occur assist you in steering the vehicle. If the warning light will illuminate on during normal vehicle operation: the engine is off or if the power steer- the instrument cluster. The steering • The EPS warning light does not ing system becomes inoperative, the wheel may require increased illuminate. vehicle may still be steered, but it will steering effort. Take your vehicle to • The steering gets heavy immedi- require increased steering effort. an authorized Kia dealer and have ately after turning the ignition the vehicle checked as soon as switch on. This happens as the sys- The motor driven power steering is possible. controlled by a power steering con- tem performs the EPS system trol unit which senses the steering • When you operate the steering diagnostics. When the diagnostics wheel torque and vehicle speed to wheel in low temperature, noise are completed, the steering wheel command the motor. may occur. If temperature rises, the will return to its normal condition. noise will likely disappear. This is a • A click noise may be heard from The steering becomes heavier as normal condition. the EPS relay after the ignition the vehicle’s speed increases and switch is turned to the ON or becomes lighter as the vehicle’s • When the vehicle is stationary, when the steering wheel is turned LOCK (OFF) position. speed decreases for optimum steer- • A motor noise may be heard when ing control. all the way to the left or right continuously, the steering wheel the vehicle is at a stop or at a low Should you notice any change in the becomes harder to turn. The power driving speed. effort required to steer during normal assist is limited to protect the • If the Electric Power Steering vehicle operation, have the power motor from overheating. System does not operate normally, steering checked by an authorized the warning light will illuminate on Kia dealer. As time passes, the steering wheel return to its normal condition. the instrument cluster. The steering wheel may become difficult to control or operate abnormally. Take your vehicle to an authorized Kia dealer and have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. (Continued)

4 40 Features of your vehicle

(Continued) Tilt and telescopic steering • When you operate the steering Tilt and telescopic steering allows wheel in low temperature, abnor- you to adjust the steering wheel mal noise may occur. If tempera- before you drive.You can also raise it ture rises, the noise will likely dis- to give your legs more room when appear. This is a normal condition. you exit and enter the vehicle. • When the charging system warning light comes on due to the low voltage (When the alternator or The steering wheel should be posi- battery) does not operate normal- tioned so that it is comfortable for ly or it malfunctions), the steering you to drive, while permitting you to see the instrument panel warning wheel may require increased OPS043032 steering effort. lights and gauges. To change the steering wheel angle, pull down the lock-release lever (1), WARNING - Steering adjust the steering wheel to the wheel adjustment desired angle (2) and height (3, if Never adjust the angle and equipped) then pull up the lock- height of the steering wheel release lever to lock (4) the steering while driving. You may lose wheel in place. Be sure to adjust the steering control. steering wheel to the desired position before driving.

441 Features of your vehicle

Heated steering wheel ✽ NOTICE Horn (if equipped) The heated steering wheel will turn off automatically approximately 30 minutes after the heated steering wheel is turned on.

CAUTION • Do not install any grip to operate the steering wheel. This causes damage to the heated steering wheel system.

• When cleaning the heated OPS043034 OPS043033 steering wheel, do not use an organic solvent such as paint To sound the horn, press the horn With the ignition switch in the ON thinner, benzene, alcohol and symbols on your steering wheel. position, pressing the heated steer- gasoline. Doing so may dam- Check the horn regularly to be sure it ing wheel button warms the steering age the surface of the steering operates properly. wheel. The indicator on the button wheel. will illuminate. • If the surface of steering ✽ NOTICE To turn the heated steering wheel off, press the button once again. The wheel is damaged by sharp To sound the horn, press the area indicator on the button will turn off. object, damage to the heated indicated by the horn symbol on steering wheel components your steering wheel (see illustra- could occur. tion). The horn will operate only when this area is pressed.

4 42 Features of your vehicle

FLEX STEER Normal mode

OPS043209

OPS043036 When the steering mode button is OPS043129 pressed, the selected steering mode The FLEX STEER controls steering will appear on the instrument cluster. The normal mode offers medium effort based upon as driver's prefer- steering effort. ence or road condition. If the steering mode button is pressed within 4 seconds, the steering mode You can select the desired steering will change as shown above. mode by pressing the FLEX STEER button. If the steering wheel mode button is not pressed for about 4 seconds, the LCD display will change to the previous screen (for Type B cluster).

443 Features of your vehicle

Sport mode Comfort mode • For your safety, if you press the steering mode button while operating the steering wheel, but the steering effort will not change immediately. After operating the steering wheel, the steering effort will change automatically to the selected mode. • Use caution when changing the steering mode while driving. • When the electronic power steering is not operating properly, the flex steering wheel will not work. OPS043130 OPS043131 The steering wheel becomes heav- The steering wheel becomes lighter. ier. The sport mode is usually used The comfort mode is usually used when driving on the highway. when driving in the city or when parking the vehicle.

4 44 Features of your vehicle

MIRRORS Inside rearview mirror Day/night rearview mirror - Mirror adjust- Adjust the rearview mirror so that the WARNING (if equipped) center view through the rear window ment is seen. Make this adjustment before Do not adjust the rearview mir- you start driving. ror while the vehicle is moving. Do not place objects in the rear seat This could result in loss of control. or cargo area which would interfere Night with your vision through the rear window. WARNING Do not modify the inside mirror and don’t install a wide mirror. It could result in injury, during an Day accident or deployment of the OAM049023 air bag. Make this adjustment before you start driving and while the day/night lever is in the day position. Pull the day/night lever toward you to reduce the glare from the headlights of the vehicles behind you during night driving. Remember that you lose some rearview clarity in the night position.

445 Features of your vehicle

Electric chromic mirror (ECM) (if equipped) CAUTION - Cleaning The electric rearview mirror automat- mirror ically controls the glare from the When cleaning the mirror, use a headlights of the vehicles behind you paper towel or similar material in nighttime or low light driving condi- dampened with glass cleaner. tions. The sensor mounted in the mir- Do not spray glass cleaner ror senses the light level around the directly on the mirror. It may vehicle, and automatically controls cause the liquid cleaner to enter Indicator Sensor the headlight glare from the vehicles the mirror housing. behind you. When the engine is running, the OAM042349L glare is automatically controlled by To operate the electric rearview mirror: the sensor mounted in the rearview • The mirror defaults to the ON posi- mirror. tion whenever the ignition switch is Whenever the shift lever is shifted turned on. into reverse (R), the mirror will auto- • Press the ON/OFF button (1) to matically go to the brightest setting in turn the automatic dimming func- order to improve the drivers view tion off. The mirror indicator light behind the vehicle. will turn off. Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn the automatic dimming function on. The mirror indicator light will illuminate.

4 46 Features of your vehicle

Outside rearview mirror CAUTION - Rearview WARNING - Mirror adjust- Be sure to adjust the mirror angles mirror before driving. ment Do not scrape ice off the mirror Your vehicle is equipped with both Do not adjust or fold the outside face; this may damage the sur- rearview mirrors while the vehi- left-hand and right-hand outside face of the glass. If ice should rearview mirrors. The mirrors can be cle is moving. This could result restrict the movement of the mir- in loss of control. adjusted remotely with the remote ror, do not force the mirror for switch. The mirror heads can be fold- adjustment. To remove ice, use a ed back to prevent damage during an deicer spray, or a sponge or soft automatic vehicle wash or when cloth with very warm water. passing through a narrow street. The right outside rearview mirror is convex. Objects seen in the mirror If the mirror is jammed with ice, do are closer than they appear. not adjust the mirror by force. Use an Use your interior rearview mirror or approved spray de-icer (not radiator direct observation to determine the antifreeze) to release the frozen actual distance of following vehicles mechanism or move the vehicle to a when changing lanes. warm place and allow the ice to melt.

447 Features of your vehicle

Remote control Folding the outside rearview mirror CAUTION - Outside mirror • The mirrors stop moving when they reach the maximum adjusting angles, but the motor continues to operate while the switch is pressed. Do not press the switch longer than necessary, the motor may be damaged. • Do not attempt to adjust the outside rearview mirror by OPS043035 hand. Doing so may damage OPS043037 the parts. Electric type Manual type The electric remote control mirror To fold the outside rearview mirror, switch allows you to adjust the position grasp the housing of the mirror and of the left and right outside rearview then fold it toward the rear of the mirrors. To adjust the position of either vehicle. mirror the ignition switch should be in the ACC position. Move the switch (1) to R or L to select the right side mirror or the left side mirror, then press a corresponding point on the mirror adjustment control to position the selected mirror up, down, left or right. After the adjustment, put the switch into the neutral (center) position to prevent inadvertent adjustment.

4 48 Features of your vehicle

Center (AUTO, 3) : The mirror will fold or unfold auto- CAUTION - Electric type matically as follows: outside rearview mirror • Without smart key system The electric type outside - The mirror will fold or unfold when rearview mirror operates even the door is locked or unlocked by though the ignition switch is in the transmitter. the OFF position. However, to • With smart key system prevent unnecessary battery - The mirror will fold or unfold when discharge, do not adjust the the door is locked or unlocked by mirrors longer than necessary OPS043038 the smart key. while the engine is not running. Electric type - The mirror will fold or unfold when In case it is an electric type outside rearview mirror, don’t fold it The outside rearview mirror can be the door is locked or unlocked by the button on the outside door by hand. It could cause motor folded or unfolded by pressing the failure. switch as below. handle. Left (1) : The mirror will unfold. - The mirror will unfold when you approach the vehicle (all doors Right (2) : The mirror will fold. closed and locked) with a smart key in possession. (if equipped)

449 Features of your vehicle

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ■ Type A

1. Tachometer 2. Speedometer 3. Engine coolant temperature gauge 4. Fuel gauge 5. LCD display 6. Warning and indicator lights (if equipped) ■ Type B 7. Turn signal indicator lights

❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. For more details, refer to the "Gauges" in this chapter.

OPS043100N/OPS043101N

4 50 Features of your vehicle

Instrument Cluster Control ■ Type A LCD Display Control

Adjusting Instrument Cluster ■ Type A Illumination

OPS043117 ■ Type B OPS043202 ■ Type B

OPS043039 The brightness of the instrument panel illumination is changed by pressing the illumination control button ("+" or "-") when the ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop button is ON, or the OTF044112L tale lights are turned on. • If you hold the illumination control OPS043040 button ("+" or "-"), the brightness will be changed continuously. The LCD display modes can be changed by using the control buttons • If the brightness reaches to the on the steering wheel. maximum or minimum level, an alarm will sound.

451 Features of your vehicle

[For type A cluster] Gauges Tachometer

(1) TRIP :TRIP button for changing Speedometer ■ Type A trip modes ■ Type A (2) RESET : RESET button for resetting items

[For type B cluster] (1) : MODE button for changing modes or SELECT button for setting the selected item (2) : MOVE button for changing OPS043104N items or RESET button for OPS043102N ■ Type B resetting the selected item ■ Type B

❈ For the LCD modes, refer to “LCD Display” in this chapter.

OPS043106 OPS043103N The tachometer indicates the The speedometer indicates the approximate number of engine revo- speed of the vehicle and is calibrated lutions per minute (rpm). in miles per hour (mph) and/or kilometers per hour (km/h).

4 52 Features of your vehicle

Use the tachometer to select the cor- Engine Coolant Temperature If the gauge pointer moves beyond rect shift points and to prevent lug- Gauge the normal range area toward the “H” ging and/or over-revving the engine. position, it indicates overheating that ■ Type A may damage the engine. Do not continue driving with an over- CAUTION - Red zone heated engine. If your vehicle over- Do not operate the engine with- heats, refer to “If the Engine in the tachometer's RED ZONE. Overheats” in chapter 6. This may cause severe engine damage. WARNING - Hot radiator Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. The OPS043108 ■ Type B engine coolant is under pressure and could severely burn. Wait until the engine is cool before adding coolant to the reservoir.

OPS043109 This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine coolant when the ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop button is ON.

453 Features of your vehicle

Fuel Gauge ✽ NOTICE WARNING - Fuel gauge ■ Type A • The fuel tank capacity is given in chapter 8. Stop and obtain additional fuel • The fuel gauge is supplemented by as soon as possible after the a low fuel warning light, which warning light comes on or when will illuminate when the fuel tank the gauge indicator comes is nearly empty. close to the E level. Running out • On inclines or curves, the fuel of fuel can expose vehicle occu- gauge pointer may fluctuate or the pants to danger. low fuel warning light may come on earlier than usual due to the OPS043110 movement of fuel in the tank. CAUTION - Low fuel ■ Type B Avoid driving with a extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire damaging the catalytic converter.

✽ NOTICE Fuel display may not be accurate if you are filling in sloping places. OPS043111

This gauge indicates the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.

4 54 Features of your vehicle

Odometer Outside Temperature Gauge The outside temperature on the display may not change immediately ■ Type A ■ Type A like a general thermometer to prevent the driver from being inattentive.

To change the temperature unit (from °C to °F or from °F to °C) • Type A Cluster Press the RESET button on the steering wheel 5 times. On the fifth press, hold the RESET button down OPS043112 OPS043114N for 6 seconds until the display ■ Type B ■ Type B changes. • Type B Cluster The temperature unit can be changed by using the "User Settings" mode of the LCD display

❈ For more details, refer to “LCD Display” in this chapter. OPS043118 OPS043119

The odometer Indicates the total dis- This gauge indicates the current out- tance that the vehicle has been driv- side air temperatures by 1°F (1°C). en and should be used to determine when periodic maintenance should - Temperature range : -40°F ~ 140°F be performed. (-40°C ~ 60°C) - Odometer range : 0 ~ 999999 miles or kilometers. 455 Features of your vehicle

Transaxle Shift Indicator •Park :P Manual Transaxle Shift Indicator Automatic Transaxle Shift Indicator • Reverse : R (if equipped) ■ Type A • Neutral : N ■ Type A •Drive :D • Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6

OPS043115 OPS043116 ■ Type B ■ Type B

OTF044125L OTF044402 This indicator displays which auto- This indicator informs which gear is matic transaxle shift lever is selected. desired while driving to save fuel. ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ • Shifting up : 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 • Shifting down : ▼1, ▼2, ▼3, ▼4, ▼5

4 56 Features of your vehicle

For example : Indicates that shifting up to the 3rd gear is desired (currently the shift lever is in the 2nd or 1st gear). : Indicates that shifting down to the 3rd gear is desired (currently the shift lever is in the 4th, 5th, or 6th gear).

When the system is not working properly, the indicator is not displayed.

457 Features of your vehicle

LCD DISPLAY (IF EQUIPPED) LCD Modes (for type B cluster)

Modes Symbol Explanation

This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy, and so on. Trip Computer For more details, refer to “Trip Computer” in this chapter.

Tur n By Tur n This mode displays the state of the navigation. (if equipped)

A/V This mode displays the state of the A/V system. (if equipped)

Service This mode informs of service interval (mileage or days) and warning messages related to TPMS and so on. Master warning

User Settings On this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, and so on.

❈ For controlling the LCD modes, refer to "LCD Display Control" in this chapter.

4 58 Features of your vehicle

Service Mode Service Interval

OTF044196L OTF044192L Service required Service in OFF

OPS043134N If you do not have your vehicle serv- If the service interval is not set, iced according to the already inputted “Service in OFF” message is dis- Service in service interval, “Service required” played on the LCD display. It calculates and displays when you message is displayed for several sec- need a scheduled maintenance onds each time you set the ignition ✽ NOTICE service (mileage or days). switch or Engine Start/Stop Button to If any of the following conditions If the remaining mileage or time the ON position (The mileage and time changes to "---"). occurs, the mileage and days may be reaches 900 mi. (1,500 km) or 30 incorrect. days, "Service in" message is dis- To reset the service interval to the mileage and days you inputted before: - The battery cable is disconnected. played for several seconds each time - The fuse switch is turned off. you set the ignition switch or Engine - Press the RESET button for - The battery is discharged. Start/Stop Button to the ON position. more than 1 second.

459 Features of your vehicle

Master Warning Mode User Settings Mode Door (if equipped) Description Auto Door Lock (if equipped) • Off: The auto door lock operation • This warning light informs the driv- will be deactivated. er the following situations • Speed (for manual transaxle): All - TPMS (if equipped) doors will be automatically locked - Service reminder (if equipped) when the vehicle speed exceeds 9.3mph (15km/h). The Master Warning Light illuminates when more than one of the • Shift Lever: All doors will be auto- above warning situations occur. At matically locked if the automatic this time, the LCD Modes Icon will transaxle shift lever is shifted from change from ( ) to ( ). the P (Park) position to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive) If the warning situation is solved, the OPS043132 position. LCD Modes Icon will be changed back to its previous icon ( ). On this mode, you can change setting of the doors, lamps, and so on. Auto Door Unlock (if equipped) • Off: The auto door unlock operation will be canceled. • Key Out or Power Off: All doors will be automatically unlocked when the ignition key is removed from ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop Button is set to the OFF position. • Shift Lever: All doors will be automatically unlocked if the automatic transaxle shift lever is shifted to the P (Park) position.

4 60 Features of your vehicle

Two Press Unlock (if equipped) Lamp Settings • Off: One Touch Turn Lamp (if equipped) Language The two press unlock function will If this item is checked, the lane Choose the language you prefer be deactivated. Therefore, all doors change signals will blink 3, 5 or 7 within the LCD. will unlock if the door is unlocked. times when the turn signal lever is moved slightly. • On: Temperature Unit The driver’s door will unlock if the Convert the temperature unit from °C door is unlocked. When the door is Head Lamp Delay (if equipped) to °F or from °F to °C. unlocked again within 4 seconds, If this item is checked, the headlamp all doors will unlock. delay function will be activated. Welcome Sound Horn Feedback (if equipped) If this item is checked, the welcome sound function will be activated. • Off: The Horn feedback operation will be deactivated. AVG Fuel Eco Reset • On: • Auto Reset: After locking the door by pressing The average fuel economy will the lock button on the transmitter, if reset automatically when refueling. you press the lock button again • Manual Reset: within 4 seconds, the warning The average fuel economy will not sound will operate once to indicate reset automatically whenever refu- that all doors are locked. eling. For more details, refer to “Trip Computer” in this chapter.

461 Features of your vehicle

Service Interval A/V Mode (if equipped) Turn By Turn Mode (if equipped)

OPS043133 OTF044129 OPS043208N On this mode, you can activate the This mode displays the state of the This mode displays the state of the service interval function with mileage A/V system. navigation. (mi. or km) and period (months).

4 62 Features of your vehicle

Warning Messages Low Key Battery Press brake pedal to start engine Shift to "P" position (for smart key (for smart key system) (for smart key system and auto- system and automatic transaxle) matic transaxle)

OTF044142L OTF044148L OTF044152L • This warning message illuminates • This warning message illuminates if if the battery of the smart key is • This warning message illuminates you try to turn off the engine without discharged when the Engine if the Engine Start/Stop Button the shift lever in P (Park) position. Start/Stop Button changes to the changes to the ACC position twice • At this time, the Engine Start/Stop OFF position. by pressing the button repeatedly Button turns to the ACC position (If without depressing the brake pedal. you press the Engine Start/Stop • It means that you should depress Button once more, it will turn to the the brake pedal to start the engine. ON position).

463 Features of your vehicle

Press clutch pedal to start engine Key not in vehicle Key not detected (for smart key system and manual (for smart key system) (for smart key system) transaxle)

OTF044138L OTF044140L OTF044190L • This warning message illuminates • This warning message illuminates • This warning message illuminates if if the smart key is not in the vehicle if the smart key is not detected the Engine Start/Stop Button while the door is opened or closed when you press the Engine changes to the ACC position twice with the ignition switch in the ACC Start/Stop Button. by pressing the button repeatedly position or engine is running. without depressing the clutch pedal. • It means that you should always • It means that you should depress have the smart key with you. the clutch pedal to start the engine.

4 64 Features of your vehicle

Press start button again Press start button with smart key Check fuse "BRAKE SWITCH" (for smart key system) (for smart key system) (for smart key system and automatic transaxle)

OTF044144L OTF044146L OTF044157L • This warning message illuminates • This warning message illuminates if you can not operate the Engine if you press the Engine Start/Stop • This warning message illuminates Start/Stop Button when there is a Button while the warning message if the brake switch fuse is discon- problem with the Engine Start/Stop “Key not detected” is illuminating. nected. Button system. • At this time, the immobilizer indica- • It means that you should replace • It means that you could start the tor light blinks. the fuse with a new one. If that is engine by pressing the Engine not possible, you can start the Start/ Stop Button once more. engine by pressing the Engine • If the warning illuminates each Start/Stop Button for 10 seconds in time you press the Engine the ACC position. Start/Stop Button, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

465 Features of your vehicle

Shift to "P" or "N" to start engine Door Open Tailgate Open (for smart key system and automatic transaxle)

OPS043121 OPS043122 • It means that any door is open. OTF044150L • It means that the tailgate is open. • This warning message illuminates if you try to start the engine with the shift lever not in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position.

✽ NOTICE You can start the engine with the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position. But, for your safety, we recommend that you start the engine with the shift lever in the P (Park) position.

4 66 Features of your vehicle

Sunroof Open (if equipped) Turn on "FUSE SWITCH" • The "FUSE" and "on" warning (if equipped) messages are displayed alternate- ly. (for Type A) ■ Type A • It means that you should turn the fuse switch on.

For more details, refer to “Fuses” in chapter 7.

OPS043120 • The warning message illuminates OPS044309L if you turn off the engine when the ■ Type B sunroof is open.

OPS043405L • This warning message illuminates if the fuse switch on the fuse box is OFF.

467 Features of your vehicle

TRIP COMPUTER Overview Trip Modes (for Type A cluster) Trip Modes (for Type B cluster)

Description Tripmeter A FUEL ECONOMY The trip computer is a microcomput- er-controlled driver information sys- • Range tem that displays information related Tripmeter B • Average Fuel Economy to driving. • Instant Fuel Economy Range ✽ NOTICE Some driving information stored in the trip computer (for example Average Fuel Economy* TRIP A Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the • Tripmeter [A] battery is disconnected. Average Vehicle Speed* • Average Vehicle Speed [A] • Elapsed Time [A] Elapsed Time*

* if equipped TRIP B To change the trip mode, press the • Tripmeter [B] TRIP button. • Average Vehicle Speed [B] • Elapsed Time [B]

To change the trip mode, press the MOVE button .

4 68 Features of your vehicle

Trip A/B Tripmeter (1) ✽ NOTICE

■ Type A • The tripmeter is the total driving dis- • The average vehicle speed is not distance since the last tripmeter reset. played if the driving distance is less - Distance range: 0.0 ~ 9999.9 mi. than 0.03 miles (50 meters) or the or km driving time is less than 10 seconds • To reset the tripmeter, press the since the ignition switch or Engine RESET/ button on the steering Start/Stop button is turned to ON. wheel for more than 1 second • Even if the vehicle is not in motion, when the tripmeter is displayed. the average vehicle speed keeps going while the engine is running.

OPS043125 Average Vehicle Speed (2) Elapsed Time (3) ■ Type B • The average vehicle speed is cal- • The elapsed time is the total driv- culated by the total driving dis- ing time since the last elapsed time tance and driving time since the reset. last average vehicle speed reset. - Time range (hh:mm): 00:00 ~ 99:59 - Speed range: 160 MPH or 200 • To reset the elapsed time, press km/h the RESET/ button on the steer- • To reset the average vehicle speed, ing wheel for more than 1 second press the RESET/ button on the when the elapsed time is dis- steering wheel for more than 1 sec- played. OPS043127N ond when the average vehicle speed is displayed. ✽ NOTICE Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the elapsed time keeps going while the engine is running.

469 Features of your vehicle

Fuel Economy • The range to empty is the estimat- Average Fuel Economy (2) Range (1) ed distance the vehicle can be • The average fuel economy is calcu- driven with the remaining fuel. ■ Type A lated by the total driving distance - Distance range : 30 ~ 1999 mi or and fuel consumption since the last 50 ~ 1999 km. average fuel economy reset. • If the estimated distance is below - Fuel economy range: 0.0 ~ 99.9 30 mi. (50 km), the trip computer will MPG or L/100km display “---” as distance to empty. • The average fuel economy can be • If the vehicle is not on level ground reset both manually and automati- or the battery power has been cally. interrupted, the distance to empty function may not operate correctly. OPS043123 Manual reset ■ Type B • The distance to empty may differ from the actual driving distance as To clear the average fuel economy it is an estimate of the available manually, press the RESET/ but- driving distance. ton on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the average fuel • The trip computer may not register economy is displayed. additional fuel if less than 6 liters (1.6 gallons) of fuel are added to the vehicle. • The fuel economy and distance to empty may vary significantly based OPS043128N on driving conditions, driving habits, and condition of the vehicle.

4 70 Features of your vehicle

Automatic reset Instant Fuel Economy (3) To make the average fuel economy • This mode displays the instant fuel be reset automatically whenever refu- economy during the last few sec- eling, select the “Auto Reset” mode in onds when the vehicle speed is User Setting menu of the LCD display more than 6.2 MPH (10 km/h). (Refer to “LCD Display”). - Fuel economy range: 0 ~ 99.9 Under “Auto Reset” mode, the aver- MPG or L/100km age fuel economy will be cleared to zero (---) when the vehicle speed exceeds 1 km/h after refueling more than 1.6 gallons (6 liters).

✽ NOTICE The average fuel economy is not displayed for more accurate calculation if the vehicle does not drive more than 10 seconds or 0.03 miles (50 meters) since the ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop button is turned to ON.

471 Features of your vehicle

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS Warning lights Air bag Warning Light Seat Belt Warning Light

✽ NOTICE - Warning lights Make sure that all warning lights This warning light illuminates: This warning light informs the driver are OFF after starting the engine. If • Once you set the ignition switch or that the seat belt is not fastened. any light is still ON, this indicates a Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON For more details, refer to the “Seat situation that needs attention. position. Belts” in chapter 3. - It illuminates for approximately 6 seconds and then goes off. • When there is a malfunction with the SRS. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

4 72 Features of your vehicle

Parking Brake & Brake If the brake fluid level in the reservoir Dual-diagonal braking system Fluid Warning Light is low: Your vehicle is equipped with dual- 1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe diagonal braking systems. This This warning light illuminates: location and stop your vehicle. means you still have braking on two 2. With the engine stopped, check the wheels even if one of the dual sys- • Once you set the ignition switch or tems should fail. Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON brake fluid level immediately and add position. fluid as required (For more details, With only one of the dual systems refer to “Brake Fluid” in chapter 7). working, more than normal pedal - It illuminates for approximately 3 travel and greater pedal pressure are seconds Then check all brake components for fluid leaks. If any leaks in the required to stop the vehicle. - It remains on if the parking brake brake system is still found, the Also, the vehicle will not stop in as is applied. warning light remains on, or the short a distance with only a portion • When the parking brake is applied. brakes do not operate properly, do of the brake system working. • When the brake fluid level in the not drive the vehicle. If the brakes fail while you are driv- reservoir is low. In this case, have your vehicle ing, shift to a lower gear for addition- - If the warning light illuminates towed to an authorized Kia dealer al engine braking and stop the vehi- with the parking brake released, it and inspected. cle as soon as it is safe to do so. indicates the brake fluid level in reservoir is low.

473 Features of your vehicle

Anti-lock Brake System Electronic WARNING - Parking Brake (ABS) Warning Light Brake force & Brake Fluid Warning Light Distribution Driving the vehicle with a warn- This warning light illuminates: (EBD) System ing light ON is dangerous. If the Warning Light Parking Brake & Brake Fluid • Once you set the ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON These two warning lights illuminate at Warning Light illuminates with the same time while driving: the parking brake released, it position. - It illuminates for approximately 3 • When the ABS and regular brake indicates that the brake fluid system may not work normally. level is low. seconds and then goes off. In this case, have your vehicle In this case, have your vehicle • When there is a malfunction with the ABS (The normal braking sys- inspected by an authorized Kia inspected by an authorized Kia dealer. dealer. tem will still be operational without the assistance of the anti-lock brake system). WARNING - Electronic In this case, have your vehicle Brake force Distribution inspected by an authorized Kia (EBD) System Warning Light dealer. When both ABS and Parking Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on, the brake system will not work normally and you may experience an unexpected and dangerous situation during sudden braking. In this case, avoid high speed driving and abrupt braking. Have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

4 74 Features of your vehicle

✽ NOTICE - Electronic Brake Electronic Power Malfunction Indicator force Distribution Steering (EPS) Warning Lamp (MIL) (EBD) System Light (if equipped) Warning Light When the ABS Warning Light is on This warning light illuminates: This warning light illuminates: or both ABS and Parking Brake & • Once you set the ignition switch or • Once you set the ignition switch or Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on, Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON the speedometer, odometer, or trip- position. position. meter may not work. Also, the EPS Warning Light may illuminate and - It remains on until the engine is - It remains on until the engine is the steering effort may increase or started. started. decrease. • When there is a malfunction with • When there is a malfunction with In this case, have your vehicle inspect- the EPS. the emission control system. ed by an authorized Kia dealer as In this case, have your vehicle In this case, have your vehicle soon as possible. inspected by an authorized Kia inspected by an authorized Kia dealer. dealer.

CAUTION - Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Driving with the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may cause damage to the emission control systems which could effect drivability and/or fuel economy.

475 Features of your vehicle

Charging System If there is a malfunction with either CAUTION - Gasoline Warning Light the alternator or electrical charging Engine system: If the Malfunction Indicator This warning light illuminates: 1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe Lamp (MIL) illuminates, poten- location and stop your vehicle. • Once you set the ignition switch or tial catalytic converter damage 2. Turn the engine off and check the is possible which could result in Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON position. alternator drive belt for looseness loss of engine power. or breakage. In this case, have your vehicle - It remains on until the engine is started. If the belt is adjusted properly, inspected by an authorized Kia there may be a problem in the dealer as soon as possible. • When there is a malfunction with electrical charging system. either the alternator or electrical charging system. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

4 76 Features of your vehicle

Engine Oil Pressure Low Fuel Level Warning Warning Light CAUTION - Engine Oil Light Pressure Warning Light This warning light illuminates: • If the engine does not stop • Once you set the ignition switch or immediately after the Engine This warning light illuminates: Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON Oil Pressure Warning Light is When the fuel tank is nearly empty. position. illuminated, severe damage - It remains on until the engine is could result. If the fuel tank is nearly empty: started. • If the warning light stays on Add fuel as soon as possible. • When the engine oil pressure is low. while the engine is running, it indicates that there may be serious engine damage or If the engine oil pressure is low: CAUTION - Low Fuel malfunction. In this case, Level 1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe 1. Stop the vehicle as soon as location and stop your vehicle. Driving with the Low Fuel Level it is safe to do so. warning light on or with the fuel 2. Turn the engine off and check the 2. Turn off the engine and level below “0 or E” can cause engine oil level (For more details, check the oil level. If the oil the engine to misfire and dam- refer to “Engine Oil” in section 7). If level is low, fill the engine age the catalytic converter (if the level is low, add oil as required. oil to the proper level. equipped). If the warning light remains on 3. Start the engine again. If the after adding oil or if oil is not avail- warning light stays on after able, have your vehicle inspected the engine is started, turn by an authorized Kia dealer as the engine off immediately. soon as possible. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

477 Features of your vehicle

Low Tire Pressure This warning light remains on after Warning Light blinking for approximately 60 seconds WARNING or repeats blinking and off at the - Low tire pressure intervals of approximately 3 seconds: This warning light illuminates: • Significantly low tire pressure • When there is a malfunction with makes the vehicle unstable • Once you set the ignition switch or the TPMS. and can contribute to loss of Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON vehicle control and increased position. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia braking distances. - It illuminates for approximately 3 dealer as soon as possible. • Continued driving or low pres- seconds and then goes off. For more details, refer to “Tire sure tires will cause the tires to • When one or more of your tires are Pressure Monitoring System overheat and fail. significantly underinflated. (TPMS)” in chapter 6. For more details, refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System • The TPMS cannot alert you to (TPMS)” in chapter 6. severe and sudden tire damage caused by external factors. • If you notice any vehicle instability, immediately take your foot off the accelerator pedal, apply the brakes gradually with light force, and slowly move to a safe position off the road.

4 78 Features of your vehicle

Door Ajar Warning Light Sunroof Open Warning Indicator Lights Light (if equipped) Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator This warning light illuminates: This warning light illuminates: Light When a door is not closed securely. When the sunroof is not closed securely. This indicator light illuminates: Tailgate Open Warning • Once you set the ignition switch or Light Fuel cap open warning Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON indicator (if equipped) position. - It illuminates for approximately 3 This warning light illuminates: seconds and then goes off. When the tailgate is not closed • When there is a malfunction with securely. This warning light illuminates: the ESC system. • When the fuel filler cap is not tight- In this case, have your vehicle en securely. inspected by an authorized Kia Always make sure that the fuel dealer. filler cap is tight. This indicator light blinks: While the ESC is operating.

For more details, refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.

479 Features of your vehicle

Electronic Stability ECOMINDER® indicator Immobilizer Indicator Control (ESC) OFF Active ECO system ECO Light (Without Smart Key) Indicator Light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates: This indicator light illuminates: This indicator light illuminates: • Once you set the ignition switch or When the Active ECO button is ® • When the vehicle detects the Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON pressed the ECOMINDER indicator immobilizer in your key properly position. (green) will illuminate to show that while the ignition switch is ON. the Active ECO is operating. - It illuminates for approximately 3 - At this time, you can start the seconds and then goes off. For more detailed information, refer engine. to "Active ECO" in chapter 5. • When you deactivate the ESC sys- - The indicator light goes off after tem by pressing the ESC OFF but- starting the engine. ton. This indicator light blinks: For more details, refer to “Electronic • When there is a malfunction with Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5. the immobilizer system. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

4 80 Features of your vehicle

Immobilizer Indicator This indicator light illuminates for 2 Turn Signal Indicator Light (With Smart Key) seconds and goes off: Light (if equipped) • When the vehicle can not detect the smart key which is in the vehi- This indicator light illuminates for up cle while the Engine Start/Stop This indicator light blinks: to 30 seconds: Button is ON. • When you turn the turn signal light • When the vehicle detects the In this case, have your vehicle on. smart key in the vehicle properly inspected by an authorized Kia dealer. while the Engine Start/Stop Button If any of the following occurs, there is ACC or ON. may be a malfunction with the turn - At this time, you can start the This indicator light blinks: signal system. In this case, have your engine. • When the battery of the smart key vehicle inspected by an authorized - The indicator light goes off after is weak. Kia dealer. starting the engine. - At this time, you can not start the - The indicator light does not blink engine. However, you can start but illuminates. This indicator light blinks for a few the engine if you press the Engine - The indicator light blinks more seconds: Start/Stop Button with the smart rapidly. key. (For more details, refer to - The indicator light does not illumi- • When the smart key is not in the “Starting the Engine” in section 5). vehicle. nate at all. • When there is a malfunction with - At this time, you can not start the the immobilizer system. engine. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.

481 Features of your vehicle

High Beam Indicator Light ON Indicator Light Cruise Indicator Light Light (if equipped) CRUISE

This indicator light illuminates: This indicator light illuminates: This indicator light illuminates: • When the headlights are on and in • When the tail lights or headlights • When the cruise control system is the high beam position are on. enabled. • When the turn signal lever is pulled into the Flash-to-Pass position. Front Fog Indicator For more details, refer to “Cruise Light (if equipped) Control System” in chapter 5.

This indicator light illuminates: • When the front fog lights are on.

4 82 Features of your vehicle

Cruise SET Indicator FLEX STEER indicator Light (if equipped) SET (if equipped)

SPORT NORMAL COMPORT This indicator light illuminates: • When the cruise control speed is set. This indicator light illuminates: For more details, refer to “Cruise • When you press the FLEX STEER Control System” in chapter 5. mode button. For more details, refer to "FLEX STEER" in chapter 4.

483 Features of your vehicle

REAR CAMERA DISPLAY (IF EQUIPPED) This system is a supplemental system that helps the driver by display- WARNING - Backing up ing objects behind the vehicle when using camera backing up. Never rely solely on the rear Always keep the camera lens clean. If camera display when backing. lens is covered with foreign matter, You must always use methods the camera may not operate normally. of viewing the area behind you The rear camera display is not a including looking over both safety device. It only serves to assist shoulders as well as continuously checking all three rear OPS043050 the driver in identifying objects directly behind the middle of the view mirrors. Due to the difficul- vehicle. The camera does NOT cover ty of ensuring that the area the complete area behind the vehi- behind you remains clear, cle. While the camera's display is always back slowly and stop generally accurate, objects can be immediately if you even suspect much closer than they appear in the that a person, and especially a display screen and can be distorted child, might be behind you. in both size and proportion.

OPS043051 The rear camera display will activate when the back-up light is ON with the ignition switch ON and the shift lever in the R (Reverse) position.

4 84 Features of your vehicle

LIGHTING Headlamp escort (if equipped) Battery saver function Daytime running light If you turn the ignition switch to the • The purpose of this feature is to (if equipped) ACC or OFF position with the head- prevent the battery from being dis- Daytime Running Lights (DRL) may lights ON, the headlights remain on charged. The system automatically help make it easier for others to see for about 5 minutes. However, if the turns off the parking lights when the front of your vehicle during the driver’s door is opened and closed, the driver removes the ignition key and opens the driver-side door (in day. DRL can be helpful in many dif- the headlights are turned off after 15 that order). ferent driving conditions, and it is seconds. especially helpful after dawn and • With this feature, the parking lights The headlights can be turned off by will turn off automatically if the driv- before sunset. pressing the lock button on the trans- er parks on the side of the road at The DRL system turns OFF when: mitter (or smart key) twice or turning night. 1. The front fog light or headlight (low the light switch to the OFF or Auto If necessary, to keep the lights on beam) switch is ON. position. However, if you turn the light when the ignition key is removed, 2. The engine is OFF. switch to the Auto position when it is perform the following: dark outside, the headlights will not 1) Open the driver-side door. 3. The parking brake is applied. be turned off immediately. 2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON again using the light switch on the steering column.

485 Features of your vehicle

Lighting control Parking light position ( ) Headlight position ( )

OXM049110 OAM049041 OAM049042 The light switch has a Headlight and When the light switch is in the park- When the light switch is in the head- a Parking light position. ing light position (1st position), the light position (2nd position), the To operate the lights, turn the knob at tail, license and instrument panel head, tail, license and instrument the end of the control lever to one of lights will turn ON. panel lights will turn ON. the following positions: The ignition switch must be in the ON (1) OFF position position to turn on the headlights. (2) Parking light position (3) Headlight position (4) Auto light position (if equipped)

4 86 Features of your vehicle

Auto light position (if equipped) • Never place anything over sensor High beam operation (1) located on the instrument panel. This will ensure better auto- light system control. • Don’t clean the sensor using a window cleaner. The cleaner may leave a light film which could interfere with sensor operation. • If your vehicle has window tint or other types of metallic coating on the front windshield, the Auto light system may not work properly.

OMD040095 OAM049044 When the light switch is in the AUTO To turn on the high beam headlights, light position, the taillights and head- push the lever away from you. Pull it lights will be turned ON or OFF auto- back for low beams. matically depending on the amount The high beam indicator will light of light outside the vehicle. when the headlight high beams are switched on. To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the lights on for a prolonged time while the engine is not running.

487 Features of your vehicle

Turn signals and lane change To signal a lane change, move the signals turn signal lever slightly and hold it in position (B). The lever will return to the OFF position when released. If an indicator stays on and does not flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the turn signal bulbs may be burned out and will require replacement. If an indicator flash is abnormally quick or slow, a bulb may be burned out or have a poor electrical connec- OAM049043 tion in the circuit. To flash the headlights, pull the lever towards you. It will return to the nor- OAM049045 mal (low beam) position when released. The headlight switch does The ignition switch must be on for the not need to be on to use this flashing turn signals to function. To turn on feature. the turn signals, move the lever up or down (A). The green arrow indicators on the instrument panel indicate WARNING - High beams which turn signal is operating. They Do not use high beam when will self-cancel after a turn is com- there are other vehicles. Using pleted. If the indicator continues to high beam could obstruct the flash after a turn, manually return the other driver's vision. lever to the OFF position.

4 88 Features of your vehicle

One-touch lane change function Front fog light (if equipped) To activate an one-touch lane change function, move the turn signal lever slightly and then release it. The lane change signals will blink 3, 5 or 7 times. You can choose one-touch lane change blinking function in "One touch turn lamp" of "User setting". Refer to "User setting" in chapter 4.

✽ NOTICE If an indicator flash is abnormally OAM049046N quick or slow, the bulb may be Fog lights are used to provide burned out or have a poor electrical improved visibility when visibility is connection in the circuit. poor due to fog, rain or snow, etc. The fog lights will turn on when the fog light switch (1) is turned to the on position after the headlight is turned on. To turn off the fog lights, turn the fog light switch (1) to the OFF position. When in operation, the fog lights consume large amounts of vehicle electrical power. Only use the fog lights when visibility is poor.

489 Features of your vehicle

WIPERS AND WASHERS Windshield wiper/washer Rear window wiper/washer Windshield wipers (if equipped)

OAM049101N Operates as follows when the igni- OAM049100N/OAM049048N tion switch is turned ON. A : Wiper speed control D : Rear wiper/washer control MIST : For a single wiping cycle, push · MIST – Single wipe · ON – Continuous wipe the lever upward and release · OFF – Off · INT – Intermittent wipe it with the lever in the OFF (if equipped) position. The wipers will oper- · INT – Intermittent wipe ate continuously if the lever is · LO – Low wiper speed · OFF – Off pushed upward and held. · HI – High wiper speed OFF : Wiper is not in operation E : Wash with brief wipes (rear) INT : Wiper operates intermittently at B :Intermittent wipe time adjust- the same wiping intervals. Use ment this mode in light rain or mist. To vary the speed setting, turn the speed control knob (1). C : Wash with brief wipes (front)

4 90 Features of your vehicle

LO : Normal wiper speed Windshield washers The reservoir filler neck is located in HI : Fast wiper speed the front of the engine compartment on the passenger side. If there is heavy accumulation of snow or ice on the windshield, defrost the windshield for about 10 minutes, CAUTION - Washer pump or until the snow and/or ice is To prevent possible damage to removed before using the windshield the washer pump, do not oper- wipers to ensure proper operation. ate the washer when the fluid reservoir is empty.

WARNING - Obscured vis- OAM049102N ibility In the OFF position, pull the lever Do not use the washer in freez- gently toward you to spray washer ing temperatures without first fluid on the windshield and to run the warming the windshield with wipers 1-3 cycles. the defrosters; the washer solu- Use this function when the wind- tion could freeze on the windshield is dirty. shield and obscure your vision. The spray and wiper operation will continue until you release the lever. If the washer does not work, check the washer fluid level. If the fluid level is not sufficient, you will need to add appropriate non-abrasive windshield washer fluid to the washer reservoir.

491 Features of your vehicle

Rear window wiper and washer CAUTION - Wipers& wind- switch (if equipped) shields • To prevent possible damage to the wipers or windshield, do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry. • To prevent damage to the wiper blades, do not use gasoline, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents on or near them. OXM049125 • To prevent damage to the Push the lever away from you to spray rear washer fluid and to run the wiper arms and other compo- OAM049103N nents, do not attempt to move rear wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray the wipers manually. The rear window wiper switch is and wiper operation will continue located at the end of the wiper and until you release the lever. washer switch lever. Turn the switch to the desired position to operate the rear wiper and washer. ON - Normal wiper operation INT - Intermittent wiper operation (if equipped) OFF - Wiper is not in operation

4 92 Features of your vehicle

INTERIOR LIGHT Do not use the interior lights for Interior lamp AUTO cut Map lamp extended periods when the engine is • When all entrances are closed, if ■ Type A not running. you lock the vehicle by using the It may cause battery discharge. transmitter or the smart key, all interior lamp will be off after a few WARNING - Interior light seconds. Do not use the interior lights • If you do not operate anything in when driving in the dark. The the vehicle after turning off the glare from the interior lights engine, the lights will turn off after may obstruct your view and 20 minutes. cause an accident. OPS043052 ■ Type B

OPS043053 Press the lens (1) or button (1) to turn the map lamp on or off

493 Features of your vehicle

• ROOM (2) : - The map lamp and room lamp will Room lamp go out immediately if the ignition - The map lamp and room lamp ■ Type A stays on at all times. switch is changed to the ON position or all doors are locked. - To turn off the ROOM mode, press the ROOM button (2) once - To turn off the DOOR mode, again (not pressed.) press the DOOR button (3) once again (not pressed).

• DOOR (3) : ✽ - The map lamp and room lamp NOTICE comes on when a door is opened. • When the lamp is turned on by pressing the lens (1), the lamp does The lamps go out after approxi- OPS043054 mately 30 seconds. not turn off even if the DOOR ■ Type B - The map lamp and room lamp mode or ROOM mode is not comes on for approximately 30 selected (not pressed). seconds when doors are unlocked • If the ROOM button and DOOR with a transmitter or smart key as button are pressed at the same long as the doors are not opened. time, the map lamp and room lamp will stay on at all times - The map lamp and room lamp will (ROOM mode will be selected). stay on for approximately 20 minutes if a door is opened with the ignition switch in the ACC or LOCK/OFF position. OPS043072 - The map lamp and room lamp will Press the button to turn the light on stay on continuously if the door is or off. opened with the ignition switch in If the front map lamp turns on by the the ON position. front map lamp switch, the room lamp will turn on.

4 94 Features of your vehicle

Luggage room lamp Portable lamp usage ❈ If the portable lamp does not turn ■ (if equipped) on, it means the portable lamp Type A needs to be charged. Insert the lamp holder and then charge it again. The charge mode will be activated if the ignition switch (or engine start/stop button) is on position or engine is running.

OPS043055 ■ Type B

OPS043197 1. In-vehicle lamp, if necessary, after separation can be used as a portable. 2. Press push button (1). 3. Pull out the lamp holder. 4. Press the power switch (2). OPS043056 The luggage room lamp comes on when the tailgate is opened. The lamp comes on as long as the tailgate is open. To prevent unnecessary charging system drain, close the tailgate securely after using the luggage room. 495 Features of your vehicle

If the portable lamp does not turn on Battery replacement CAUTION - Portable lamp anymore after charged, replace the damage rechargeable batteries. 1. Remove the batteries when not in use for a long time. 2. Use the specified battery. 3. You can use the regular batteries (Disposable batteries) but do not use the Non- rechargeable battery in charge mode. It may damage the vehicle. 4. Do not place the lamp with OTAM041101 water or moist places and liq- When replacement is necessary, use uid compounds. These can the following procedure. cause internal leakage of a battery. 1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and gently try open the battery cover. 5. When replacing the batteries, check the direction and insert. 2. Replace the batteries with new rechargeable batteries (AAA size). It will not be charged if installed When replacing the batteries, reversely. make sure the position of batteries. 6. Do not mix the rechargeable 3. Close the cover carefully. batteries. It may not be charged normally.

4 96 Features of your vehicle

Glove box lamp (if equipped) Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)

OPS043057 The glove box lamp comes on when OAM042336 the glove box is opened. Pull the sunvisor downward and you To prevent unnecessary charging can turn the vanity mirror lamp ON or system drain, close the glove box OFF by pushing the button. securely after using the glove box. • : To turn the lamp ON. • O : To turn the lamp OFF. To prevent unnecessary charging system drain, turn off the lamp by pushing the O button after using the lamp.

497 Features of your vehicle

DEFROSTER Rear window defroster The defroster heats the window to CAUTION - Conductors remove frost, fog and thin ice from ■ To prevent damage to the con- Type A the rear window, while the engine is ductors bonded to the inside running. surface of the rear window, To activate the rear window never use sharp instruments or defroster, press the rear window window cleaners containing defroster button located in the center abrasives to clean the window. facia switch panel. The indicator on the rear window If you want to defrost and defog the defroster button illuminates when the OPS043150 defroster is ON. front windshield, refer to “Windshield ■ Type B defrosting and defogging” in this sec- If there is heavy accumulation of tion. snow on the rear window, brush it off before operating the rear defroster. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes or when the ignition switch is turned off. To turn off the defroster, press the rear window defroster but- OPS043153 ton again. ■ Type C

OPS043152

4 98 Features of your vehicle

Outside rearview mirror defroster (if equipped) If your vehicle is equipped with the outside rearview mirror defrosters, they will operate at the same time you turn on the rear window defroster.

Front wiper deicer (if equipped) The front wiper deicer will operate at the same time you turn on the front windshield defroster. • To turn off the wiper deicer, press the front windshield defroster button again. • The front wiper deicer automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes or when the ignition switch is turned off.

499 Features of your vehicle

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

1. Fan speed control knob 3. Mode selection knob 5. Temperature control knob 2. Air intake control button 4. Rear window defroster button 6. Air conditioning button (if equipped)

OPS043154

4 100 Features of your vehicle

Heating and air conditioning 1. Start the engine. 2. Set the mode to the desired position. For improving the effectiveness of heating and cooling; - Heating: - Cooling: 3. Set the temperature control to the desired position. 4. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position. 5. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed. 6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the air conditioning system (if equipped) on.

OPS043058

4101 Features of your vehicle

Mode selection Vent mode (B, D) Floor/Defrost mode (A, C, E, D) Air flow is directed toward the upper Most of the air flow is directed to the body and face. Additionally, each floor and the windshield with a small outlet can be controlled to direct the amount directed to the side window air discharged from the outlet. defrosters.

Vent-Floor mode (B, D, C, E) Defrost mode (A, D)

OPS043155 Air flow is directed towards the face Most of the air flow is directed to the The mode selection knob controls and the floor. windshield with a small amount of air the direction of the air flow through directed to the side window the ventilation system. defrosters. Air can be directed to the floor, dash- Floor mode (C, E, A, D) board outlets, or windshield. Five symbols are used to represent. Most of the air flow is directed to the floor, with a small amount of the air being directed to the windshield and side window defrosters.

4 102 Features of your vehicle

Temperature control

OPS043059 OPS043159

Instrument panel vents OPS043156 To operate the MAX A/C, turn the temperature knob to extreme left. Air The outlet vents can be opened or The temperature control knob allows closed separately using the thumb- flow is directed toward the upper you to control the temperature of the body and face. wheel. air flow from the ventilation system. Also, you can adjust the direction of To change the air temperature in the In this mode, the air conditioning and air delivery from these vents using passenger compartment, turn the the recirculated air position will be the vent control lever as shown. knob to the right position for warm air selected automatically. or left position for cooler air.

4103 Features of your vehicle

Air intake control Recirculated air position In addition, prolonged use of the air With the recirculated air conditioning with the recirculated air position selected, air position selected will result in exces- from the passenger com- sively dry air in the passenger compartment will be drawn partment. through the heating system and heated or WARNING - Recirculated cooled according to the air function selected. Continuous use of the climate control system in the recirculat- Outside (fresh) air position ed air position can cause With the outside (fresh) drowsiness or sleepiness, and OPS043160 air position selected, air loss of vehicle control. Set the The air intake control is used to enters the vehicle from air intake control to the outside select the outside (fresh) air position outside and is heated or (fresh) air position as much as or recirculated air position. cooled according to the possible while driving. To change the air intake control posi- function selected. tion, press the control button. Prolonged operation of the heater in WARNING - Reduced visi- the recirculated air position (without bilty air conditioning selected) may cause Continued use of the climate fogging of the windshield and side control system in the recirculat- windows and the air within the pas- ed air position may allow senger compartment may become humidity to increase inside the stale. vehicle which may fog the glass and obscure visibility.

4 104 Features of your vehicle

Fan speed control To turn off the blowers Air conditioning (if equipped)

OPS043157 OPS043158 OPS043161 The ignition switch must be in the ON To turn off the blowers, turn the fan Press the A/C button to turn the air position for fan operation. speed control knob to the "0" posi- conditioning system on (indicator The fan speed knob allows you to tion. light will illuminate). Press the button control the fan speed of the air flow again to turn the air conditioning sys- from the ventilation system. To tem off. change the fan speed, turn the knob to the right for higher speed, or left for lower speed. To turn the fan speed control off, turn the knob to the “0” position.

4105 Features of your vehicle

System operation Operation Tips Air conditioning (if equipped) Ventilation • To keep dust or unpleasant fumes All Kia Air Conditioning Systems are from entering the vehicle through filled with R-134a refrigerant. 1. Set the mode to the position. the ventilation system, temporarily 1. Start the engine. Press the air con- 2. Set the air intake control to the set the air intake control to the ditioning button. outside (fresh) air position. recirculated air position. Be sure to 2. Set the mode to the position. 3. Set the temperature control to the return the control to the fresh air desired position. position when the irritation has 3. Set the air intake control to the outside air or recirculated air posi- 4. Set the fan speed control to the passed to keep fresh air in the tion. desired speed. vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable. 4. Adjust the fan speed control and • Air for the heating/cooling system temperature control to maintain Heating is drawn in through the grilles just maximum comfort. 1. Set the mode to the position. ahead of the windshield. Care • When maximum cooling is desired, 2. Set the air intake control to the should be taken that these are not set the temperature control to the outside (fresh) air position. blocked by leaves, snow, ice or extreme left position, set the mode other obstructions. 3. Set the temperature control to the control to the MAX A/C position, desired position. • To prevent interior fog on the wind- then set the fan speed control to shield, set the air intake control to the highest speed. 4. Set the fan speed control to the the fresh air position and fan speed desired speed. to the desired position, turn on the 5. If dehumidified heating is desired, air conditioning system, and adjust turn the air conditioning system (if the temperature control to desired equipped) on. temperature. • If the windshield fogs up, set the mode to the or position.

4 106 Features of your vehicle

Air conditioning system operation tips • When using the air conditioning CAUTION - Excessive A/C • If the vehicle has been parked in system, you may notice clear water When using the air conditioning direct sunlight during hot weather, dripping (or even puddling) on the system, monitor the engine open the windows for a short time ground under the passenger side coolant closely while driving up to let the hot air inside the vehicle of the vehicle. This is a normal sys- hills or in heavy traffic when out- escape. tem operation characteristic. side temperatures are high. Air • To help reduce moisture inside of • Operating the air conditioning sys- conditioning system operation the windows on rainy or humid tem in the recirculated air position may cause engine overheating days, decrease the humidity inside provides maximum cooling, how- and potential engine damage. the vehicle by operating the air ever, continual operation in this Continue to use the blower fan conditioning system. mode may cause the air inside the but turn the air conditioning sys- vehicle to become stale. tem off if the engine coolant • During air conditioning system operation, you may occasionally • During cooling operation, you may temperature gauge indicates occasionally notice a misty air flow engine overheating. notice a slight change in engine speed as the air conditioning com- because of rapid cooling and pressor cycles. This is a normal humid air intake. This is a normal system operation characteristic. system operation characteristic. • Use the air conditioning system every month only for a few minutes to ensure maximum system performance.

4107 Features of your vehicle

Climate control air filter ✽ NOTICE Checking the amount of air (if equipped) • Replace the filter every 15,000 conditioner refrigerant and miles or once a year. compressor lubricant Outside air If the vehicle is being driven in When the amount of refrigerant is severe conditions such as dusty or low, the performance of the air con- Recirculated rough roads, more frequent air ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also air conditioner filter inspections and has a negative impact on the air con- changes are required. ditioning system. • When the air flow rate suddenly Therefore, if abnormal operation is decreases, the system should be found, have the system inspected by checked at an authorized Kia an authorized Kia dealer. Blower dealer. Heater core Climate control Evaporator air filter core 1LDA5047 The climate control air filter installed behind the glove box filters the dust or other pollutants that come into the vehicle from the outside through the heating and air conditioning system. If dust or other pollutants accumulate in the filter over a period of time, the air flow from the air vents may decrease, resulting in moisture accumulation on the inside of the windshield even when the outside (fresh) air position is selected. If this happens, have the climate control air filter replaced by an authorized Kia dealer.

4 108 Features of your vehicle

Air Conditioning refrigerant Each symbols and specification on WARNING label air conditioning refrigerant label means as below ; The oil and refrigerant in your ■ Example vehicle's air conditioning system is under very high pres- 1. Classification of refrigerant sure. If proper service procedures are not followed an explo- 2. Amount of refrigerant sion may result. To reduce the 3. Classification of Compressor lubri- risk of serious injury or death, cant the air conditioning system in your vehicle should only be Refer to chapter 8 for more detail serviced by trained and certi- location of air conditioning refrigerant fied technicians. OXM063009 label. ❈ The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant CAUTION label in the vehicle may differ from the It is important that the correct illustration. type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used, otherwise damage to the vehicle and injury may occur. To prevent damage, the air conditioning system in your vehicle should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians.

4109 Features of your vehicle

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) ■ Type A

1. Temperature control button / knob 2. Front windshield defroster button 3. Rear windshield defroster button 4. Climate control display 5. Air intake control button 6. Air conditioning button (if equipped) ■ Type B 7. Fan speed control button 8. AUTO (automatic control) button 9. OFF button 10. Mode selection button 11. Climate control information screen selection button

OPS043162/OPS043163

4 110 Features of your vehicle

Automatic heating and air con- ■ Type A ✽ NOTICE ditioning • To turn the automatic operation ■ Type A off, select any button or switch of the following: - Mode selection button - Air conditioning button - Front windshield defroster button - Air intake control button - Fan speed control switch The selected function will be con- OPS043170 ■ Type B trolled manually while other functions operate automatically. OPS043164 • Regardless of the temperature set- ■ Type B ting, when using automatic operation, the air conditioning system can automatically turn on to decrease the humidity inside the vehicle, even if the temperature is set to warm.

OPS043171 2. Push the temperature control button to set the desired temperature. OPS043165 (Type A) 1. Push the AUTO button. It is indi- Turn the temperature control knob cated by AUTO on the display.The to set the desired temperature. modes, fan speeds, air intake and (Type B) air-conditioning will be controlled automatically by temperature setting.

4111 Features of your vehicle

Manual heating and air condi- Mode selection

tioning ■ Type A The heating and cooling system can be controlled manually by pushing buttons other than the AUTO button. In this case, the system works sequentially according to the order of buttons selected. When pressing any button (or turning any knob) except AUTO button while automatic operation, the functions OPS043071 not selected will be controlled auto- OPS043166 Never place anything over the sensor matically. ■ Type B located on the instrument panel to 1. Start the engine. ensure better control of the heating and cooling system. 2. Set the mode to the desired position. 3. Set the temperature control to the desired position. 4. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.

5. Set the fan speed control to the OPS043167 desired speed. The mode selection button controls 6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the direction of the air flow through the air conditioning system on. the ventilation system. Press the AUTO button in order to Refer to the illustration in the convert to full automatic control of “Manual climate control system”. the system.

4 112 Features of your vehicle

The air flow outlet port is converted as follows: Vent mode (B, D) Floor mode (C, E, A, D)

Air flow is directed toward the upper Most of the air flow is directed to the body and face. Additionally, each out- floor, with a small amount of the air let can be controlled to direct the air being directed to the windshield and discharged from the outlet. side window defroster.

Vent-Floor mode (B, D, C, E) Floor/Defrost mode (A, C, E, D) Air flow is discharged towards the Most of the air flow is directed to the face and floor. floor and the windshield with a small amount directed to the side window defrosters.

4113 Features of your vehicle

■ Type A Temperature control

■ Type A

OPS043168 ■ Type B OPS043059 OPS043170 Instrument panel vents ■ Type B The outlet port can be opened or closed separately using the thumb- wheel. Also, you can adjust the direction of air delivered from these vents using the vent control lever as shown.

OPS043169

Defrost mode (A, D) OPS043171 Most of the air flow is directed to the windshield with a small amount of air • Type A directed to the side window defrosters. The temperature will increase to the maximum (HI) by pushing the button ().

4 114 Features of your vehicle

The temperature will decrease to the Temperature scale conversion Air intake control minimum (Lo) by pushing the button If the battery has been discharged or ■ Type A (). disconnected, the temperature mode When pushing the button, the tem- display will reset to Centigrade. perature will increase or decrease by This is normal condition. You can 0.5°C/1°F. When set to the lowest switch the temperature scale as fol- temperature setting, the air condi- lows; tioning will operate continuously. While pressing the AUTO button, press the OFF button for 3 seconds • Type B or more. The temperature scale will The temperature will increase to the change from Centigrade to Fahrenheit, or from Fahrenheit to OPS043172 maximum (HI) by turning the knob to ■ Type B the right extremely. Centigrade. The temperature will decrease to the The temperature unit (from °C to °F minimum (Lo) by turning the knob to or from °F to °C) can be changed by the left extremely. using the “User Settings” mode of the LCD display. When turning the knob, the temperature will increase or decrease by 0.5°C/1°F. When set to the lowest temperature setting, the air conditioning will operate continuously. OPS043173 This is used to select outside (fresh) air position or recirculated air position. To change the air intake control position, push the control button.

4115 Features of your vehicle

Recirculated air position It should be noted that prolonged The indicator light on the WARNING - Recirculated operation of the heating in recirculat- button illuminates when air ed air position will cause fogging of the recirculated air posi- Continuous use of the climate the windshield and side windows and tion is selected. control system in the recirculat- the air within the passenger compartment will become stale. With the recirculated air ed air position can cause position selected, air from drowsiness or sleepiness, and passenger compartment loss of vehicle control. Set the In addition, prolonged use of the air will be drawn through the air intake control to the outside conditioning with the recirculated air heating system and heat- (fresh) air position as much as position selected, will result in exces- ed or cooled according to possible while driving. sively dry air in the passenger com- the function selected. partment.

WARNING - Reduced visi- Outside (fresh) air position bility The indicator light on the button does not illuminate Continued climate control sys- when the outside (fresh) tem operation in the recirculat- air position is selected. ed air position may allow humidity to increase inside With the outside (fresh) vehicle which may fog the glass air position selected, air and obscure visibility. enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.

4 116 Features of your vehicle

Fan speed control To change the fan speed, press the Air conditioning ■ button ( ) for higher speed, or push ■ Type A the button ( ) for lower speed. To Type A turn the fan speed control off, press the OFF button and select outside (fresh) air position.

OPS043176 OPS043174 ■ Type B ■ Type B

OPS043177 OPS043175 The fan speed can be set to the Push the A/C button to turn the air desired speed by pressing the fan conditioning system on (indicator speed control button. light will illuminate). Push the button again to turn the air conditioning system off.

4117 Features of your vehicle

Blower OFF Climate information screen System operation selection (if equipped) ■ Type A Ventilation ■ Type B 1. Set the mode to the position. 2. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position. 3. Set the temperature control to the desired position. 4. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.

OPS043178 ■ Type B Heating 1. Set the mode to the position. OPS043180 2. Set the air intake control to the Press the climate information screen outside (fresh) air position. selection button to view climate information in full screen mode. 3. Set the temperature control to the desired position. 4. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed. 5. If dehumidified heating is desired, OPS043179 turn the air conditioning system (if Push the OFF button to turn off the equipped) on. blower. However you can still operate • If the windshield fogs up, set the the mode and air intake buttons as mode to the or position. long as the ignition switch is in the position ON.

4 118 Features of your vehicle

Operation Tips Air conditioning (if equipped) • To keep dust or unpleasant fumes All Kia Air Conditioning Systems are CAUTION - Excessive A/C from entering the vehicle through filled with R-134a refrigerant. When using the air conditioning the ventilation system, temporarily 1. Start the engine. Press the air con- system, monitor the engine set the air intake control to the ditioning button. coolant closely while driving up recirculated air position. Be sure to hills or in heavy traffic when out- return the control to the fresh air 2. Set the mode to the position. side temperatures are high. Air position when the irritation has 3. Set the air intake control to the conditioning system operation passed to keep fresh air in the outside air or recirculated air posi- may cause engine overheating vehicle. This will help keep the driv- tion. and potential engine damage. er alert and comfortable. 4. Adjust the fan speed control and Continue to use the blower fan • Air for the heating/cooling system temperature control to maintain but turn the air conditioning sys- is drawn in through the grilles just maximum comfort. tem off if the engine coolant ahead of the windshield. Care temperature gauge indicates • When maximum cooling is desired, engine overheating. should be taken that these are not set the temperature control to the blocked by leaves, snow, ice or extreme left position, set the mode other obstructions. control to the MAX A/C position, • To prevent interior fog on the wind- then set the fan speed control to shield, set the air intake control to the highest speed. the fresh air position and fan speed to the desired position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust the temperature control to desired temperature.

4119 Features of your vehicle

Air conditioning system operation tips • When using the air conditioning Climate control air filter • If the vehicle has been parked in system, you may notice clear water (if equipped) direct sunlight during hot weather, dripping (or even puddling) on the open the windows for a short time ground under the passenger side to let the hot air inside the vehicle of the vehicle. This is a normal sys- Outside air escape. tem operation characteristic. Recirculated • To help reduce moisture inside of • Operating the air conditioning sys- air the windows on rainy or humid tem in the recirculated air position days, decrease the humidity inside provides maximum cooling, how- the vehicle by operating the air ever, continual operation in this conditioning system. mode may cause the air inside the vehicle to become stale. • During air conditioning system Blower Heater core operation, you may occasionally • During cooling operation, you may Climate control Evaporator occasionally notice a misty air flow air filter core notice a slight change in engine 1LDA5047 speed as the air conditioning com- because of rapid cooling and pressor cycles. This is a normal humid air intake. This is a normal The climate control air filter installed system operation characteristic. system operation characteristic. behind the glove box filters the dust or other pollutants that come into the • Use the air conditioning system vehicle from the outside through the every month only for a few minutes heating and air conditioning system. If to ensure maximum system per- dust or other pollutants accumulate in formance. the filter over a period of time, the air flow from the air vents may decrease, resulting in moisture accumulation on the inside of the windshield even when the outside (fresh) air position is selected. If this happens, have the climate control air filter replaced by an authorized Kia dealer.

4 120 Features of your vehicle

✽ NOTICE Checking the amount of air • Replace the filter every 15,000 conditioner refrigerant and WARNING miles or once a year. compressor lubricant The oil and refrigerant in your If the vehicle is being driven in When the amount of refrigerant is vehicle's air conditioning sys- severe conditions such as dusty or low, the performance of the air con- tem is under very high pres- rough roads, more frequent air ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also sure. If proper service proce- conditioner filter inspections and has a negative impact on the air con- dures are not followed an explo- changes are required. ditioning system. sion may result. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death, • When the air flow rate suddenly Therefore, if abnormal operation is decreases, the system should be the air conditioning system in found, have the system inspected by your vehicle should only be checked at an authorized Kia an authorized Kia dealer. dealer. serviced by trained and certified technicians.

CAUTION It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used, otherwise damage to the vehicle and injury may occur. To prevent damage, the air conditioning system in your vehicle should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians.

4121 Features of your vehicle

Air Conditioning refrigerant Each symbols and specification on label air conditioning refrigerant label means as below ; ■ Example

1. Classification of refrigerant 2. Amount of refrigerant 3. Classification of Compressor lubricant

Refer to chapter 8 for more detail location of air conditioning refrigerant OXM063009 label. ❈ The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

4 122 Features of your vehicle

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING • For maximum defrosting, set the Manual climate control system WARNING - Windshield temperature control to the extreme To defog inside windshield heating right/hot position and the fan speed Do not use the or posi- control to the highest speed. tion during cooling operation in • If warm air to the floor is desired extremely humid weather. The while defrosting or defogging, set the difference between the temper- mode to the floor-defrost position. ature of the outside air and that • Before driving, clear all snow and of the windshield could cause ice from the windshield, rear win- the outer surface of the wind- dow, outside rear view mirrors, and shield to fog up, causing loss of all side windows. visibility. In this case, set the mode selection knob or button • Clear all snow and ice from the to the position and fan hood and air inlet in the cowl grille speed control knob or button to to improve heater and defroster OPS043181 the lower speed. efficiency and to reduce the proba- bility of fogging up inside of the 1. Select any fan speed except “0” windshield. position. 2. Select desired temperature. 3. Select the or mode. 4. The outside (fresh) air and air conditioning will be selected automatically. If the air conditioning and outside (fresh) air position are not selected automatically, press the corresponding button manually.

4123 Features of your vehicle

To defrost outside windshield Automatic climate control 3. Press the defrost button ( ). system 4. The air-conditioning will be turned To defog inside windshield on according to the detected ambi- ■ Type A ent temperature, outside (fresh) air position and higher fan speed will be selected automatically. If the air-conditioning, outside (fresh) air position and higher fan speed are not selected automatically, adjust the corresponding button or knob manually. If the position is selected, with a OPS043182 low fan speed, a higher fan speed OPS043183 may be automatically selected. 1. Set the fan speed to the highest ■ Type B (extreme right) position. 2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot position. 3. Select the position. 4. The outside (fresh) air and air conditioning will be selected automatically.

OPS043185 1. Set the fan speed to the desired position. 2. Select desired temperature.

4 124 Features of your vehicle

To defrost outside windshield 4. The air-conditioning will be turned Defogging logic on according to the detected ■ Type A To reduce the possibility of fogging ambient temperature and outside up the inside of the windshield, the (fresh) air position will be selected air intake or air conditioning are con- automatically. trolled automatically according to If the position is selected, with a certain conditions such as or low fan speed, a higher fan speed position. To cancel or return to the may be automatically selected. defogging logic, do the following.

OPS043184 ■ Type B

OPS043186 1. Set fan speed to the highest position. 2. Set temperature to the Maximum (HI). 3. Press the defrost button ( ).

4125 Features of your vehicle

Manual climate control system If the battery has been discharged or Automatic climate control system disconnected, it will be reset to the ■ defog logic status. Type A

OPS043189 ■ Type B OPS043187 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Turn the mode selection knob to the defrost position ( ). 3. Within 10 seconds after select the defrost positon, press the air intake control button ( ) at least 5 times within 3 seconds. OPS043188 The indicator on the air intake button blinks 3 times with 0.5 seconds of 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON interval. It indicates that the defog- position. ging logic is canceled or returned to 2. Press the defrost button ( ). the programmed status.

4 126 Features of your vehicle

CLEAN AIR (IF EQUIPPED) 3. While pressing the air conditioning button (A/C), press the air intake control button ( ) at least 5 times within 3 seconds. The indicator on the air intake button blinks 3 times with 0.5 seconds of interval. It indicates that the defogging logic is canceled or returned to the programmed status.

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, it will be reset to the OPS043206 defog logic status. When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the clean air function turns on automatically. Also, the clean air function turns off automatically, when the ignition switch turns to the OFF position.

4127 Features of your vehicle

STORAGE COMPARTMENT These compartments can be used to Center console storage Glove box store small items. ■ Type A • To avoid possible theft, do not leave valuables in the storage compartment. • Always keep the storage compartment covers closed while driving. Do not attempt to place so many items in the storage compartment that the storage compartment cover cannot close securely. OPS043060 ■ Type B WARNING - Flammable OPS043062 materials To open the glove box, push the but- Do not store, propane cylinders ton and the glove box will automati- or other flammable/explosive cally open. Close the glove box after materials in the vehicle. These use. items may catch fire and/or Always keep the glove box closed explode if the vehicle is exposed while the vehicle is in operation. to hot temperatures for extended periods. OPS043061 These compartments can be used to store small items required by the driver or front passenger. To open the center console storage, pull up the lever. (Type B)

4 128 Features of your vehicle

Cool box (if equipped) ✽ NOTICE Sunglass holder Do not put perishable food in the cool box because it may not maintain the necessary consistent temperature to keep the food fresh. ✽ NOTICE If the temperature control knob is in the warm or hot position, warm or hot air will flow into the glove box.

OPS043064 OPS043065 You can keep beverage cans or other To open the sunglass holder, press items cool in the glove box. the cover and the holder will slowly 1. Turn on the air conditioning. open. Place your sunglasses with the lenses facing out. 2. Slide the open/close lever of the vent installed in the glove box to To close the sunglass holder, push it the open position. up. 3. When the cool box is not used, Do not place other items in the sun- slide the lever to the closed posi- glass holder. tion. If some items in the cool box block the vent, the cooling effectiveness of the coolbox is reduced.

4129 Features of your vehicle

Luggage box (if equipped) WARNING - Sunglass holder • Do not keep objects except sunglasses inside the sunglass holder. Such objects can be thrown from the holder in the event of a sudden stop or an accident, possibly injuring the passengers in the vehicle. • Do not open the sunglass holder while the vehicle is OPS043198 moving. The rear view mirror of the vehicle can be blocked You can place a first aid kit, a reflec- by an opened sunglass holder. tor triangle, tools, etc. in the box for easy access.

4 130 Features of your vehicle

INTERIOR FEATURES Cup holder ■ Type A Rear (if equipped)

WARNING - Hot liquids Do not place uncovered cups with hot liquid in the cup holder while the vehicle is in motion. If the hot liquid spills, you burn yourself. Such a burn to the driver could lead to loss of control of the vehicle. OPS043067 ■ Type B

OPS043068 To use the cup holder, folding the center seat or pull down the armrest.

OPS043066 Cups or small beverage cans may be placed in the cup holders.

4131 Features of your vehicle

Sunvisor Seat warmer (if equipped) CAUTION - Vanity mirror lamp ■ Type A (if equipped) If you use the vanity mirror lamp, turn off the lamp before return the sunvisor to its original position. It could result in battery discharge and possible sunvisor damage.

OPS033012 ■ Type B OVG049174 Use the sunvisor to shield direct light through the front or side windows. To use the sunvisor, pull it downward. To use the sunvisor for the side window, pull it downward, unsnap it from the bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2). Adjust the sunvisor extension forward or backward (3). (if equipped) OPS033013 To use the vanity mirror, pull down the The seat warmer is provided to warm visor and slide the mirror cover (4). the front seats during cold weather. To use the vanity mirror lamp, switch With the ignition switch in the ON it on. (if equipped) position, push either of the switches The ticket holder (5, if equipped) is to warm the driver's seat or the front provided for holding a tollgate ticket. passenger's seat.

4 132 Features of your vehicle

During mild weather or under condi- ✽ NOTICE CAUTION - Seat damage tions where the operation of the seat With the seat warmer switch in the warmer is not needed, keep the ON position, the heating system in the • When cleaning the seats, do switches in the "OFF" position. seat turns off or on automatically not use an organic solvent • Each time you press the switch, depending on the seat temperature. such as paint thinner, ben- the temperature setting of the seat zene, alcohol and gasoline. will change as follows : Doing so may damage the surface of the heater or seats.

• Type A • Type B

→ → • To prevent overheating the OFF OFF →→→ →→ seat warmer, do not place anything on the seats that insu- HIGH ( ) HIGH ( ) lates against heat, such as blankets, cushions or seat LOW ( ) MIDDLE ( )* covers while the seat warmer is in operation. LOW ( ) • Do not place heavy or sharp objects on seats equipped • The seat warmer defaults to the with seat warmers. Damage to OFF position whenever the ignition the seat warming components switch is turned on. could occur. • When pressing the switch for more • Be careful not to spill liquid than 1.5 seconds with the seat such as water or beverages on warmer operating, the seat warmer the seat. If you spill some liq- will turn OFF. uid, wipe the seat with a dry towel. Before using the seat warmer, dry the seat completely.

4133 Features of your vehicle

Seat air ventilation (if equipped) • If you want to cool your seat cush- WARNING - Seat heater ion, press the switch (blue color). burns • Each time you press the button, The seat warmer may cause the airflow will change as follows:

burns, even at low temperatures, if used over a long period OFF → of time. Never allow passengers →→→ who may not be able to take HIGH ( ) care of themselves to be exposed to the risk of seat MIDDLE ( ) heater burns. These include: 1. Infants, children, elderly or LOW ( ) disabled persons, or hospital OPS033014 outpatients • When pressing the switch for more 2. Persons with sensitive skin The temperature setting of the seat than 1.5 seconds with the seat air or those that burn easily changes according to the switch ventilation operating, the seat air position. 3. Fatigued individuals ventilation will turn OFF. 4. Intoxicated individuals • The seat air ventilation defaults to the OFF position whenever the 5. Individuals taking medication ignition switch is turned on. that can cause drowsiness or sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold tablets, etc.)

4 134 Features of your vehicle

Rear seat warmer (if equipped) • When pressing the switch for more CAUTION - Seat damage than 1.5 seconds with the seat • When cleaning the seats, do warmer operating, the seat warmer not use an organic solvent will turn OFF. such as paint thinner, ben- • The seat warmer defaults to the zene, alcohol and gasoline. OFF position whenever the engine Doing so may damage the air start/stop button (the ignition switch) ventilation seat. is turned on. • Do not place heavy or sharp objects on the seat. Those ✽ NOTICE things may damage the air ventilation seat. With the seat warmer switch in the ON position, the heating system in • Be careful not to spill liquid OPS033031 the seat turns off or on automatically such as water or beverages on depending on the seat temperature. the seat. If you spill some liquid, The seat warmer is provided to warm wipe the seat with a dry towel. the rear outboard seats during cold Before using the air ventilation weather. With the ignition switch in seat, dry the seat completely. the ON position, push either of the switches to warm rear seats. During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat warmer is not needed, keep the switches in the "OFF" position.

OFF → HIGH ( ) → LOW ( ) →

4135 Features of your vehicle

Power outlet (if equipped) CAUTION - Seat damage - Seat heater WARNING ■ • When cleaning the seats, do burns Front (Type A) not use an organic solvent The seat warmer may cause such as thinner, benzene, alco- burns, even at low tempera- hol and gasoline. Doing so may tures, if used over a long period damage the surface of the of time. Never allow passengers heater or seats. who may not be able to take • To prevent overheating the seat care of themselves to be warmer, do not place anything exposed to the risk of seat on the seats that insulates heater burns. These include: against heat, such as blankets, 1. Infants, children, elderly or OPS043069 cushions or seat covers while ■ Rear (if equipped) the seat warmer is in operation. disabled persons, or hospital outpatients • Do not place heavy or sharp objects on seats equipped 2. Persons with sensitive skin with seat warmers. Damage to or those that burn easily the seat warming components 3. Fatigued individuals could occur. 4. Intoxicated individuals • Be careful not to spill liquid 5. Individuals taking medication such as water or beverages on that can cause drowsiness or the seat. If you spill some liquid, sleepiness (sleeping pills, wipe the seat with a dry towel. cold tablets, etc.) OPS043070 Before using the seat warmer, dry the seat completely. The power outlet is designed to provide power for mobile telephones or other devices designed to operate with vehicle electrical systems. The devices should draw less than 10 amps with the engine running.

4 136 Features of your vehicle

• Use the power outlet only when the Clothes hanger (if equipped) engine is running and remove the WARNING - Electric accessory plug after use. Using the shock accessory plug for prolonged peri- Do not put a finger or a foreign ods of time with the engine off could element (pin, etc.) into a power cause the battery to discharge. outlet and do not touch with a • Only use 12V electric accessories wet hand.You may get an electric which are less than 10A(Driver’s shock. side) or 15A(Passenger’s side) in electric capacity. • Adjust the air-conditioner or heater to the lowest operating level when using the power outlet. ORP042186 • Close the cover when not in use. To use the hanger, pull down the • Some electronic devices can cause upper portion of hanger. electronic interference when plugged into a vehicle’s power out- Be careful when opening and closing let. These devices may cause the doors. Clothes, etc. may get excessive audio static and malfunc- caught between the door gap. tions in other electronic systems or devices used in your vehicle. CAUTION - Hanging clothing Do not hang heavy clothes, since those may damage the hook.

4137 Features of your vehicle

Floor mat anchor(s) The following must be observed WARNING - After market ■ ■ when installing ANY floormat to the Driver's side Passenger's side floor mat vehicle. Do not install aftermarket floor • Ensure that the floormats are mats that are not capable of securely attached to the vehicle's being securely attached to the floormat anchor(s) before driving vehicle's floor mat anchors. the vehicle. Unsecured floor mats can inter- • Do not use ANY floormat that can- fere with pedal operation. not be firmly attached to the vehicle's floormat anchors. • Do not stack floormats on top of one another (e.g. all-weather rub- OTFNCO2001 ber mat on top of a carpeted floormat). Only a single floormat should When using a floor mat on the floor be installed in each position. carpet, make sure it attaches to the floor mat anchor(s) in your vehicle. IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was This keeps the floor mat from sliding manufactured with driver's side floor- forward. mat anchors that are designed to securely hold the floormat in place. To avoid any interference with pedal operation, Kia recommends that only the Kia floormat designed for use in your vehicle be installed.

4 138 Features of your vehicle

Luggage net holder Cargo area cover (if equipped) (if equipped) WARNING - Luggage net • Always keep your face and body out of the luggage net recoil path and avoid using the luggage net when the straps have visible signs of wear or damage. The luggage net can snap and cause injuries. • All cargo should be evenly distributed, properly secured and never piled higher than the seatback. OPS043199 OPS043193 Use the cargo area cover to hide To keep items from shifting in the items stored in the cargo area. cargo area, you can use the holders located in the cargo area to attach the luggage net. If necessary, contact your authorized Kia dealer to obtain a luggage net. To prevent damage to the goods or the vehicle, care should be taken when carrying fragile or bulky objects in the luggage compartment.

4139 Features of your vehicle

WARNING - Objects • Do not place objects on the cargo area cover. Such objects may be thrown about inside the vehicle and possibly injure vehicle occupants during an accident or when braking. • All cargo should be evenly distributed, properly secured OPS043200 and never piled higher than To use the cargo area cover, insert the seatback. the 4 edges into the slots. CAUTION - Luggage Since the cargo area cover may be damaged or malformed, do not apply excessive force to the cover or do not put the heavy loads on it.

4 140 Features of your vehicle

EXTERIOR FEATURES Mounting bracket for roof carrier ✽ NOTICE (if equipped) If the vehicle is equipped with a sunroof, be sure not to position cargo onto the roof in such a way that it could interfere with sunroof operation.

CAUTION - Loading roof rack When carrying cargo on the roof OED046091 rack, take the necessary precau- 2. Rotate the cover half way and tions to make sure the cargo insert the cover on the roof hole as does not damage the roof of the OPS043207 the illustration. vehicle. To install or remove a roof carrier, you can use the mounting bracket ✽ and cover on the roof. NOTICE When you install a roof carrier, do To prevent losing the roof carrier the following procedure. cover, install the cover on the roof before you install the roof carrier.

1. Insert a slim tool (coin or flat blade 3. After using the roof carrier, install driver) into the slot and slide the the cover back on the roof in the cover toward the arrow on the reverse order. cover.

4141 Features of your vehicle

• When carrying large objects on the roof rack, make sure they do not WARNING - Driving with exceed the overall roof length or roof load width. Always drive slow and turn cor- • The vehicle center of gravity will be ners carefully when carrying higher when items are loaded onto items on the roof rack.The vehi- the roof. Avoid sudden starts, brak- cle center of gravity will be ing, sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers higher when items are loaded or high speeds that may result in onto the roof rack. loss of vehicle control or rollover resulting in an accident. • To prevent damage or loss of cargo while driving, check frequently before or while driving to make sure the items on the roof are securely fastened.

4 142 Features of your vehicle

AUDIO SYSTEM If you install aftermarket HID head Antenna (if equipped) lamps, your vehicle’s audio and elec- CAUTION - Antenna tronic devices may malfunction. Before entering a place with a low height clearance or a car wash, remove the antenna pole by rotating it counterclockwise. If not, the antenna may be damaged.

• When reinstalling your roof antenna, it is important that it is fully tightened and adjusted to the OHM048154N upright position to ensure proper Your vehicle uses a roof antenna to reception. receive AM or/and FM broadcast sig- • When cargo is loaded on the roof nals. rack, do not place the cargo near This antenna pole is removable. To the antenna pole to ensure proper remove the roof antenna pole, turn it reception. counterclockwise. To install the roof antenna pole, turn it clockwise.

4143 Features of your vehicle

Audio remote control VOLUME (VOL+/ VOL-) (1) (if equipped) WARNING • Push the VOL + to increase volume. Driving while distracted can • Push the VOL - to decrease volume. result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury and SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2) death. The driver’s primary If the SEEK/PRESET button is responsibility is in the safe and pressed for 1 second or more, it will legal operation of a vehicle, and work as follows in each mode. use of any handheld devices, other equipment or vehicle systems which take the driver’s RADIO mode eyes, attention and focus away It will function as the AUTO SEEK from the safe operation of a select button. OPS043190 vehicle or that are not permissible by law should never be used The steering wheel audio remote USB mode control button may be installed. during operation of the vehicle. It will function as the FF/REW button. Do not operate the audio remote control buttons simultaneously. If the SEEK/PRESET button is pressed for less than 1 second, it will work as follows in each mode.

4 144 Features of your vehicle

RADIO mode Aux, USB and iPod® * port When using a portable audio device It will function as the PRESET STA- (if equipped) connected to the power outlet, noise TION select buttons. may occur during playback. If this happens, use the power source of the portable audio device. USB mode It will function as the FILE UP/DOWN * iPod® is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. button.

MODE (3) Press the button to select Radio, USB or AUX.

Detailed information for audio control OPS043194 buttons is described in the following If your vehicle has an aux and/or pages in this section. USB(universal serial bus) port or iPod® port, you can use an aux port to connect audio devices and an USB port to plug in an USB and also an iPod® port to plug in an iPod®.

4145 Features of your vehicle

Speaker lights (if equipped) 1. OFF : The light turns off. ✽ NOTICE 2. MUSIC : When the doors are opened, the The red light blinks according to the lighting system will not operate. sound of the audio. If the audio is not turned on, the light does not turn on. 3. MOOD : The light color changes automatically at regular interval. 4. +/- : OPS043195 When the lights are on, push the illumination button to adjust the light intensity. If low lighting grade is selected, the intensity of light may be weak or may not illuminate according to the audio volume or selected condition. The lighting around the front speaker may not illuminate when the sound of the audio is low. OPS043196 The speaker lights that lights around Do not use the lights for extended the front speaker is adjusted by turn- periods when engine is not running. ing the knob as follows. It may cause battery discharge.

4146 Features of your vehicle

How vehicle audio works This can be due to factors, such as AM reception the distance from the radio station, FM reception closeness of other strong radio stations or the presence of buildings, bridges or other large obstructions in the area.

¢¢¢ ¢¢¢ ¢¢¢

JBM002

JBM001 AM broadcasts can be received at greater distances than FM broad- AM and FM radio signals are broadcasts. This is because AM radio cast from transmitter towers located waves are transmitted at low fre- around your city. They are intercept- quencies. These long distance,low ed by the radio antenna on your vehi- frequency radio waves can follow the cle. This signal is then processed by curvature of the earth rather than the radio and sent to your vehicle travelling straight. In addition, they speakers. curve around obstructions resulting However, in some cases the signal in better signal coverage. coming to your vehicle may not be strong and clear.

4 147 Features of your vehicle

FM radio station

¢¢¢

JBM003 JBM004 JBM005 FM broadcasts are transmitted at • Fading - As your vehicle moves • Station Swapping - As an FM sig- high frequencies and do not bend to away from the radio station, the nal weakens, another more power- follow the earth's surface. Because signal will weaken and sound will ful signal near the same frequency of this, FM broadcasts generally begin to fade. When this occurs, may begin to play. This is because begin to fade within short distances we suggest that you select another your radio is designed to lock onto from the station. Also, FM signals are stronger station. the clearest signal. If this occurs, easily affected by buildings, moun- • Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or select another station with a tains, and obstructions. This can large obstructions between the stronger signal. lead to undesirable or unpleasant lis- transmitter and your radio can dis- • Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio tening conditions which might lead turb the signal causing static or signals being received from sever- you to believe a problem exists with fluttering noises to occur. Reducing al directions can cause distortion your radio. The following conditions the treble level may lessen this or fluttering. This can be caused by are normal and do not indicate radio effect until the disturbance clears. a direct and reflected signal from trouble: the same station, or by signals from two stations with close frequencies. If this occurs, select another station until the condition has passed.

4 148 Features of your vehicle

Using a cellular phone or a two- way radio WARNING - Cell phone WARNING - Audio System When a cellular phone is used inside use Do not disassemble, assemble, the vehicle, noise may be produced Do not use a cellular phone or modify the audio system. from the audio system. This does not while driving. Stop at a safe Such acts could result in fire or mean that something is wrong with location to use a cellular phone. electric shock. the audio equipment. In such a case, try to operate mobile devices as far from the audio equipment as possi- WARNING - Driver WARNING - Antenna ble. Distraction Do not touch the antenna dur- • Do not stare at the screen ing thunder or lightening as When using a communication sys- while driving. Staring at the such acts may lead to lightning tem such as a cellular phone or a screen for prolonged periods induced electric shock. radio set inside the vehicle, a sepa- of time could lead to traffic rate external antenna must be fitted. accidents. When a cellular phone or a radio set • Using the phone while driving CAUTION is used with an internal antenna may lead to a lack of attention alone, it may interfere with the vehi- of traffic conditions and Refrain from use if the screen is cle's electrical system and adversely increase the likelihood of blank or no sound can be hear affect safe operation of the vehicle. accidents. Use the phone fea- as these signs may indicate ture after parking the vehicle. product malfunction.

4149 Features of your vehicle

WARNING - Driver dis- CAUTION (Continued) traction • Turn on the car ignition before • Do not place beverages close Operating the device while driv- using the audio system Do not to the audio system. Spilling ing could lead to accidents due operate the audio system for beverages may lead to system to a lack of attention to external long periods of time with the malfunction. surroundings. Park the vehicle ignition turned off as such • In case of product malfunc- before attempting to set or pro- operations may lead to battery tion, please contact your place gram the device. discharge. of purchase or After Service • Do not subject the device to center. severe shock or impact. Direct • Placing the audio system • Adjust the volume to levels that pressure onto the front side of within an electromagnetic allow the driver to hear sounds the monitor may cause dam- environment may result in from outside of the vehicle. Driving age to the LCD or touch noise interference. in a state where external sounds screen. • Prevent caustic solutions cannot be heard may lead to acci- • When cleaning the device, such as perfume and cosmet- dents. make sure to turn off the ic oil from contacting the • Pay attention to the volume setting audio system and use a dry dashboard because they may when turning the device on. A sud- and smooth cloth. Never use cause damage or discol- den output of extreme volume tough materials, chemical oration. upon turning the device on could cloths, or solvents (alcohol, lead to hearing impairment. (Adjust benzene, thinners, etc.) as the volume to a suitable levels such materials may damage before turning off the device.) the device panel or cause color/quality deterioration (Continued)

4150 Features of your vehicle

USING THE USB DEVICE (Continued) (Continued) • To use an external USB device, • An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is • You may hear a strange noise make sure the device is not con- not recognizable. when connecting or disconnect- nected when starting up the • Depending on the condition of ing a USB device. vehicle. Connect the device after the external USB device, the • If you disconnect the external starting up. connected external USB device USB device during playback in • If you start the engine when the can be unrecognizable. USB mode, the external USB USB device is connected, it may • When the formatted byte/sector device can be damaged or may damage the USB device. (USB setting of External USB device is malfunction. Therefore, discon- flashdrives are very sensitive to not either 512BYTE or nect the external USB device electric shock.) 2048BYTE, then the device will when the audio is turned off or in another mode. (e.g, Radio) • If the engine is started up or not be recognized. turned off while the external USB • Use only a USB device format- • Depending on the type and device is connected, the external ted to FAT 12/16/32. capacity of the external USB USB device may not work. device or the type of the files • USB devices without USB I/F stored in the device, there is a • The System may not play unau- authentication may not be recog- difference in the time for recogni- thenticated MP3 or WMA files. nizable. tion the device. 1) It can only play MP3 files with • Make sure the USB connection • Do not use the USB device for the compression rate terminal does not come in con- purposes other than playing between 8Kbps ~ 320Kbps. tact with the human body or music files. 2) It can only play WMA music other objects. • Playing videos through the USB files with the compression • If you repeatedly connect or dis- is not supported. rate between 8Kbps ~ connect the USB device in a 320Kbps. short period of time, it may break • Use of USB accessories such as rechargers or heaters using USB • Take precautions for static elec- the device. I/F may lower performance or tricity when connecting or discon- (Continued) cause trouble. necting the external USB device. (Continued) (Continued)

4151 Features of your vehicle

® (Continued) (Continued) USING iPod DEVICE • If you use devices such as a • Some USB flash memory read- iPhone® is a registered grademark of USB hub purchased separately, ers (such as CF, SD, micro SD, Apple inc. the vehicle’s audio system may etc.) or external-HDD type • Some iPod® models may not sup- not recognize the USB device. In devices can be unrecognizable. port communication protocol and that case, connect the USB • Music files protected by DRM files may not properly play. device directly to the multimedia (DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGE- Supported iPod® models: terminal of the vehicle. MENT) are not recognizable. - iPhone® 3GS/4 • If the USB device is divided by • The data in the USB memory ® logical drives, only the music - iPod touch 1st~4th generation may be lost while using this ® files on the highest-priority drive audio. Always back up important - iPod nano 1st~6th generation are recognized by car audio. data on a personal storage - iPod® classic • Devices such as MP3 Player/ device. • The order of search or playback of Cellular phone/Digital camera • Please avoid using songs in the iPod® can be different can be unrecognizable by stan- USB memory prod- from the order searched in the dard USB I/F can be unrecogniz- ucts which can be audio system. able. used as key chains or • If the iPod® is disabled due to its • Charging through the USB may cellular phone acces- own malfunction, reset the iPod®. not be supported in some mobile sories as they could cause dam- (Reset: Refer to iPod® manual) devices. age to the USB jack. Please • An iPod® may not operate normally • USB HDD or USB types liable to make certain only to use plug on low battery. type connector products. connection failures due to vehi- (Continued) cle vibrations are not supported. (i-stick type) • Some non-standard USB devices (METAL COVER TYPE USB) can be unrecognizable. (Continued)

4 152 Features of your vehicle

(Continued) (Continued) Bluetooth® Wireless • Some iPod® devices, such as the • When connecting iPod® with the Technology(if equipped) iPhone®, can be connected iPod® Power Cable, insert the con- through the Bluetooth® Wireless nector to the multimedia socket Technology interface. The device completely. If not inserted com- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology must have audio Bluetooth® pletely, communications between The Bluetooth® word mark and logos Wireless Technology capability iPod® and audio may be interrupt- are registered trademarks owned by (such as for stereo headphone ed. Bluetooth SIG, lnc. and any use of Bluetooth® Wireless Technology ). • When adjusting the sound effects such marks by Kia is under license. The device can play, but it will not of the iPod® and the audio system, A Bluetooth® enabled call phone is be controlled by the audio system. the sound effects of both devices required to use Bluetooth® wireless • To use iPod® features within the will overlap and might reduce or technology. audio, use the cable provided upon distort the quality of the sound. purchasing an iPod® device. • Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer WARNING • Skipping or improper operation function of an iPod® when adjust- Driving while distracted can may occur depending on the char- ing the audio system’s volume, and result in a loss of vehicle control acteristics of your iPod®/iPhone® turn off the equalizer of the audio that may lead to an accident, device. system when using the equalizer of severe personal injury, and • If your iPhone® is connected to an iPod®. death. The driver’s primary both the Bluetooth® Wireless • When not using iPod® with car responsibility is in the safe and Technology and USB, only support audio, detach the iPod® cable from legal operation of a vehicle, and iPod® mode because the sound iPod®. Otherwise, iPod® may use of any handheld devices, may not be properly played in remain in accessory mode, and other equipment, or vehicle sys- Bluetooth® Audio Streaming. To may not work properly. tems which take the driver’s use Bluetooth® Audio Streaming, eyes, attention and focus away disconnect iPod® cable with from the safe operation of a vehi- iPhone®. cle or which are not permissible (Continued) by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.

4153 Features of your vehicle

Before Using the Bluetooth® Precautions for Safe Driving When connecting a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Phone Handsfree • Bluetooth® Handsfree is a feature that enables drivers to practice • Before connecting the head unit What is Bluetooth® ? safe driving. Connecting the head with the mobile phone, check to see that the mobile phone sup- ® unit with a Bluetooth® phone allows • Bluetooth refers to a short-distance ports Bluetooth® features. wireless networking technology the user to conveniently make and which uses a 2.4GHz ~ 2.48GHz receive calls and use contacts. • Even if the phone supports frequency to connect various Before using Bluetooth®, carefully Bluetooth®, the phone will not be devices within a certain distance. read the contents of this user’s found during device searches if the manual. phone has been set to hidden state • Supported within PCs, external or the Bluetooth® power is turned devices, Bluetooth® phones, PDAs, • Excessive use or operations while driving may lead to negligent driv- off. Disable the hidden state or turn various electronic devices, and on the Bluetooth® power prior to automotive environments, ing practices and result in accidents. Refrain from excessive searching/connecting with the Bluetooth® allows data to be trans- Head unit. mitted at high speeds without hav- operations while driving. ing to use a connector cable. • Viewing the screen for prolonged • If you do not want automatic connection with your Bluetooth® • Bluetooth® Handsfree refers to a periods of time is dangerous and may lead to accidents. When driv- device, turn off the Bluetooth® fea- device which allows the user to ture within your mobile phone. conveniently make phone calls with ing, view the screen only for short Bluetooth® mobile phones through periods of time. • The Handsfree call volume and the audio system. quality may differ depending on the mobile phone. • Bluetooth® Handsfree may not be supported in some mobile phones. To learn more about mobile device compatibility, visit www.kia.com.

4 154 Features of your vehicle

• Park the vehicle when connecting Voice Recognition (Continued) the head unit with the mobile - When driving on rugged and phone. uneven roads ® • When using the voice recognition • Bluetooth connection may feature, only commands listed - During severe rain (heavy rains, become intermittently disconnect- within the user's manual are sup- windstorms) ed in some mobile phones. Follow ported. these steps to try again. • Phone related voice commands • Be aware that during the operation can be used only when a 1.Within the mobile phone, turn Bluetooth® Wireless Technology ® of the voice recognition system, the Bluetooth function off/on pressing any key other than the device is connected. and try again. key terminate voice recogni- • When making calls by stating a 2.Turn the mobile phone power tion mode. name, the corresponding contact Off/On and try again. • For superior voice recognition per- must be downloaded and stored 3.Reboot the audio system and try formance, position the microphone within the audio system. again. used for voice recognition above • After downloading the Bluetooth® 4.Delete all paired devices, pair the head of the driver’s seat and Wireless Technology phone book, and try again. maintain a proper position when it takes some times to convert the • Handsfree call quality and volume saying commands. phone book data into voice infor- may differ depending on the model • Within the following situations, mation. During this time, voice of your mobile phone. voice recognition may not function recognition may not properly oper- properly due to external sound. ate. - When the windows and sunroof • Pronounce the voice commands are open naturally and clearly as if in a nor- - When the blower AC/heater is set mal conversation. to high - When entering and passing through tunnels (Continued)

4155 Features of your vehicle

The Bluetooth and Voice Recognition Manual is provided in two versions due to software version differences. Before reading the manual, check the following.

Press the SETUP key Select [Phone] 1. If you CANNOT find “Audio Streaming” menu, (Go to 157 page)

2. If you CAN find “Audio Streaming” menu, (Go to 201 page)

4 156 Features of your vehicle

■ AUDIO : AM1A0B2AN, AM1A0B2KN

PS34001N

4157 Features of your vehicle

SYSTEM CONTROLLERS ❈ In Setup>Display, the radio pop up SETUP (4) CLOCK AND FUNCTIONS screen will be displayed when [Mode Pop up] is turned On . Briefly press the key (under 0.8 sec- When the pop up screen is dis- onds) : Moves to the Display, Sound, ❈ Display and settings may differ played, use the TUNE knob or Clock, Phone, System setting modes depending on the selected audio. keys 1 ~ 6 to select the Press and hold the key (over 0.8 sec- desired mode. onds) : Move to the Time setting screen Audio Head Unit SEEK (2) MEDIA (5) TRACK Changes to USB(iPod®), AUX, My Radio Mode : Automatically search- Music, BT Audio mode. es for broadcast frequencies. Each time the key is pressed, the USB, iPod®, My Music modes mode is changed in order of - Briefly press the key (under 0.8 USB(iPod®), AUX, My Music, BT seconds): Moves to next or previ- Audio. ous song (file) ❈ In Setup>Display, the media pop - Press and hold the key (over 0.8 up screen will be displayed when seconds): Rewinds or fast-forwards [Mode Pop up] is turned On . the current song. When the pop up screen is dis- PS34001N played, use the TUNE knob or BT Audio mode : Moves to next or previous song(file) keys 1 ~ 5 to select the (1) RADIO desired mode. ❈ The Play/Pause feature may oper- Changes to FM/AM/SiriusXMTM mode. ate differently depending on the mobile phone. Each time the key is pressed, the (3) PHONE mode is changed in order of FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ SAT1 ➟ SAT2 ➟ SAT3. Operates Phone Screen ❈ When a phone is not connected, the connection screen is displayed.

4 158 Features of your vehicle

(6) PWR/VOL knob (9) SCAN Power : Turns power On/Off by Radio mode pressing the knob - Shortly press the key : Previews Volume : Sets volume by turning each broadcast for 5 seconds the knob left/right each. - Press and hold the key (over 0.8 (7) 1 ~ 6 (Preset) seconds): Previews the broadcasts Radio mode: Saves frequencies saved in Preset 1 ~ 6 for 5 (channels) or receives saved fre- seconds each. quencies (channels) ❈ Press the SCAN key again to PS34001N USB, iPod®, My Music mode continue listening to the current frequency. - 1 RPT : Repeat (8) DISP ❈ SAT Radio does not support the - 2 RDM : Random Each time the button is pressed, it Preset scan feature. In the Radio, Media, Setup, and sets the screen Off ➟ Screen On ➟ USB, My Music mode Menu pop up screen, the number Screen Off menu is selected. - Briefly press the key (under 0.8 ❈ Audio operation is maintained and seconds): Previews each song only the screen will be turned Off. (file) for 10 seconds each. In the screen Off state, press any ❈ Press the SCAN key again to key to turn the screen On again. continue listening to the current song (file).

(10) MENU Displays menus for the current mode. ❈ iPod List : Move to parent category

4159 Features of your vehicle

(11) BACK (13) TUNE knob Go to previous depth(no previous AM/FM mode : screen) - Changes frequency by turning the knob left/right. CAT (12) FOLDER SiriusXMTM Radio Mode: Radio mode - Changes the station by turning the - SiriusXMTM RADIO : Category knob left/right. Press knob to Search select station. - USB mode : Folder Search USB, iPod®, My Music mode: - Searches songs (files) by turning the knob left/right. ❈ When the desired song is displayed, press the knob to play the song. Moves focus in all selection menus and selects menus.

4 160 Features of your vehicle

SETUP Mode Pop up [Mode Pop up] Changes On / Off selection mode Display Settings • During On state, press the RADIO or MEDIA key to display the mode Press the SETUP key Select [Display] change pop up screen. through TUNE knob or 1 key Select menu through TUNE knob Media Display When playing an MP3 file, select the desired display info from ‘Folder/File’ or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.

4161 Features of your vehicle

SOUND SETTINGS Sound Settings Speed Dependent Volume Control This menu allows you to set the This feature will gradually increase ‘Bass, Middle, Treble’ and the Sound the volume as speed increases to Press the SETUP key Select [Sound] Fader and Balance. offset outside noise. through TUNE knob or 2 key Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Set Select menu through TUNE knob Select [Sound Settings] Select menu through TUNE knob Tur n [On/Off] of TUNE knob TUNE knob left/right to set • Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the Voice Recognition Volume sound tone. Adjusts voice recognition volume. • Fader, Balance : Moves the sound Select [Voice Recognition Vol.] Set fader and balance. volume of TUNE knob • Default : Restores default settings. ❈ Back : While adjusting values, pressing the TUNE knob will restore the parent menu.

4 162 Features of your vehicle

CLOCK SETTINGS Sound Settings ❈ Adjust the number currently in This menu is used to set the time. focus to make the settings and press the tune knob to move to the SETUP Select [Clock Settings] Set through Press the CLOCK key Select [Clock] next setting. (Set in order of through TUNE knob or 3 key TUNE knob Press TUNE knob Year/Month/Day) Select menu through TUNE knob Time Format This function is used to set the 12/24 hour time format of the audio system. Select [Time Format] Set 12Hr / 24Hr through TUNE knob ❈ Adjust the number currently in focus to set the [hour] and press the tune knob to set the [minute] Clock Display when Power is OFF and [AM/PM]. Select [Clock Disp.(Pwr Off) Set On / Off through TUNE knob Calendar Settings This menu is used to set the date On : Displays time/date on screen (MM/DD/YYYY). Off : Turn off. Select [Calendar Settings] Set through TUNE knob Press TUNE knob

4163 Features of your vehicle

SYSTEM SETTINGS Memory Information • Off : This mode is for expert users Displays currently used memory and and omits some information during total system memory. voice command operation. (When Press the SETUP key Select using Expert mode, guidance [System] Select menu through Select [Memory Information] OK instructions can be heard through TUNE knob The currently used memory is dis- the [Help] or [Menu] commands. played on the left side while the total system memory is displayed on the right side. Language This menu is used to set the display and voice recognition language. Select [Language] Set through TUNE knob

Prompt Feedback This feature is used to change voice command feedback between Normal and Expert modes. ❈ The system will reboot after the Select [Prompt Feedback] Set language is changed. through TUNE knob ❈ Language support by region • On : This mode is for beginner - English, Francais, Espanol users and provides detailed instructions during voice command operation.

4 164 Features of your vehicle

RADIO : FM, AM OR SIRIUSTM Preset SEEK Selecting through manual Press the 1 ~ 6 key search • Briefly pressing the key (under 0.8 Turn the TUNE knob left/right to seconds): Plays the frequency adjust the frequency. saved in the corresponding key. • FM : Changes by 200KHz • Pressing and holding the key (over • AM : Changes by 10KHz 0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding the desired key from 1 ~ 6 will save the currently playing broadcast to the selected key and SEEK sound a BEEP. SEEK Press the TRACK key • Briefly pressing the key (under 0.8 SCAN seconds): Automatically searches for the next station. Press the SCAN key • Pressing and holding the key (over • Briefly pressing the key (under 0.8 0.8 seconds): While holding the key, seconds): The broadcast frequency frequency changes without stop- increases and previews each ping. When the key is released, broadcast for 5 seconds each. After automatically searches for the next scanning all frequencies, returns frequency from that point. and plays the current broadcast frequency. • Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8 seconds): Previews the broadcasts saved in Preset 1 ~ 6 for 5 seconds each.

4165 Features of your vehicle

MENU Within MENU key are the A.Store (Auto Store) and Info functions.

A.Store Press the MENU key Set [A.Store] through TUNE knob or 1 key. Saves broadcasts with superior reception to 1 ~ 6 keys. If no frequencies are received, then the most recently received frequency will be broadcast.

4 166 Features of your vehicle

SiriusXMTM Satellite Radio information Satellite Radio channels: • Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall build- NOTE: SiriusXMTM Satellite Radio offers ings, bridges, tunnels, freeway over- All SiriusXMTM services require a 150+ channels with 100% commer- passes, parking garages, dense subscription, sold separately or cial-free music, plus sports, news, tree foliage and thunderstorms can as a package, after 3-month trial talk and entertainment, available interfere with your reception. included with vehicle purchase or nationwide in your vehicle. For more SiriusXMTM Satellite Radio service: lease. If you decide to continue TM information and a complete list of TM your SiriusXM service at the end SiriusXMTM Satellite Radio channels, SiriusXM Satellite Radio is a sub- of your trial subscription, the plan visit www.siriusxm.com in the United scription-based satellite radio service you choose will automatically States, sirius-canada.ca in Canada, that broadcasts music, sports, news renew and bill at then-current or call SiriusXMTM at 1-800-643-2112. and entertainment programming to rates until you call us at 1-866- radio receivers, which are available for 635-2349 to cancel. See our Satellite Radio reception factors: installation in motor vehicles or factory Customer Agreement for com- To receive the satellite signal, your installed, as well as for the home, plete terms at www.siriusxm.com. vehicle has been equipped with a portable and wireless devices, and Other fees and taxes apply. All satellite radio antenna located on the through an Internet connection on per- fees and programming are subject roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof sonal computer. to change. Sirius satellite service provides the best location for an Vehicles that are equipped with a fac- is available only to those at least unobstructed, open view of the sky, a tory installed SiriusXMTM Satellite 18 and older in the 48 contiguous requirement of a satellite radio sys- Radio system include: USA, D.C., and PR (with coverage tem. Like AM/FM, there are several • Hardware and an introductory trial limitations). Our Internet radio factors that can affect satellite radio subscription term, which begins on service is available throughout reception performance: the date of sale or lease of the vehicle. our satellite service area and in • Antenna obstructions: For optimal • For a small upgrade fee, access to AK and HI. Certain channels are reception performance, keep the SiriusXMTM music channels, and other not available on our Internet radio antenna clear of snow and ice build- select channels over the Internet service or on mobile devices. up and keep luggage and other using any computer connected to the © 2013 Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sirius, material as far away from the anten- Internet (U.S. customers only). XM and all related marks and logos na as possible. For information on extended sub- are trademarks of SiriusXMTM scription terms, contact SiriusXMTM Radio Inc. All rights reserved at 1-866-635-2349. 4167 Features of your vehicle

SiriusXMTM RADIO Please note that the vehicle will need SCAN to be turned on, in Sirius mode, and Press the SCAN key have an unobstructed view of the sky SiriusXMTM Using Satellite in order for the radio to receive the • Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 Radio activation signal. seconds): Previews each broad- Your Kia vehicle is equipped with a 3 cast for 10 seconds each month complimentary period of ❈ Press the SCAN key again to SiriusXMTM Satellite Radio so you SEEK continue listening to the current SEEK have access to over 220 channels of Press the TRACK key frequency music, information, and entertain- • Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 ❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed, ment programming. seconds): select previous or next channels are changed within the channel. current category. • Pressing and holding the key (over 0.8 seconds): continuously move Category CAT to previous or next channel. Press the FOLDER key Set ❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed, through the TUNE knob channels are changed within the • The display will indicate the catego- current category. ry menus, highlight the category Activation that the current channel belongs to. In order to extend or reactivate your • In the Category List Mode, press subscription to SiriusXMTM Satellite CAT Radio, you will need to contact the FOLDER key to navigate cat- SiriusXMTM Customer Care at 1-800- egory list. 643-2112. Have your 12 digit SID • Press the tune knob to select the (Sirius Identification Number) / ESN lowest channel in the highlighted (Electronic Serial Number) ready. To category. retrieve the SID / ESN, turn on the ❈ If channel is selected by selecting radio, press the [RADIO] button, and category, then the “CATEGORY” tune to channel zero. icon is displayed at the top of the screen. 4 168 Features of your vehicle

Preset Tune Press the RADIO key1 ~ 6 • Rotate TUNE knob : Changes • Briefly pressing the key (under 0.8 the channel number or scrolls cat- seconds): Plays the frequency egory list. saved in the corresponding key. • Press TUNE knob : Selects the • Pressing and holding the key (over menu. 0.8 seconds): Pressing and holding the desired key from 1 ~ 6 Menu will save the current broadcast to the selected key and sound a Select category menu through the BEEP. TUNE knob Press the MENU key Select [ Info] through the TUNE ✽ Troubleshooting knob or 1 RPT key 1. Antenna Error If this message is displayed, the antenna or antenna cable is broken or Info (Information) unplugged. Please consult with your Displays the Artist/Song info of the Kia dealership. current song. 2. Acquiring Signal If this message is displayed, it means that the antenna is covered and that the SIRIUSTM Satellite Radio signal is not available. Ensure the antenna is uncovered and has a clear view of the sky.

4169 Features of your vehicle

BASIC METHOD OF USE : Repeat Random USB / iPod® / My Music While song (file) is playing 1 RPT While song (file) is playing 2 RDM (RPT) key (RDM) key USB, iPod®, My Music mode: RPT on My Music mode: RDM on screen Press the MEDIA key to change the screen mod mode in order of USB(iPod®) ➟ • Random (press the key) : Plays all AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio. • To repeat one song (press the key) songs in random order. : Repeats the current song. The folder/file name is displayed on USB mode: FLD.RDM on screen the screen. USB mode: FLD.RPT on screen • Folder Random (press the key) : • To repeat folder (pressing twice): Plays all files within the current repeats all files within the current folder in random order. folder. iPod® mode: ALL RDM on screen ❈ Press the 1 RPT key again to turn • All Random (press the key) : Plays off repeat. all files in random order. USB : ALL RDM on screen • All Random (pressing twice): Plays all files in random order. ❈ Press the 2 RDM key again to turn off random.

❈ The USB music is automatically played when a USB is connected.

4 170 Features of your vehicle

Changing Song/File Scan Folder Search : USB Mode CAT While song (file) is playing While song (file) is playing SCAN While file is playing FOLDER SEEK (Folder Up) key TRACK key key • Shortly pressing the key : Plays the • Shortly pressing the key : Scans all • Searches the next folder. CAT current song from the beginning. songs from the next song for 10 While file is playing FOLDER SEEK seconds each. (Folder Down) key ❈ If the TRACK key is pressed again within 2 second, the previ- ❈ Press the SCAN key again to turn • Searches the parent folder. ous song is played. off. ❈ If a folder is selected by pressing • Pressing and holding the key (over ❈ The SCAN function is not support- the TUNE knob, the first file 0.8 seconds): Rewinds the song. ed in iPod® mode. within the selected folder will be played. ❈ ® While song (file) is playing In iPod mode, moves to the SEEK Parent Folder. TRACK key • Shortly pressing the key : Plays the next song. Searching Songs (File) • Pressing and holding the key (over • Turning TUNE knob : Searches 0.8 seconds) : Fast forwards the for songs (files) song. • Pressing TUNE knob : Plays selected song (file).

4171 Features of your vehicle

MENU : USB Folder Random Information Press the USB mode MENU key to Press the MENU key Set [ F.RDM] Press the MENU key Set [ Info] 5 set the Repeat, Folder Random, through the TUNE knob or 2 RDM through the TUNE knob or Folder Repeat, All Random, key to randomly play songs within the key to display information of the cur- Information, and Copy features. rent song. current folder. ❈ ❈ Press the MENU key to turn off Press F.RDM again to turn off. info display.

Folder Repeat Press the MENU key Set [ F.RPT] through the TUNE knob or 3 key to repeat songs within the current folder. ❈ Repeat Press F.RPT again to turn off. Press the MENU key Set [ RPT] through the TUNE knob or 1 RPT All Random key to repeat the current song. Press the MENU key Set [ A.RDM] ❈ Press RPT again to turn off. through the TUNE knob or 4 key to randomly play all songs within the USB. ❈ Press A.RDM again to turn off.

4 172 Features of your vehicle

Copy MENU : iPod® Information Press the MENU key Set [ Copy] In iPod® mode, press the MENU key to Press the MENU key Set [ Info] through the TUNE knob or 6 set the Repeat, Random, Information through the TUNE knob or 3 key. and Search features. key. This is used to copy the current song Displays information of the current into My Music. You can play the song. copied Music in My Music mode. ❈ Press the MENU key to turn off ❈ If another key is pressed while info display. copying is in progress, a pop up asking you whether to cancel copying is displayed. Search ❈ If another media is connected or Press the MENU key Set [ Search] inserted (USB, iPod®, AUX) while Repeat through the TUNE knob or 4 copying is in progress, copying is key. Press the MENU key Set [ RPT] canceled. Displays iPod® category list. through the TUNE knob or 1 RPT ❈ Music will not be played while key to repeat the current song. ❈ Searching iPod® category is copying is in progress. MENU key pressed, move to par- ❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off. ent category.

Random Press the MENU key Set [ RDM] through the TUNE knob or 2 RDM key. Plays all songs within the currently playing category in random order. ❈ Press RDM again to turn off.

4173 Features of your vehicle

MENU : My Music Mode Random Delete Press the MENU key Set [ RDM] Press the MENU key Set [ Delete] through the TUNE knob or 4 In My Music mode, press the MENU through the TUNE knob or 2 RDM key to set the Repeat, Random, key. key. Information, Delete, Delete All, and Plays all songs in random order. • Deletes currently playing file Delete Selection features. ❈ Press RDM again to turn random off. In the play screen, pressing delete will delete the currently playing song. • Deletes file from list Information Press the MENU key Set [ Info] through the TUNE knob or 3 key. Displays information of the current Repeat song. Press the MENU key Set [ RPT] ❈ Press the MENU key to turn off through the TUNE knob or 1 RPT info display. key. ➀ Select the file you wish to delete Repeats the currently playing song. by using the TUNE knob. ➁ ❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off. Press the MENU key and select the delete menu to delete the selected file.

Delete All Press the MENU key Set [ Del.All] through the TUNE knob or 5 key. Deletes all songs of My Music.

4 174 Features of your vehicle

Delete Selection My Music AUX Press the MENU key Set [ Del.Sel] • Even if memory is available, a AUX is used to play external MEDIA through the TUNE knob or 6 maximum of 6,000 songs can be currently connected with the AUX key. stored. terminal. Songs within My Music are selected • The same song can be copied up AUX mode will automatically start and deleted. to 1,000 times. when an external device is connect- ➀ Select the songs you wish to • Memory info can be checked in the ed with the AUX terminal. delete from the list. System menu of Setup. If an external device is connected, you can also press the MEDIA key to change to AUX mode.

➁ After selecting, press MENU key and select the delete menu. ❈ AUX mode cannot be started unless there is an external device connected to the AUX terminal.

AUX Fully insert the AUX cable into the AUX terminal for use.

4175 Features of your vehicle

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology • The Bluetooth® word mark and logos • Bluetooth® Wireless Technology AUDIO (if equipped) are registered trademarks owned by audio can be used only when the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of [Audio Streaming] of Phone is such marks by Kia is under license. turned On . What is Bluetooth® Wireless Other trademarks and trade names ❈ Setting Bluetooth® Wireless Technology? are those of their respective owners. Technology Audio Streaming : ® Bluetooth® Wireless Technology A Bluetooth enabled cell phone is Press the SETUP key Select allows devices to be connected in a required to use Bluetooth® Wireless [Phone] Select [Audio Streaming] short distance, including hands-free Technology through the TUNE knob Set devices, stereo headsets, wireless On / Off remote controllers, etc. For more information, visit the Bluetooth® WARNING Wireless Technology website at Driving while distracted can www.Bluetooth.com result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, Before using Bluetooth® Wireless severe personal injury, and Technology audio features death. The driver’s primary ® responsibility is in the safe and • Bluetooth Wireless Technology legal operation of a vehicle, and audio may not be supported use of any handheld devices, depending on the compatibility of ® other equipment, or vehicle sys- your Bluetooth Wireless tems which take the driver’s Technology mobile phone. eyes, attention and focus away • In order to use Bluetooth® Wireless from the safe operation of a vehi- Technology audio, you must first cle or which are not permissible pair and connect the Bluetooth® by law should never be used dur- Wireless Technology mobile phone. ing operation of the vehicle.

4 176 Features of your vehicle

Starting Bluetooth® Wireless Using the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Technology audio features • Press the MEDIA key to change • Play / Stop the mode in order of USB➟AUX Press the TUNE knob to play and ➟My Music➟BT Audio. pause the current song. • If BT Audio is selected, Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio will start playing. ❈ Audio may not automatically start playing in some mobile phones.

❈ The title / artist info may not be supported in some mobile phone. When it is not supported, no title/no artist will be displayed. • Previous / Next song SEEK SEEK Press TRACK or TRACK to play previous or next song. ❈ The previous song / next song / play / pause functions may not be supported in some mobile phones.

4177 Features of your vehicle

PHONE(IF EQUIPPED) Making a call using the USB, iPod, My Music Modes Steering-wheel mounted controls - Briefly press the key: Move to Before using the Bluetooth® Wireless next or previous song. Technology phone features - Press and hold the key: Rewinds • In order to use Bluetooth® Wireless or fast-forwards the current song. Technology phone, you must first (4) button : Activates voice recog- pair and connect the Bluetooth® nition. Wireless Technology mobile phone. (5) button : Places and transfers • If the mobile phone is not paired or calls. connected, it is not possible to enter Phone mode. Once a phone (6) button : Ends calls or cancels is paired or connected, the guid- functions. ance screen will be displayed. • If Priority is set upon vehicle igni- (1)MODE button : Mode changes tion (IGN/ACC ON), the Bluetooth® each time the button pressed. Wireless Technology phone will be (2) VOLUME button : Raises or low- automatically connected. Even if ers speaker volume. you are outside, the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone will be (3) / button : automatically connected once you RADIO mode are in the vicinity of the vehicle. If - Briefly press the key: Move to you do not want automatic next or previous preset channel. Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone connection, set the - Press and hold the key: Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Automatically searches for power to OFF broadcast frequencies.

4 178 Features of your vehicle

• Check call history and making call Bluetooth® Wireless Technology ➀ Briefly press (under 0.8 seconds) WARNING the key on the steering Pairing a Bluetooth® Wireless Driving while distracted can remote controller. Technology Device(if result in a loss of vehicle control ➁ equipped) that may lead to an accident, The call history list will be dis- severe personal injury, and played on the screen. death. The driver’s primary ➂ Press the key again to con- What is Bluetooth® Wireless responsibility is in the safe and nect a call to the selected number. Technology Pairing? legal operation of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, Pairing refers to the process of syn- other equipment, or vehicle sys- ® • Redialing the most recently called chronizing your Bluetooth Wireless tems which take the driver’s number Technology phone or device with the eyes, attention and focus away ➀ Press and hold (over 0.8 seconds) car audio system for connection. from the safe operation of a vehi- the key on the steering Pairing is necessary to connect and cle or which are not permissible ® remote controller. use the Bluetooth Wireless by law should never be used dur- Technology feature. ➁ The most recently called number ing operation of the vehicle. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos is redialed. are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Kia is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. A Bluetooth® enabled cell phone is required to use Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

4179 Features of your vehicle

Pairing PHONE Key / Key 2.Select [OK] button to enter the Pair [Non SSP supported device] on the Steering Remote Phone screen. (SSP: Secure Simple Pairing) Controller 4.After a few moments, a screen is displayed where the passkey is entered. Enter the passkey “0000” When No Devices have been to pair your Bluetooth® Wireless Paired Technology device with the car 1.Press the PHONE key or the audio system. key on the steering remote controller. The following screen is displayed. 1)Car Name : Name of device as [SSP supported device] shown when searching from your ® 4.After a few moments, a screen is Bluetooth Wireless Technology displayed 6 digits passkey. device Check the passkey on your 2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair Bluetooth® Wireless Technology the device device and confirm.

3.From your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device (i.e. Mobile Phone), search and select your car audio system.

5.Once pairing is complete, the following screen is displayed.

4 180 Features of your vehicle

During the pairing process, make sure that all connection requests on the phone are accepted for phonebook download and to allow acceptance of all future connection requests. " and "Visit http://www.kia.com/us/#/bluetooth for additional information on pairing your Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone, and to view a phone compatibility list.

• If Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices are paired but none are currently connected, pressing the PHONE key or the key on the steering wheel displays the following screen. Select [Pair] button to pair a new device or select [Connect] to connect a previously paired device.

4181 Features of your vehicle

Pairing through [PHONE] • Bluetooth® Wireless Technology • Only Bluetooth® Wireless Setup features supported within the vehi- Technology Handsfree and cle are as follows. Some features Bluetooth audio related features may not be supported depending are supported. Press the SETUP key Select on your Bluetooth® Wireless • Bluetooth related operations are [Phone] Select [Pair Phone] Technology device. possible only within devices that Select TUNE knob - Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree support Handsfree or audio fea- calls tures, such as a Bluetooth® - Operations during a call (Switch Wireless Technology mobile phone to Private, Switch to call waiting, or a Bluetooth audio device. MIC on/off) • If a connected Bluetooth® Wireless - Downloading Call History Technology device becomes disconnected due to being out of - Downloading Mobile Contacts communication range, turning the 1. The following steps are the same - Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device OFF, or a Bluetooth® as those described in the section device auto connection Wireless Technology communica- "When No Devices have been - Bluetooth Audio Streaming tion error, corresponding ® Paired" on the previous page. • Up to five Bluetooth® Wireless Bluetooth Wireless Technology Technology devices can be paired devices are automatically to the Car Handsfree system. searched and reconnected. • Only one Bluetooth® device can be • If the system becomes unstable connected at a time. due to communication errors ® between the car Handsfree and the • Only one Bluetooth Wireless Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Technology device can be con- device, reset the device by turning nected at a time. off and back on again. Upon reset- • Other devices cannot be paired ting Bluetooth® Wireless while a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device, the system will Technology device is connected. be restored.

4 182 Features of your vehicle

• After pairing is complete, a con- Connecting a Device From the paired phone list, select the tacts download request is sent device you want to connect and once to the mobile phone. Some select [Connect]. mobile phones may require confir- Press the SETUP key Select mation upon receiving a download [Phone] Select [Phone List] request, ensure your mobile phone accepts the connection. Refer to your phones user’s manual for additional information regarding phone pairing and connections.

1) Connected Phone : Device that is currently connected 2) Paired Phone : Device that is paired but not connected

4183 Features of your vehicle

Changing Priority From the paired phone list, select • Priority icon will be displayed when the phone you want to switch to the the selected phone is set as a pri- highest priority, then select [Change ority phone. What is Priority? Priority] button from the Menu. The It is possible to pair up to five selected device will be changed to Bluetooth® Wireless Technology the highest priority. devices with the car audio system. The "Change Priority" feature is used to set the connection priority of paired phones.

Press the SETUP key Select [Phone] Select [Phone List]

4 184 Features of your vehicle

Disconnecting a Device Deleting a Device • When deleting the currently connected device, the device will automatically be disconnected to pro- Press the SETUP key Select Press the SETUP key Select ceed with the deleting process. [Phone] Select [Phone List] [Phone] Select [Phone List] • If a paired Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device is deleted, the device’s call history and contacts data will also be deleted. • To re-use a deleted device, you must pair the device again.

From the paired phone list, select the From the paired phone list, select the currently connected device and device you want to delete and select select [Disconnect] button. [Delete] button.

4185 Features of your vehicle

® • If you select the [Call History] but- Answering Calls USING Bluetooth Wireless ton but there is no call history data, Technology(if equipped) a prompt is displayed which asks to download call history data. Answering a Call Phone Menu Screen • If you select the [Contacts] button Answering a call with a Bluetooth® but there is no contacts data Wireless Technology device connect- stored, a prompt is displayed which ed will display the following screen. Phone Menus asks to download contacts data. To accept the call, press key on With a Bluetooth® Wireless • This feature may not be supported the steering wheel while the call is Technology device connected, press in some mobile phones. For more incoming. the PHONE key to display the Phone information on download support, menu screen. refer to your mobile phone user’s manual.

1) Caller : Displays the other caller's name when the incoming caller is 1) Favorite : Up to 20 frequently saved within your contacts used contacts saved for easy 2) Incoming Number : Displays the access. incoming number 2) Call History : Displays the call history list screen 3) Contacts : Displays the Contacts list screen 4) Setup : Displays Phone related settings.

4 186 Features of your vehicle

• When an incoming call pop-up is Favorites Call History displayed, most Audio and SETUP mode features are disabled. Only the call volume will operate. Press the PHONE key Select Press the PHONE key Select [Call • The telephone number may not be [Favorites] History] properly displayed in some mobile phones. • When a call is answered with the mobile phone, the call mode will automatically revert to Private mode. 1) Saved favorite contact : Connects A list of incoming, outgoing and call upon selection missed calls is displayed. 2) To add favorite : Downloaded con- • Call history may not be saved in the tacts be saved as favorite. call history list in some mobile phones. • To save Favorite, contacts should • Calls received with hidden caller ID be downloaded. will not be saved in the call history list. • Contact saved in Favorites will not be automatically updated if the • Calling through the call history is not contact has been updated in the possible when there is no call histo- phone. To update Favorites, delete ry stored or a Bluetooth® Wireless the Favorite and create a new Technology phone is not connected. Favorite. • Up to 50 received, dialed and missed calls are stored in Call History. • Time of received/dialed calls and call time information are not stored in Call History. 4187 Features of your vehicle

Contacts • Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your • It is not possible to begin down- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology loading a contact list when the con- phone can be downloaded into the tact download feature has been Press the PHONE key Select car contacts. Contacts that have turned off within the Bluetooth® [Contacts] been downloaded to the car cannot Wireless Technology device. In be edited or deleted on the phone. addition, some devices may • Mobile phone contacts are man- require device authorization upon aged separately for each paired attempting to download contacts. If Bluetooth® Wireless Technology downloading does not normally device (max 5 devices x 1,000 con- occur, check the Bluetooth® tacts each). Previously down- Wireless Technology device set- loaded data is maintained even if tings or the screen state. the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology • The contacts download feature The list of saved phone book entries device has been disconnected. may not be supported in some is displayed. (However, the contacts and call his- mobile phones. For more informa- tory saved to the phone will be delet- tion of supported Bluetooth® ed if a paired phone is deleted.) devices and function support, refer NOTE: • It is possible to download contacts to your phone’s user manual. Find a contact in an alphabetical during Bluetooth streaming audio. order, press the MENU key. • When downloading contacts, the icon will be displayed within the status bar.

4 188 Features of your vehicle

Bluetooth® Wireless Pairing a New Device Viewing Paired Phone List Technology Setting Press the SETUP key Select Press the SETUP key Select [Phone] Select [Pair Phone] [Phone] Select [Phone List]

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Kia is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. A Bluetooth® enabled cell phone is required to use Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices can be paired with the audio WARNING system. Driving while distracted can For more information, refer to the “Pairing through Phone Setup” sec- result in a loss of vehicle control ® that may lead to an accident, tion within Bluetooth Wireless severe personal injury, and Technology. This feature is used to view mobile death. The driver’s primary phones that have been paired with responsibility is in the safe and the audio system. Upon selecting a legal operation of a vehicle, and paired phone, the setup menu is dis- use of any handheld devices, played. other equipment, or vehicle sys- For more information, refer to the tems which take the driver’s “Setting Bluetooth® Wireless eyes, attention and focus away Technology Connection” section within from the safe operation of a vehi- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology. cle or which are not permissible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.

4189 Features of your vehicle

1) Connect/Disconnect Phone : Downloading Contacts Outgoing Volume Connect/ disconnects currently Press the SETUP key Select Press the SETUP key Select selected phone [Phone] Select [Contacts Download] [Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume] 2) Change Priority : Sets currently selected phone to highest connection priority 3) Delete : Deletes the currently selected phone 4) Return : Moves to the previous screen As the contacts are downloaded Use TUNE knob to adjust the out- • To learn more about whether your from the mobile phone, a download going volume level. mobile phone supports contacts progress bar is displayed. downloads, refer to your mobile phone user’s manual. • While on a call, the volume can be • Upon downloading phone con- SEEK • The contacts for only the connect- tacts, the previous corresponding changed by using the TRACK ed phone can be downloaded data is deleted. key. • This feature may not be supported in some mobile phones. • Voice Recognition may not operate while contacts are being downloaded.

4 190 Features of your vehicle

Turning Bluetooth System Off Press the SETUP key Select [Phone] Select [Bluetooth System Off] Once Bluetooth® Wireless Technology is turned off, Bluetooth® Wireless Technology related features will not be supported within the audio system.

• To turn Bluetooth® Wireless Technology back on, go to SETUP [Phone] and select “Yes”.

4191 Features of your vehicle

VOICE RECOGNITION If prompt feedback is in [ON], then Skipping Prompt Messages the system will say “Please say a While prompt message is being stat- Using Voice Recognition command after the beep (BEEP)” ed Shortly press the key on the • If prompt feedback is in [OFF] steering remote controller mode, then the system will only The prompt message is immediately Starting Voice Recognition say “(BEEP)” ended and the beep tone will sound. Shortly press the key on the • To change Prompt Feedback After the “beep”, say the voice com- steering wheel. Say a command [On]/[Off], go to SETUP [System] mand. [Prompt Feedback] • For proper recognition, say the Re-starting Voice Recognition command after the voice instruction and beep tone. While system waits for a command Shortly press the key on the steering remote controller The command wait state is immediately ended and the beep ton will sound. After the “beep”, say the voice command.

4 192 Features of your vehicle

ENDING VOICE Voice Recognition and Phone • Do not use acronyms (i.e., use RECOGNITION Contact Tips: “County Finance Department” instead of “CFD”). The Kia Voice Recognition System While Voice Recognition is operating may have difficulty understanding • If a name is not recognized from Press and hold the key on the some accents or uncommon the contact list, change it to a more descriptive name (e.g., use steering remote controller names. When using Voice “Grandpa Joseph” instead of “Pa Recognition to place a call, speak in Joe”). • While using voice command, a moderate tone, with clear pronun- pressing any steering wheel con- ciation trol or a different key will end voice To maximize the use of Voice command. Recognition, consider these guide- • When the system is waiting for a lines when storing contacts: voice command, say “cancel” or • Do not store single-name entries “end” to end voice command. (e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, etc.). Instead, • When the system is waiting for a always use full names (including voice command, press and hold first and last names) for these con- the key on the steering wheel tacts to end voice command. • Do not use special characters (e.g., '@', '-', '*', '&', etc.) • Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use "Lieutenant" instead of "Lt.") or acronyms (i.e., use "County Finance Department" instead of "C. F. D."; Be sure to say the name exactly as it is entered in the contacts list

4193 Features of your vehicle

Illustration on using voice commands More Help Here are some examples of mode commands. • Starting voice command. You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'. Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds): You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My Music', or 'iPod'. Please say a command after Additionally, there are phone commands like the beep (BEEP) Beep~ "Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number". You can find more detailed commands in the user's More Help manual. Please say a command after the beep. More Help Here are some examples of mode commands. You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'. • End voice command. You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My Briefly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds): Music', or 'iPod'. Additionally, there are phone commands like Please say a command after the beep (BEEP) "Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number". Contacts You can find more detailed commands in the user's manual. Please say a command after the beep. Contacts. Please say the name of the contact you want to call. • Skipping Prompt Messages Briefly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds): Cancel Please say a... while guidance message is being stated

Briefly pressing the (BEEP) Beep Beep.. (end beep) key (under 0.8 seconds) More Help

4 194 Features of your vehicle

Voice Command List • Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be available during certain operations) Command Function Command Function More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be Contacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying used anywhere in the system. this command, say the name of a contact Help Provides guidance on commands that can be saved in the Contacts to automatically con- used within the current mode. nect the call. Call Calls saved in Contacts Dial Number Display the Dial number screen. After saying Ex) Call “John Smith” this command, you can say the number that you want to call. Call Calls to the number that is saved as on Mobile "Mobile" in Contacts Redial Connects the most recently called number. Ex) Call "John Smith" on Mobile Tutorial Provide guidance on how to use voice Call Calls to the number that is saved as recognition and Bluetooth® connections in Office "Office" in Contacts • When listening to the radio, displays the next Ex) Call "John Smith" in Office radio screen. (FM1➟FM2➟AM➟SAT1➟ ➟ ➟ Call Calls to the number that is saved as SAT2 SAT3 FM1) at Home "Home" in Contacts Radio • When listening to a different mode, displays Ex) Call "John Smith" at Home the most recently played radio screen. Call Calls to the number that is saved as • When currently listening to the FM radio, on Other "Other" in Contacts maintains the current state. Ex) Call "John Smith" on Other • When listening to a different mode, displays Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com- the most recently played FM screen. mands. After saying this command, say FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen. “Favorites”,“Call History”, “Contacts” or ”Dial Number” execute corresponding functions. FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen. Favorites Display the Favorite screen. AM Displays the AM screen. Call History Displays the Call History screen.

4195 Features of your vehicle

Command Function Command Function FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast My Music Plays the music saved in My Music. saved in FM Preset 1~6. AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device. AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6. Bluetooth® Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth® FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding device. frequency. Please repeat Repeats the most recent comment. AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding Mute Mutes the sound. frequency. Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command. SiriusXMTM • When currently listening to the SiriusXMTM, (Satellite) maintains the current state. • When listening to a different mode, displays the most recently played SiriusXMTM screen. SiriusXMTM(Satellite) Displays the selected SiriusXMTM screen. 1~3 SiriusXMTM Channel Plays the selected SiriusXMTM channel. 0~223 Media Moves to the most recently played media screen. USB Plays USB music. iPod® Plays iPod® music.

4 196 Features of your vehicle

• FM/AM radio commands: Commands available during • Satellite radio commands: Commands that can be FM, AM radio operation. used while listening to Satellite Radio.

Command Function Command Function Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6. Channel 0~223 Plays the selected Satellite Radio channel. Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the current Scan Scans receivable channels from the current broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each. broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each. Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6. present and plays for 10 seconds each. Information Displays the information of the current broad- Information Displays the information of the current broadcast. cast.(This feature can be used when receiving RBDS broadcasts.)

4197 Features of your vehicle

• USB commands: Commands available during USB •iPod® Commands: Commands available during iPod® operation. operation.

Command Function Command Function Random Randomly plays the files within the current Random Randomly plays the songs within the current folder. category. Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential Random Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequen- order. tial order. Repeat Repeats the current file. Repeat Repeats the current song. Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen- order. tial order. Information Displays the information screen of the current file. Next Folder Play the first file in the next folder. Previous Folder Play the first file in the previous folder.

4 198 Features of your vehicle

• My Music Commands: Commands available during • Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Commands: My Music operation. Commands available during Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio streaming from mobile phone operation Command Operation. Command Function Random Randomly plays all saved files. Command Function Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential Play Plays the currently paused song. order. Pause Pauses the current song. Repeat Repeats the current file. Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential order. Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an additional confirmation process.

4199 Features of your vehicle

SiriusXM™ service requires a subscription, sold separately, after 3-month trial included with vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your SiriusXM™ service at the end of your trial subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at then-current rates until you call us at 1-866-635-2349 to cancel. See our Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com. Other fees and taxes apply. All fees and programming are subject to change. Sirius satellite service is available only to those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA, D.C., and PR (with coverage limitations). Our Internet radio service is available throughout our satellite service area and in AK and HI. Certain channels are not available on our Internet radio service or on mobile devices. SiriusXM Traffic available in select markets. See siriusxm.com/traffic for more information. © 2013 Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. iPod® is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. iPod® mobile digital device sold separately.The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Kia is under license. A Bluetooth® enabled cell phone is required to use Bluetooth® wireless technology. All rights reserved.

4 200 Features of your vehicle

■ AUDIO : AM1A0B2AN, AM1A0B2KN

PS34001N

4201 Features of your vehicle

4 202 Features of your vehicle

(10) MENU Displays menus for the current mode. ❈ iPod List : Move to parent category

4203 Features of your vehicle

4 204 Features of your vehicle

SETUP Mode Pop up [Mode Pop up] Changes On / Off selection mode Display Settings • During On state, press the RADIO or MEDIA key to display the mode Press the SETUP key Select [Display] change pop up screen. through TUNE knob or 1 key Select menu through TUNE knob Text Scroll [Text Scroll] Set On / Off • On : Maintains scroll • Off : Scrolls only one (1) time.

Media Display When playing an MP3 file, select the desired display info from ‘Folder/File’ or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.

4205 Features of your vehicle

SOUND SETTINGS Sound Settings This menu allows you to set the Speed Dependent Volume Control ‘Bass, Middle, Treble’ and the Sound This feature will gradually increase Press the SETUP key Select [Sound] Fader and Balance. the volume as speed increases to through TUNE knob or 2 key offset outside noise. Select menu through TUNE knob Select [Sound Settings] Select menu through TUNE knob Tur n Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Set TUNE knob left/right to set in 4 levels [Off/Low/Mid/High] of • Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the TUNE knob sound tone. • Fader, Balance : Moves the sound fader and balance. • Default : Restores default settings. ❈ Back : While adjusting values, pressing the TUNE knob will restore the parent menu. Voice Recognition Volume Adjusts voice recognition volume. Select [Voice Recognition Vol.] Set volume of TUNE knob

4 206 Features of your vehicle

CLOCK SETTINGS Sound Settings ❈ Adjust the number currently in This menu is used to set the time. focus to make the settings and press the tune knob to move to the SETUP Select [Clock Settings] Set through Press the CLOCK key Select [Clock] next setting. (Set in order of through TUNE knob or 3 key TUNE knob Press TUNE knob Year/Month/Day) Select menu through TUNE knob Time Format This function is used to set the 12/24 hour time format of the audio system. Select [Time Format] Set 12Hr / 24Hr through TUNE knob ❈ Adjust the number currently in focus to set the [hour] and press the tune knob to set the [minute]. Clock Display when Power is OFF Select [Clock Disp.(Pwr Off) Set Calendar Settings On / Off through TUNE knob This menu is used to set the date (MM/DD/YYYY). On : Displays time/date on screen Select [Calendar Settings] Set through Off : Turn off. TUNE knob Press TUNE knob

4207 Features of your vehicle

4 208 Features of your vehicle

4209 Features of your vehicle

MENU Within MENU key are the A.Store (Auto Store) and Info functions.

4 210 Features of your vehicle

4213 Features of your vehicle

❈ The USB music is automatically played when a USB is connected.

4 214 Features of your vehicle

4215 Features of your vehicle

4 216 Features of your vehicle

Copy MENU : iPod® Information Press the MENU key Set [ In iPod® mode, press the MENU key to Press the MENU key Set [ Info] Copy] through the TUNE knob set the Repeat, Random, Information through the TUNE knob or 3 or 6 key. and Search features. key. This is used to copy the current song Displays information of the current into My Music. You can play the song. copied Music in My Music mode. ❈ Press the MENU key to turn off ❈ If another key is pressed while info display. copying is in progress, a pop up asking you whether to cancel Search copying is displayed. Press the MENU key Set [ Search] ❈ If another media is connected or through the TUNE knob or 4 ® Repeat inserted (USB, iPod , AUX) while key. copying is in progress, copying is Press the MENU key Set [ RPT] Displays iPod® category list. canceled. through the TUNE knob or 1 RPT ❈ ® ❈ Music will not be played while key to repeat the current song. Searching iPod category is MENU key pressed, move to par- copying is in progress. ❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off. ent category.

Random Press the MENU key Set [ RDM] through the TUNE knob or 2 RDM key. Plays all songs within the currently playing category in random order. ❈ Press RDM again to turn off.

4217 Features of your vehicle

MENU : My Music Mode Random Delete Press the MENU key Set [ RDM] Press the MENU key Set [ Delete] MENU 4 In My Music mode, press the through the TUNE knob or 2 RDM through the TUNE knob or key to set the Repeat, Random, key. key. Information, Delete, Delete All, and Deletes currently playing file Delete Selection features. Plays all songs in random order. ❈ Press RDM again to turn random off. In the play screen, pressing delete will delete the currently playing song. Deletes file from list Information Press the MENU key Set [ Info] through the TUNE knob or 3 key. Displays information of the current song. Repeat ❈ Press the MENU key to turn off Press the MENU key Set [ RPT] info display. ➀ Select the file you wish to delete through the TUNE knob or 1 RPT key. by using the TUNE knob. ➁ Repeats the currently playing song. Press the MENU key and select the delete menu to delete the ❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off. selected file.

Delete All Press the MENU key Set [ Del.All] through the TUNE knob or 5 key. Deletes all songs of My Music.

4 218 Features of your vehicle

➁ After selecting, press MENU key and select the delete menu. ❈ AUX mode cannot be started unless there is an external device connected to the AUX terminal.

AUX Fully insert the AUX cable into the AUX terminal for use.

4219 Features of your vehicle

4 220 Features of your vehicle

4221 Features of your vehicle

4 222 Features of your vehicle

4223 Features of your vehicle

3.From your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device (i.e. Mobile Phone), search and select your car audio system.

5.Once pairing is complete, the following screen is displayed.

4 224 Features of your vehicle

During the pairing process, make sure that all connection requests on the phone are accepted for phonebook download and to allow acceptance of all future connection requests. " and "Visit http://www.kia.com/us/#/bluetooth for additional information on pairing your Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone, and to view a phone compatibility list.

4225 Features of your vehicle

4 226 Features of your vehicle

1) Connected Phone : Device that is currently connected 2) Paired Phone : Device that is paired but not connected

4227 Features of your vehicle

Press the SETUP key Select [Phone] Select [Phone List]

4 228 Features of your vehicle

From the paired phone list, select the From the paired phone list, select the currently connected device and device you want to delete and select select [Disconnect] button. [Delete] button.

4229 Features of your vehicle

4 230 Features of your vehicle

• When an incoming call pop-up is Favorites Call History displayed, most Audio and SETUP mode features are disabled. Only the call volume will operate. Press the PHONE key Select Press the PHONE key Select [Call • The telephone number may not be [Favorites] History] properly displayed in some mobile phones. • When a call is answered with the mobile phone, the call mode will automatically revert to Private mode. 1) Saved favorite contact : Connects A list of incoming, outgoing and call upon selection missed calls is displayed. 2) To add favorite : Downloaded con- • Call history may not be saved in the tacts be saved as favorite. call history list in some mobile phones. • To save Favorite, contacts should • Calls received with hidden caller ID be downloaded. will not be saved in the call history list. • Contact saved in Favorites will not be automatically updated if the • Calling through the call history is not contact has been updated in the possible when there is no call histo- phone. To update Favorites, delete ry stored or a Bluetooth® Wireless the Favorite and create a new Technology phone is not connected. Favorite. • Up to 20 received, dialed and missed calls are stored in Call History. • Time of received/dialed calls and call time information are not stored in Call History. 4231 Features of your vehicle

4 232 Features of your vehicle

Bluetooth® Wireless Pairing a New Device Viewing Paired Phone List Technology Setting Press the SETUP key Select Press the SETUP key Select [Phone] Select [Pair Phone] [Phone] Select [Phone List]

4233 Features of your vehicle

1) Connect/Disconnect Phone : Downloading Contacts Auto Download (Contacts) Connect/ disconnects currently Press the SETUP key Select Press the SETUP key Select selected phone [Phone] Select [Contacts Download] [Phone] Select [Auto Download] 2) Change Priority : Sets currently selected phone to highest connection priority 3) Delete : Deletes the currently selected phone 4) Return : Moves to the previous screen As the contacts are downloaded This feature is used to automatically • To learn more about whether your from the mobile phone, a download download mobile contacts entries mobile phone supports contacts progress bar is displayed. once a Bluetooth® Wireless downloads, refer to your mobile Technology phone is connected. phone user’s manual. • Upon downloading phone con- • The contacts for only the connect- tacts, the previous corresponding ✽ NOTICE ed phone can be downloaded data is deleted. • The Auto Download feature will • This feature may not be supported download mobile contacts entries in some mobile phones. every time the phone is connected. • Voice Recognition may not operate The download time may differ while contacts are being down- depending on the number of saved loaded. contacts entries and the communication state. • Before downloading contacts, first check to see that your mobile phone supports the contacts download feature.

4 234 Features of your vehicle

Audio Streaming Outgoing Volume Turning Bluetooth System Off Press the SETUP key Select Press the SETUP key Select Press the SETUP key Select [Phone] Select [Audio Streaming] [Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume] [Phone] Select [Bluetooth System Off] Once Bluetooth® Wireless Technology is turned off, Bluetooth® Wireless Technology related features will not be supported within the audio system.

When Audio Streaming is turned on, Use TUNE knob to adjust the out- you can play music files saved in going volume level. your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device through the audio system. • While on a call, the volume can be SEEK changed by using the TRACK key.

• To turn Bluetooth® Wireless Technology back on, go to SETUP [Phone] and select “Yes”.

4235 Features of your vehicle

4 236 Features of your vehicle

4237 Features of your vehicle

Illustration on using voice commands More Help Here are some examples of mode commands. • Starting voice command. You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'. Shortly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds): You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My Music', or 'iPod'. Please say a command after Additionally, there are phone commands like the beep (BEEP) Beep~ "Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number". You can find more detailed commands in the user's More Help manual. Please say a command after the beep. More Help Here are some examples of mode commands. You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'. • End voice command. You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My Briefly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds): Music', or 'iPod'. (BEEP) Additionally, there are phone commands like "Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number". Contacts You can find more detailed commands in the user's manual. Please say a command after the beep. Contacts. Please say the name of the contact you want to call. • Skipping Prompt Messages Briefly pressing the key (under 0.8 seconds): Cancel Please say a... while guidance message is being stated

Briefly pressing the (BEEP) Beep Beep.. (end beep) key (under 0.8 seconds) More Help

4 238 Features of your vehicle

Voice Command List • Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be available during certain operations) Command Function Command Function More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be • When listening to the radio, displays the next used anywhere in the system. radio screen. (FM1➟FM2➟AM➟SAT1➟ ➟ ➟ Help Provides guidance on commands that can be SAT2 SAT3 FM1) used within the current mode. Radio • When listening to a different mode, displays Call Calls saved in Contacts the most recently played radio screen. Ex) Call “John Smith” • When currently listening to the FM radio, Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com- maintains the current state. mands. After saying this command, say • When listening to a different mode, displays “Favorites”,“Call History”, “Contacts” or ”Dial the most recently played FM screen. Number” execute corresponding functions. FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen. Favorites Display the Favorite screen. FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen. Call History Displays the Call History screen. AM Displays the AM screen. Contacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast this command, say the name of a contact saved in FM Preset 1~6. saved in the Contacts to automatically connect the call. AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6. Dial Number Display the Dial number screen. After saying FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding this command, you can say the number that frequency. you want to call. AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding Redial Connects the most recently called number. frequency. TM TM Tutorial Provide guidance on how to use voice SiriusXM • When currently listening to the SiriusXM , (Satellite) recognition and Bluetooth® connections maintains the current state. • When listening to a different mode, displays the most recently played SiriusXMTM screen.

4239 Features of your vehicle

Command Function Command Function SiriusXMTM(Satellite) Displays the selected SiriusXMTM screen. My Music Plays the music saved in My Music. 1~3 AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device. SiriusXMTM Channel Plays the selected SiriusXMTM channel. Bluetooth® Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth® 0~223 device. Media Moves to the most recently played media Please repeat Repeats the most recent comment. screen. Mute Mutes the sound. USB Plays USB music. Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command. iPod® Plays iPod® music.

4 240 Features of your vehicle

• FM/AM radio commands: Commands available during • Satellite radio commands: Commands that can be FM, AM radio operation. used while listening to Satellite Radio.

4241 Features of your vehicle

• USB commands: Commands available during USB •iPod® Commands: Commands available during iPod® operation. operation.

4 242 Features of your vehicle

4243 Features of your vehicle

4 244 Driving your vehicle

Before driving ...... 5-4 • Hill-start assist control (HAC) ...... 5-34 • Before entering vehicle ...... 5-4 • Good braking practices...... 5-35 • Necessary inspections ...... 5-4 Cruise control system...... 5-37 • Before starting ...... 5-4 • Cruise control switch ...... 5-38 Key positions...... 5-6 • To set cruise control speed ...... 5-38 • Illuminated ignition switch ...... 5-6 • To increase cruise control set speed...... 5-39 • Ignition switch position...... 5-6 • To decrease the cruising speed...... 5-39 • Starting the engine ...... 5-7 • To temporarily accelerate with the cruise Engine start/stop button ...... 5-9 control on ...... 5-39 • Illuminated engine start/stop button ...... 5-9 • To cancel cruise control, do one of the following . . . 5-40 • Engine start/stop button position...... 5-9 • To resume cruising speed at more than • Starting the engine with a smart key ...... 5-11 approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) ...... 5-40 Manual transaxle ...... 5-14 • To turn cruise control off, do one of the following. . . 5-41 • Manual transaxle operation ...... 5-14 Active ECO system...... 5-42 5 • Good driving practices ...... 5-16 • Active ECO operation...... 5-42 Automatic transaxle ...... 5-17 • When Active ECO is activated...... 5-42 • Automatic transaxle operation...... 5-17 • Limitation of Active ECO operation ...... 5-42 • Good driving practices ...... 5-22 ISG (Idle Stop and Go) system ...... 5-43 Brake system...... 5-23 • Auto stop ...... 5-43 • Power brakes ...... 5-23 • Auto start ...... 5-44 • Parking brake - Hand type...... 5-25 • Condition of ISG system operation ...... 5-45 • Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ...... 5-27 • ISG system deactivation ...... 5-46 • Electronic stability control (ESC) ...... 5-29 • ISG system malfunction ...... 5-47 • Vehicle stability management (VSM) ...... 5-33 Economical operation ...... 5-48 Vehicle load limit ...... 5-59 Special driving conditions ...... 5-50 • Tire and loading information label ...... 5-59 • Hazardous driving conditions ...... 5-50 • Certification label ...... 5-63 • Reducing the risk of a rollover ...... 5-50 Vehicle weight glossary ...... 5-65 • Rocking the vehicle ...... 5-51 • Base curb weight ...... 5-65 • Smooth cornering ...... 5-52 • Vehicle curb weight ...... 5-65 • Driving at night ...... 5-52 • Cargo weight ...... 5-65 • Driving in the rain...... 5-53 • GAW (Gross axle weight) ...... 5-65 • Driving in flooded areas ...... 5-53 • GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)...... 5-65 • Driving off-road ...... 5-54 • GVW (Gross vehicle weight) ...... 5-65 • Highway driving ...... 5-54 • GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) ...... 5-65 Winter driving ...... 5-55 • Snowy or icy conditions ...... 5-55 5 • Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant ...... 5-57 • Check battery and cables ...... 5-57 • Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary ...... 5-57 • Check spark plugs and ignition system...... 5-57 • To keep locks from freezing ...... 5-57 • Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system ...... 5-57 • Don’t let your parking brake freeze ...... 5-58 • Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath . . . . 5-58 • Carry emergency equipment ...... 5-58 Trailer Towing ...... 5-58 Driving your vehicle

Be sure the exhaust system does not leak. WARNING - Open tailgate CALIFORNIA PROPO- The exhaust system should be Do not drive with the tailgate SITION 65 WARNING checked whenever the vehicle is open. Poisonous exhaust gases Engine exhaust and a wide vari- raised to change the oil or for any can enter the passenger com- ety of automobile components other purpose. If you hear a change partment If you must drive with and parts, including compo- the tailgate open proceed as fol- nents found in the interior fur- in the sound of the exhaust or if you lows: drive over something that strikes the nishings in a vehicle, contain or underneath side of the vehicle, have 1. Close all windows. emit chemicals known to the the exhaust system checked as soon 2. Open side vents. State of California to cause can- as possible by an authorized Kia 3. Set the air intake control at cer and birth defects and repro- dealer. "Fresh", the air flow control at ductive harm. In addition, cer- "Floor" or "Face" and the fan tain fluids contained in vehicles at the highest speed. and certain products of compo- WARNING - Engine nent wear contain or emit chem- exhaust icals known to the State of Do not inhale exhaust fumes or California to cause cancer and leave your engine running in a birth defects or other reproduc- enclosed area for a prolonged tive harm. time. Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.

53 Driving your vehicle

BEFORE DRIVING Before entering vehicle Necessary inspections Before starting • Be sure that all windows, outside Fluid levels, such as engine oil, • Close and lock all doors. mirror(s), and outside lights are engine coolant, brake fluid, and • Position the seat so that all con- clean. washer fluid should be checked on a trols are easily reached. • Check the condition of the tires. regular basis, at the exact interval depending on the fluid. Further • Buckle your seat belt. • Check under the vehicle for any details are provided in chapter 7, • Adjust the inside and outside sign of leaks. “Maintenance”. rearview mirrors. • Be sure there are no obstacles • Be sure that all lights work. behind you if you intend to back up. WARNING • Check all gauges. Driving while distracted can • Check the operation of warning result in a loss of vehicle con- lights when the ignition switch is trol, that may lead to an acci- turned to the ON position. dent, severe personal injury, • Release the parking brake and and death. The driver’s primary make sure the brake warning light responsibility is in the safe and goes out. legal operation of a vehicle, and For safe operation, be sure you are use of any handheld devices, familiar with your vehicle and its other equipment, or vehicle sys- equipment. tems which take the driver’s eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.

45 Driving your vehicle

WARNING - Fire risk WARNING - Loose WARNING - Driving while When you intend to park or stop objects intoxicated the vehicle with the engine on, Securely store items in your Do not drive while intoxicated. be careful not to depress the vehicle. When you make a sud- Drinking and driving is danger- accelerator pedal for a long den stop or turn the steering ous. Even a small amount of period of time. It may overheat wheel rapidly, loose objects alcohol will affect your reflexes, the engine or exhaust system may drop on the floor and it perceptions and judgment. and cause fire. could interfere with the opera- Driving while under the influ- tion of the foot pedals, possibly ence of drugs is as dangerous causing an accident. as or more dangerous than driv- WARNING - Check sur- ing drunk. roundings Always check the surrounding areas near your vehicle for people, especially children, before putting a vehicle into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).

55 Driving your vehicle

KEY POSITIONS (IF EQUIPPED) Illuminated ignition switch Ignition switch position ACC (Accessory) LOCK The steering wheel is unlocked and electrical accessories are operative. If difficulty is experienced turning the ignition switch to the ACC position, turn the key while turning the steering wheel right and left to release the tension.

OPS053001 Whenever a front door is opened, the OXM059029N ignition switch will illuminate for your The steering wheel locks to protect convenience, provided the ignition against theft (if equipped). The igni- switch is not in the ON position. The tion key can be removed only in the light will go off immediately when the LOCK position. ignition switch is turned on. It will also go off after about 30 seconds When turning the ignition switch to when the door is closed. the LOCK position, push the key inward at the ACC position and turn the key toward the LOCK position.

65 Driving your vehicle

ON The anti-theft steering column lock (if Starting the engine The warning lights can be checked equipped) is not a substitute for the before the engine is started. This is parking brake. Before leaving the driver’s seat, always make sure the shift WARNING - Proper the normal running position after the footwear engine is started. lever is engaged in 1st gear for the manual transaxle or P (Park) for Always wear appropriate shoes Do not leave the ignition switch ON if automatic transaxle, set the parking when operating your vehicle. the engine is not running to prevent brake fully and shut the engine off. Unsuitable shoes (high heels, battery discharge. Unexpected and sudden vehicle ski boots,etc.) may interfere movement may occur if these pre- with your ability to use the START cautions are not taken. brake and accelerator pedal. Turn the ignition switch to the START position to start the engine. The WARNING - Ignition 1.Make sure the parking brake is engine will crank until you release switch applied. the key; then it returns to the ON Never turn the ignition switch to 2.Manual Transaxle - Depress the position. The brake warning light can clutch pedal fully and shift the be checked in this position. LOCK or ACC while the vehicle is moving. This would result in transaxle into Neutral. Keep the loss of directional control and clutch pedal and brake pedal braking function, which could depressed while turning the igni- cause an accident. tion switch to the start position. Automatic Transaxle - Place the transaxle shift lever in P (Park). Depress the brake pedal fully. You can also start the engine when the shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position.

57 Driving your vehicle

3.Turn the ignition switch to START and hold it there until the engine CAUTION - Starter starts (a maximum of 10 seconds), If the engine stalls while you are then release the key. in motion, do not attempt to It should be started without move the shift lever to the P depressing the accelerator. (Park) position. If traffic and 4.Do not wait for the engine to warm road conditions permit, you may up while the vehicle remains sta- put the shift lever in the N tionary. (Neutral) position while the vehicle is still moving and turn Start driving at moderate engine the ignition switch to the START speeds. (Steep accelerating and position in an attempt to restart decelerating should be avoided.) the engine.

WARNING - Steering Do not engage the starter for more wheel than 10 seconds. If the engine stalls Never reach for any controls or fails to start, wait 5 to 10 seconds through the steering wheel before re-engaging the starter. while the vehicle is in motion. Improper use of the starter may The presence of your hand or damage it. arm in this area could cause a loss of vehicle control.

85 Driving your vehicle

ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED) Illuminated ENGINE ENGINE START/STOP button In an emergency situation while the START/STOP button position vehicle is in motion, you are able to turn the engine off and to the ACC OFF position by pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button for more than 2 seconds or 3 times successively within 3 seconds. If the vehicle is still moving, you can restart the engine Not illuminated without depressing the brake pedal • With manual transaxle by pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button with the shift To turn off the engine (START/RUN lever in the N (Neutral) position. position) or vehicle power (ON position), stop the vehicle then press the OPS053003 engine start/stop button. Whenever the front door is opened, the ENGINE START/STOP button • With automatic transaxle will illuminate for your convenience. To turn off the engine (START/RUN The light will go off after about 30 position) or vehicle power (ON posi- seconds when the door is closed. tion), press the ENGINE When all entrances are closed, if you START/STOP button with the shift lock the vehicle by using the trans- lever in the P (Park) position. When mitter or the smart key, the light will you press the ENGINE go off immediately. START/STOP button without the shift lever in the P (Park) position, the ENGINE START/STOP button will not change to the OFF position but to the ACC position.

59 Driving your vehicle

ACC(Accessory) ON START/RUN

Amber Redish orange Not illuminated • With manual transaxle • With manual transaxle • With manual transaxle Press the engine start/stop button Press the engine start/stop button To start the engine, depress the when the button is in the OFF posi- when the button is in the ACC posi- clutch pedal and brake pedal, then tion without depressing the clutch tion without depressing the clutch press the engine start/stop button pedal. pedal. with the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position. • With automatic transaxle • With automatic transaxle Press the ENGINE START/STOP Press the ENGINE START/STOP • With automatic transaxle button while it is in the OFF position button while it is in the ACC position To start the engine, depress the without depressing the brake pedal. without depressing the brake pedal. brake pedal and press the ENGINE If the ENGINE START/STOP button The warning lights can be checked START/ STOP button with the shift is in the ACC position for more than before the engine is started. Do not lever in the P (Park) or the N 1 hour, the button is turned off auto- leave the ENGINE START/STOP (Neutral) position. For your safety, matically to prevent battery dis- button in the ON position for a long start the engine with the shift lever in charge. time. The battery may discharge, the P (Park) position. because the engine is not running.

5 10 Driving your vehicle

If you press the ENGINE ✽ NOTICE Starting the engine with a START/STOP button without If you leave the ENGINE START/ smart key (if equipped) depressing the clutch pedal for man- STOP button in the ACC or ON 1.Carry the smart key or leave it ual transaxle vehicles or without position for a long time, the battery inside the vehicle. depressing the brake pedal for auto- will discharge. matic transaxle vehicles, the engine 2.Make sure the parking brake is will not start and the ENGINE firmly applied START/STOP button changes as fol- WARNING - Starting 3.Manual Transaxle - Depress the low: vehicle clutch pedal fully and shift the OFF ➔ ACC ➔ ON ➔ OFF or ACC Never press the ENGINE transaxle into Neutral. Keep the START/STOP button while the clutch pedal and brake pedal vehicle is in motion except in an depressed while starting the engine. emergency. If the engine stops Automatic transaxle - Place the while the vehicle is in motion, transaxle shift lever in P (Park). this would result in loss of Depress the brake pedal fully. directional control and braking You can also start the engine when function, which could cause an the shift lever is in the N (Neutral) accident. position.

511 Driving your vehicle

4.Press the ENGINE START/STOP • Even if the smart key is in the vehi- button while depressing the brake cle, if it is far away from you, the CAUTION - Starter pedal. engine may not start. If the engine stalls while the It should be started without • When the ENGINE START/STOP vehicle is in motion, do not depressing the accelerator. button is in the ACC position or attempt to move the shift lever 5.Do not wait for the engine to warm above, if any door is opened, the to the P (Park) position. If the up while the vehicle remains sta- system checks for the smart key. If traffic and road conditions per- tionary. the smart key is not in the vehicle, mit, you may put the shift lever a message "key is not in the vehi- in the N (Neutral) position while Start driving at moderate engine cle" will appear on the LCD display. the vehicle is still moving and speeds. (Steep accelerating and And if all doors are closed, the press the ENGINE START/STOP decelerating should be avoided.) chime will sound for 5 seconds. button in an attempt to restart The indicator or warning will turn the engine. off while the vehicle is moving. Always have the smart key with you.

5 12 Driving your vehicle

• When the stop lamp fuse is blown, WARNING - Unintended you can't start the engine normally. vehicle movement Replace the fuse with a new one. If Never leave the smart key in the it is not possible, you can start the vehicle with children or vehicle engine by pressing the ENGINE occupants who are unfamiliar START/STOP button for 10 sec- with the vehicle operation. onds while it is in the ACC posi- Pushing the ENGINE tion. The engine can start without START/STOP button while the depressing the brake pedal. But for smart key is in the vehicle may your safety always depress the result in unintended engine brake pedal before starting the activation and/or unintended OPS053007 engine. vehicle movement. • If the battery is weak or the smart Do not press the ENGINE START/ key does not work correctly, you STOP button for more than 10 sec- can start the engine by pressing onds except when the stop lamp fuse the engine start/stop button with is blown. the smart key. The side with the lock button should contact the engine start/stop button directly. When you press the engine start/stop button directly with the smart key, the smart key should contact the button at a right angle.

513 Driving your vehicle

MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED) Manual transaxle operation • Make sure the vehicle is complete- • The manual transaxle has 6 for- ly stopped before shifting into R ward gears. (Reverse). This shift pattern is imprinted on Never operate the engine with the the shift knob. The transaxle is fully tachometer (rpm) in the red zone. synchronized in all forward gears so shifting to either a higher or a CAUTION - Downshifting lower gear is easily accomplished. Do not downshift more than 2 • Press the clutch pedal down fully gears or downshift the gear while shifting, then release it slow- when the engine is running at ly. high speed (5,000 RPM or higher). Such a downshifting may The shift lever can be moved without If your vehicle is equipped with an pushing the ring (1). ignition lock switch, the engine will damage the engine. not start when starting the engine The ring (1) must be pushed while without depressing the clutch moving the shift lever. pedal. (if equipped) OJD053058 • The gearshift lever must be returned to the neutral position before shifting into R (Reverse). The ring (1) located immediately below the shift knob must be pulled upward while moving the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position. (if equipped)

5 14 Driving your vehicle

• During cold weather, shifting may Using the clutch be difficult until the transaxle lubri- WARNING - Incline parking The clutch should be pressed all the cant has warmed up. This is nor- Before leaving the driver’s seat, way to the floor before shifting, then mal and not harmful to the always set the parking brake fully released slowly. The clutch pedal transaxle. and shut the engine off. Then should always be fully released while • If you've come to a complete stop make sure the transaxle is shifted driving. Do not rest your foot on the and it's hard to shift into 1st or R into 1st gear when the vehicle is clutch pedal while driving. This can (Reverse), put the shift lever in N parked on a level or uphill grade, cause unnecessary wear. Do not (Neutral) position and release the and shifted into R (Reverse) on a partially engage the clutch to hold clutch. Press the clutch pedal back downhill grade. Unexpected and the vehicle on an incline. This causes down, and then shift into 1st or R sudden vehicle movement can unnecessary wear. Use the foot (Reverse) gear position. occur if these precautions are not brake or parking brake to hold the followed in the order identified. vehicle on an incline. Do not operate the clutch pedal rapidly and repeat- CAUTION edly. • To avoid premature clutch wear and damage, do not CAUTION drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal. Also, don’t When operating the clutch use the clutch to hold the pedal, depress the clutch pedal vehicle stopped on an uphill down fully. If you don’t depress grade, while waiting for a traf- the clutch pedal fully, the clutch fic light, etc. may be damaged or noise may occur. • Do not use the shift lever as a handrest during driving, as this can result in premature wear of the transaxle shift forks.

515 Driving your vehicle

Downshifting Good driving practices • Exercise extreme caution when When you must slow down in heavy • Never take the vehicle out of gear driving on a slippery surface. Be traffic or while driving up steep hills, and coast down a hill. This is especially careful when braking, downshift before the engine starts to extremely hazardous. Always leave accelerating or shifting gears. On a labor. Downshifting reduces the the vehicle in gear. slippery surface, an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the chance of stalling and gives better • Don't "ride" the brakes. This can acceleration when you again need to drive wheels to lose traction and cause them to overheat and mal- the vehicle to go out of control. increase your speed. When the vehi- function. Instead, when you are cle is traveling down steep hills, driving down a long hill, slow down • Always buckle-up! In a collision, an downshifting helps maintain safe and shift to a lower gear. When you unbelted occupant is significantly speed and prolongs brake life. do this, engine braking will help more likely to be seriously injured slow down the vehicle. or killed than a properly belted occupant. • Slow down before shifting to a lower gear. This will help avoid • Avoid high speeds when cornering over-revving the engine, which can or turning. High speed cornering cause damage. and turning increase the risk of vehicle rollover. Rollover accidents • Slow down when you encounter are violent and unpredictable. cross winds. This gives you much better control of your vehicle. • Never exceed posted speed limits. • Be sure the vehicle is completely stopped before you attempt to shift into reverse. The transaxle can be damaged if you do not. To shift into reverse, depress the clutch, move the shift lever to neutral, then shift to the reverse position.

5 16 Driving your vehicle

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED) Automatic transaxle operation + (UP) The automatic transaxle has 6 forward speeds and one reverse speed. The individual speeds are selected automatically, depending on the position of the shift lever.

✽ - (DOWN) NOTICE The first few shifts on a new vehicle, if the battery has been disconnected, may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and the shifting sequence will adjust after shifts are cycled a few times by the TCM (Transaxle Control Module) or PCM (Powertrain Control Module).

Depress the brake pedal and the lock release button when shifting. (If the shift lock system is not equipped, it is not necessary to depress the brake pedal. However, it is recommended to depress the brake pedal to avoid inadvertent movement of the vehicle.) Press the lock release button when shifting. The shift lever can be shifted freely. OPS053008

517 Driving your vehicle

For smooth operation, depress the Transaxle ranges brake pedal and the lock release but- CAUTION - Transaxle The indicator in the instrument clus- ton when shifting from N (Neutral) to To avoid damage to your ter displays the shift lever position a forward or reverse gear. transaxle, do not accelerate the when the ignition switch is in the ON engine in R (Reverse) or any for- position. ward gear position with the WARNING - Leaving the brakes on. The transaxle may be vehicle damaged if you shift into P P (Park) Before leaving the driver’s seat, (Park) while the vehicle is in Always come to a complete stop always make sure the shift lever motion. before shifting into P (Park). This is in the P (Park) position; then position locks the transaxle and preset the parking brake fully and vents the drive wheels from rotating. shut the engine off. Do not use When stopped on an incline, do not Shifting into P (Park) while the vehi- the P position in place of the hold the vehicle with the engine cle is in motion will cause the drive parking brake. Always make power. Use the service brake or the wheels to lock which will cause you sure the shift lever is latched in parking brake. to lose control of the vehicle. the P position and set the parking brake fully. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur if these precautions are not followed.

5 18 Driving your vehicle

R (Reverse) N (Neutral) Use this position to drive the vehicle The wheels and transaxle are not backward. engaged. The vehicle will roll freely even on the slightest incline unless + (UP) the parking brake or service brakes CAUTION - Shifting are applied. Always come to a complete stop before shifting into or out of R D (Drive) - (DOWN) (Reverse); you may damage the transaxle if you shift into R This is the normal forward driving (Reverse) while the vehicle is in position. The transaxle will automati- Sports mode motion, except when “Rocking cally shift through a 6-gear OPS053009 sequence, providing the best fuel the vehicle” explained in this Sports mode economy and power. section. Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion, sports mode is selected by For extra power when passing anoth- pushing the shift lever from the D er vehicle or climbing grades, (Drive) position into the manual gate. depress the accelerator fully, at To return to D (Drive) range opera- which time the transaxle will auto- tion, push the shift lever back into the matically downshift to the next lower main gate. gear.

519 Driving your vehicle

In sports mode, moving the shift • In sports mode, the driver must • To maintain the required levels of lever backwards and forwards will execute upshifts in accordance vehicle performance and safety, allow you to make gearshifts rapidly. with road conditions, taking care to the system may not execute cer- In contrast to a manual transaxle, the keep the engine speed below the tain gearshifts when the shift lever sports mode allows gearshifts with red zone. is operated. the accelerator pedal depressed. • In sports mode, only the 6 forward • When driving on a slippery road, Up (+) : Push the lever forward once gears can be selected. To reverse push the shift lever forward into the to shift up one gear. or park the vehicle, move the shift +(up) position. This causes the Down (-) :Pull the lever backwards lever to the R (Reverse) or P (Park) transaxle to shift into the 2nd gear once to shift down one position as required. which is better for smooth driving gear. • In sports mode, downshifts are on a slippery road. Push the shift made automatically when the vehi- lever to the -(down) side to shift cle slows down. When the vehicle back to the 1st gear. stops, 1st gear is automatically selected. • In sports mode, when the engine rpm approaches the red zone shift points are varied to upshift automatically.

5 20 Driving your vehicle

Shift lock system For your safety, the automatic WARNING - Shifting from transaxle has a shift lock system part which prevents shifting the transaxle Always fully depress the brake from P (Park) into R (Reverse) pedal before and while shifting unless the brake pedal is depressed. out of the P (Park) position into To shift the transaxle from P (Park) another position to avoid inad- into R (Reverse): vertent motion of the vehicle which could injure persons in 1.Depress and hold the brake pedal. or around the vehicle. 2.Start the engine or turn the ignition switch to the ON position. OPS053010 3.Move the shift lever. Shift-lock override If the brake pedal is repeatedly If the shift lever cannot be moved depressed and released with the from the P (Park) position into R shift lever in the P (Park) position, a (Reverse) position with the brake chattering noise near the shift lever pedal depressed, continue depress- may be heard. It is a normal condi- ing the brake, then do the following: tion. 1.Carefully remove the cap covering the shift-lock access hole (1). 2.Insert a screwdriver into the access hole and press down on the screwdriver. 3.Move the shift lever. 4.Have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer immediately.

521 Driving your vehicle

Ignition key interlock system Good driving practices Moving up a steep grade from a The ignition key cannot be removed • Never move the gear shift lever standing start unless the shift lever is in the P from P (Park) to any other position To move up a steep grade from a (Park) position. Even if the ignition with the accelerator pedal standing start, depress the brake switch is in the LOCK position, the depressed. pedal, shift the shift lever to D key also cannot be removed. • Never move the gear shift lever into (Drive). Select the appropriate gear If your vehicle is equipped with P (Park) when the vehicle is in depending on load weight and steep- ENGINE START/STOP button, the motion. ness of the grade, and release the parking brake. Depress the accelera- button will not change to the OFF • Slow down before shifting to a position unless the shift lever is in the tor gradually while releasing the lower gear. Otherwise, the lower service brakes. P (Park) position. gear may not be engaged. When accelerating from a stop on • Always use the parking brake. Do a steep hill, the vehicle may have a not depend on placing the tendency to roll backwards. transaxle in P (Park) to keep the Shifting the shift lever into 2 vehicle from moving. (Second Gear) will help prevent • Optimum vehicle performance and the vehicle from rolling back- economy is obtained by smoothly wards. depressing and releasing the accelerator pedal.

5 22 Driving your vehicle

BRAKE SYSTEM Power brakes Wet brakes may impair the vehicle’s - Brake Pedal Your vehicle has power-assisted WARNING ability to safely slow down; the vehi- brakes that adjust automatically Do not drive with your foot resting cle may also pull to one side when through normal usage. on the brake pedal. This will cre- the brakes are applied. Applying the ate abnormally high brake tem- brakes lightly will indicate whether In the event that the power-assisted peratures which can cause exces- they have been affected in this way. brakes lose power because of a sive brake lining and pad wear. Always test your brakes in this fash- stalled engine or some other reason, ion after driving through deep water. you can still stop your vehicle by To dry the brakes, apply them lightly applying greater force to the brake while maintaining a safe forward pedal than you normally would. The WARNING - Steep hill speed until brake performance stopping distance, however, will be braking returns to normal. longer. Avoid continuous application of When the engine is not running, the the brakes when descending a reserve brake power is partially long or steep hill by shifting to a depleted each time the brake pedal lower gear. Continuous brake is applied. Do not pump the brake application will cause the brakes pedal when the power assist has to overheat and could result in a been interrupted. temporary loss of braking per- Pump the brake pedal only when formance. necessary to maintain steering control on slippery surfaces.

523 Driving your vehicle

In the event of brake failure Disc brakes wear indicator If service brakes fail to operate while When your brake pads are worn and WARNING - Brake wear the vehicle is in motion, you can new pads are required, you will hear Avoid applying the parking make an emergency stop with the a high-pitched warning sound from brake to stop the vehicle while it parking brake. The stopping dis- your front brakes or rear brakes. You is moving except in an emer- tance, however, will be much greater may hear this sound come and go or gency situation. If you ignore than normal. it may occur whenever you depress this audible warning, you will the brake pedal. eventually lose braking per- Please remember that some driving formance, which could lead to a WARNING - Parking serious accident. brake conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when you first apply (or Applying the parking brake lightly apply) the brakes. This is nor- while the vehicle is moving at mal and does not indicate a problem normal speeds can cause a with your brakes. sudden loss of control of the vehicle. If you must use the Always replace the front or rear parking brake to stop the vehi- brake pads as pairs. cle, use great caution in applying the brake.

5 24 Driving your vehicle

Parking brake - Hand type Releasing the parking brake CAUTION - Parking brake Applying the parking brake Driving with the parking brake applied will cause excessive brake pad and brake rotor wear.

OPS053012 OPS053011 To release the parking brake, first apply the foot brake and pull up the To engage the parking brake, first parking brake lever slightly. Secondly apply the foot brake and then without press the release button (1) and pressing the release button in, pull lower the parking brake lever (2) the parking brake lever up as far as while holding the button. possible. In addition it is recommended that when parking the vehicle on a gradi- ent, the shift lever should be positioned in the appropriate low gear on manual transaxle vehicles or in the P (Park) position for automatic transaxle vehicles.

525 Driving your vehicle

If at all possible, cease driving the WARNING - Parking brake vehicle immediately. If that is not pos- use sible, use extreme caution while All vehicles should always have operating the vehicle and only con- the parking brake fully engaged tinue to drive the vehicle until you when parking to avoid inadver- can reach a safe location or repair tent movement of the vehicle shop. which can injure occupants or pedestrians.

W-75 Check the brake warning light by turning the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine). This light will be illuminated when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the START or ON position. Before driving, be sure the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off. If the brake warning light remains on after the parking brake is released while the engine is running, there may be a malfunction in the brake system. Immediate attention is necessary.

5 26 Driving your vehicle

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) The ABS continuously senses the ✽ NOTICE ABS (or ESC) will not prevent acci- speed of the wheels. If the wheels A click sound may be heard in the dents due to improper or dangerous are going to lock, the ABS system engine compartment when the vehi- driving maneuvers. Even though repeatedly modulates the hydraulic cle begins to move after the engine is vehicle control is improved during brake pressure to the wheels. started. These conditions are normal emergency braking, always maintain When you apply your brakes under and indicate that the anti-lock brake a safe distance between you and conditions which may lock the system is functioning properly. objects ahead. Vehicle speeds wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’ should always be reduced during sound from the brakes, or feel a cor- • Even with the anti-lock brake sys- extreme road conditions. The vehicle responding sensation in the brake tem, your vehicle still requires suf- should be driven at reduced speeds pedal. This is normal and it means ficient stopping distance. Always in the following circumstances: your ABS is active. maintain a safe distance from the • When driving on rough, gravel or In order to obtain the maximum ben- vehicle in front of you. snow-covered roads efit from your ABS in an emergency • Always slow down when cornering. • When driving with tire chains situation, do not attempt to modulate The anti-lock brake system cannot installed your brake pressure and do not try to prevent accidents resulting from pump your brakes. Press your brake excessive speeds. • When driving on roads where the pedal as hard as possible or as hard • On loose or uneven road surfaces, road surface is pitted or has differ- as the situation allows the ABS to ent surface heights. operation of the anti-lock brake control the force being delivered to system may result in a longer stop- Driving in these conditions increase the brakes. ping distance than for vehicles the stopping distance for your vehi- equipped with a conventional cle. brake system.

527 Driving your vehicle

• When you drive on a road having ✽ NOTICE poor traction, such as an icy road, and have operated your brakes When you jump start your vehicle continuously, the ABS will be active because of a drained battery, the continuously and the ABS warning engine may not run as smoothly and light may illuminate. Pull your vehi- the ABS warning light may turn on cle over to a safe place and stop at the same time. This happens the engine. because of low battery voltage. It does not mean your ABS has mal- • Restart the engine. If the ABS functioned. warning light goes off, then your • Do not pump your brakes! ABS system is normal. Otherwise, • Have the battery recharged before W-78 you may have a problem with the driving the vehicle. The ABS warning light will stay on for ABS. Contact an authorized Kia approximately 3 seconds after the dealer as soon as possible. ignition switch is ON. During that time, the ABS will go through self- diagnosis and the light will go off if everything is normal. If the light stays on, you may have a problem with your ABS. Contact an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.

5 28 Driving your vehicle

Electronic stability control Electronic stability control (ESC) will The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) (ESC) not prevent accidents. Excessive system is an electronic system speed in turns, abrupt maneuvers designed to help the driver maintain and hydroplaning on wet surfaces vehicle control under adverse condi- can still result in serious accidents. tions. It is not a substitute for safe driv- Only a safe and attentive driver can ing practices. Factors including speed, prevent accidents by avoiding road conditions and driver steering maneuvers that cause the vehicle to input can all affect whether ESC will be lose traction. Even with ESC effective in preventing a loss of control. installed, always follow all the normal It is still your responsibility to drive and precautions for driving - including corner at reasonable speeds and to driving at safe speeds for the condi- leave a sufficient margin of safety. tions. When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, OPS053013 you may hear a “tik-tik’’ sound from the The Electronic Stability control brakes, or feel a corresponding sensa- (ESC) system is designed to stabi- tion in the brake pedal. This is normal lize the vehicle during cornering and it means your ESC is active. maneuvers. ESC checks where you are steering and where the vehicle is ✽ NOTICE actually going. ESC applies the brakes on individual wheels and A click sound may be heard in the intervenes with the engine manage- engine compartment when the vehi- ment system to stabilize the vehicle. cle begins to move after the engine is started. These conditions are normal and indicate that the Electronic Stability Control System is functioning properly.

529 Driving your vehicle

ESC operation When operating ESC operation off ESC ON condition When the ESC is in opera- ESC OFF state • When the ignition is turned tion, the ESC indicator light This car has 2 kinds of ESC - ON, ESC and ESC OFF blinks. off states. indicator lights illuminate for • When the Electronic If the engine stops when approximately 3 seconds, Stability Control is operat- ESC is off, ESC remains off. then ESC is turned on. ing properly, you can feel a Upon restarting the engine, • Press the ESC OFF but- slight pulsation in the vehi- the ESC will automatically ton for at least half a sec- cle. This is only the effect turn on again. ond after turning the igni- of brake control and indi- tion ON to turn ESC off. cates nothing unusual. (ESC OFF indicator will • When moving out of the illuminate). To turn the mud or driving on a slip- ESC on, press the ESC pery road, pressing the OFF button (ESC OFF accelerator pedal may not indicator light will go off). cause the engine rpm • When starting the engine, (revolutions per minute) to you may hear a slight tick- increase. ing sound. This is the ESC performing an automatic system self-check and does not indicate a problem.

5 30 Driving your vehicle

Indicator light

■ ESC indicator light

■ ESC OFF indicator light

OPS053022 OPS053023 • ESC off state 1 • ESC off state 2 When ignition switch is turned to ON, To cancel ESC operation, press the To cancel ESC operation, press the the indicator light illuminates, then ESC OFF button (ESC OFF ) ESC OFF button (ESC OFF ) for goes off if the ESC system is operat- shortly (ESC OFF indicator light more than 3 seconds. ESC OFF indi- ing normally. (ESC OFF ) illuminates). At this cator light (ESC OFF ) illuminates state, the engine control function and ESC OFF warning chime will The ESC indicator light blinks when- does not operate. It means the trac- sound. At this state, the engine con- ever ESC is operating or illuminates tion control function does not oper- trol function and brake control func- when ESC fails to operate. ate. Brake control function only oper- tion do not operate. It means the car The ESC OFF indicator light comes ates. stability control function does not on when the ESC is turned off with If your vehicle is equipped with clus- operate any more. the button. ter type B, a message also will If your vehicle is equipped with clus- appear on the LCD display. ter type B, a message also will appear on the LCD display.

531 Driving your vehicle

ESC OFF usage ✽ NOTICE CAUTION When driving • When operating the vehicle on a Driving with varying tire or • ESC should be turned on for daily dynamometer, ensure that the wheel sizes may cause the ESC driving whenever possible. ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light system to malfunction. When • To turn ESC off while driving, press illuminated). If the ESC is left on, replacing tires, make sure they it may prevent the vehicle speed are the same size as your origi- the ESC OFF button while driving on a flat road surface. from increasing, and result in false nal tires. diagnosis. • Turning the ESC off does not WARNING - Operating affect ABS or brake system opera- WARNING - Electronic sta- ESC tion. bility control Never press the ESC OFF but- Drive carefully even though ton while ESC is operating (ESC your vehicle has Electronic indicator light blinks). Stability Control. It can only If ESC is turned off while ESC is assist you in maintaining con- operating, the vehicle may slip trol under certain circum- out of control. stances.

5 32 Driving your vehicle

Vehicle stability management The VSM does not operate when: Malfunction indicator (VSM) • Driving on bank road such as gra- The VSM can be deactivated even if This system provides further dient or incline you don’t cancel the VSM operation enhancements to vehicle stability • Driving in reverse by pressing the ESC OFF button. It indicates that a malfunction has and steering responses when a vehi- • ESC OFF indicator light ( ) been detected somewhere in the cle is driving on a slippery road or a remains on the instrument cluster vehicle detects changes in coeffi- Electric Power Steering system or cient of friction between right wheels • EPS indicator light remains on the VSM system. If the ESC indicator and left wheels when braking. instrument cluster light ( ) or EPS warning light remains on, take your vehicle to an VSM operation off authorized Kia dealer and have the VSM operation system checked. When the VSM is in operation, ESC If you press the ESC OFF button to indicator light ( ) blinks. turn off the ESC, the VSM will also cancel and the ESC OFF indicator ✽ NOTICE When the vehicle stability manage- light ( ) illuminates. • The VSM is designed to function ment is operating properly, you can To turn on the VSM, press the button above approximately 13 mph (22 feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle km/h) on curves. and/or abnormal steering responses again. The ESC OFF indicator light goes out. • The VSM is designed to function (EPS). This is only the effect of brake above approximately 6 mph (10 and EPS control and indicates noth- km/h) when a vehicle is braking on ing unusual. a split-mu road. The split-mu road is made of surfaces which have different friction forces.

533 Driving your vehicle

• The Vehicle Stability Management Hill-start assist control (HAC) - Maintaining system is not a substitute for safe A vehicle has the tendency to roll WARNING driving practices but a supplemen- back on a steep hill when it starts to Brake Pressure on Incline tary function only. It is the respon- go after stopping. The Hill-start HAC does not replace the need sibility of the driver to always check Assist Control (HAC) prevents the to apply brakes while stopped the speed and the distance to the vehicle from rolling back by applying on an incline. While stopped, vehicle ahead. Always hold the the brakes automatically for about 2 make sure you maintain brake steering wheel firmly while driving. seconds. The brakes are released pressure sufficient to prevent • Your vehicle is designed to activate when the accelerator pedal is your vehicle from rolling back- according to the driver’s intention, depressed or after about 2 seconds. ward and causing an accident. even with installed VSM. Always The HAC is activated only for about 2 Don’t release the brake pedal follow all the normal precautions seconds, so when the vehicle is until you are ready to accelerate for driving at safe speeds for the starting off always depress the accel- forward. conditions – including driving in erator pedal. clement weather and on a slippery road.

5 34 Driving your vehicle

Good braking practices • Don't coast down hills with the • If your vehicle is equipped with an • Check to be sure the parking brake vehicle out of gear. This is extreme- automatic transaxle, don't let your is not engaged and the parking ly hazardous. Keep the vehicle in vehicle creep forward. To avoid brake indicator light is out before gear at all times, use the brakes to creeping forward, keep your foot driving away. slow down, then shift to a lower firmly on the brake pedal when the gear so that engine braking will vehicle is stopped. • Driving through water may get the help you maintain a safe speed. brakes wet. They can also get wet • Be cautious when parking on a hill. when the vehicle is washed. Wet • Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Firmly engage the parking brake brakes can be dangerous! Your Resting your foot on the brake and place the shift lever in P (auto- vehicle will not stop as quickly if the pedal while driving can be danger- matic transaxle) or in first or brakes are wet. Wet brakes may ous because the brakes might reverse gear (manual transaxle). If cause the vehicle to pull to one overheat and lose their effective- your vehicle is facing downhill, turn side. ness. It also increases the wear of the front wheels into the curb to the brake components. help keep the vehicle from rolling. If To dry the brakes, apply the brakes your vehicle is facing uphill, turn lightly until the braking action • If a tire goes flat while you are driving, apply the brakes gently and the front wheels away from the returns to normal, taking care to curb to help keep the vehicle from keep the vehicle under control at keep the vehicle pointed straight ahead while you slow down. When rolling. If there is no curb or if it is all times. If the braking action does required by other conditions to not return to normal, stop as soon you are moving slowly enough for it to be safe to do so, pull off the road keep the vehicle from rolling, block as it is safe to do so and call an the wheels. authorized Kia dealer for assis- and stop in a safe place. tance.

535 Driving your vehicle

• Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the parking brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you put the shift lever in P (automatic transaxle) or in first or reverse gear (manual transaxle) and block the rear wheels so the vehicle cannot roll. Then release the parking brake. • Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade with the accelerator pedal.This can cause the transaxle to overheat. Always use the brake pedal or parking brake.

5 36 Driving your vehicle

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) • If the cruise control is left on (CRUISE indicator light in the WARNING - Misuse of instrument cluster illuminated), the Cruise Control cruise control can be switched on Do not use cruise control if the accidentally. Keep the cruise con- traffic situation does not allow trol system off (CRUISE indicator you to drive safely at a constant light OFF) when the cruise control speed and with sufficient dis- is not in use, to avoid inadvertently tance to the vehicle in front. setting a speed. • Use the cruise control system only when traveling on open highways ✽ NOTICE OPS053015 in good weather. • During normal cruise control opera- 1. Cruise indicator • Do not use the cruise control driv- tion, when the SET switch is activat- 2. Cruise set indicator ing in heavy or varying traffic, or on ed or reactivated after applying the slippery (rainy, icy or snow-cov- brakes, the cruise control will ener- ered) or winding roads or over 6% gize after approximately 3 seconds. The cruise control system allows you up-hill or down-hill roads. The delay is normal. to program the vehicle to maintain a • To activate cruise control, depress constant speed without pressing the the brake pedal at least once after accelerator pedal. turning the ignition switch to the ON This system is designed to function position or starting the engine. This above approximately 20 mph (30 is to check if the brake switch which km/h). is important part to cancel cruise control is in normal condition.

537 Driving your vehicle

Cruise control switch To set cruise control speed:

OPS053018

OPS053016 OPS053017 3. Push the SET - switch, and release it at the desired speed. CRUISE :Turns cruise control sys- 1. Press the CRUISE button on the The SET indicator light in the tem on or off. steering wheel to turn the system instrument cluster will illuminate. CANCEL: Cancels cruise control on. The CRUISE indicator light in Release the accelerator pedal at operation. the instrument cluster will illumi- the same time. The desired speed nate. RES+: Resumes or increases cruise will automatically be maintained. control speed. 2. Accelerate to the desired speed, On a steep grade, the vehicle may which must be more than 20 mph slow down or speed up slightly while SET-: Sets or decreases cruise con- (30 km/h). trol speed. going uphill or downhill. ✽ NOTICE - Manual transaxle For manual transaxle vehicles, you should depress the brake pedal at least once to set the cruise control after starting the engine.

5 38 Driving your vehicle

To increase cruise control set To decrease the cruising To temporarily accelerate with speed: speed: the cruise control on: If you want to speed up temporarily when the cruise control is on, depress the accelerator pedal. Increased speed will not interfere with cruise control operation or change the set speed. To return to the set speed, take your foot off the accelerator.

OPS053019 OPS053018 Follow either of these procedures: Follow either of these procedures: • Push the RES + switch and hold it. • Push the SET - switch and hold it. Your vehicle will accelerate. Your vehicle will gradually slow Release the lever at the speed you down. Release the lever at the want. speed you want to maintain. • Push the RES + switch and • Push the SET - switch and release release it immediately. it immediately. The cruising speed will increase by The cruising speed will decrease 1 mph (or 2km/h) each time you by 1 mph (2 km/h) each time you move the lever up (to RES+) in this move the lever down (to SET-) in manner. this manner.

539 Driving your vehicle

To cancel cruise control, do Each of these actions will cancel To resume cruising speed at one of the following: cruise control operation (the SET more than approximately 20 indicator light in the instrument clus- mph (30 km/h): ter will go off), but it will not turn the system off. If you wish to resume cruise control operation, push the RES + switch located on your steering wheel. You will return to your previously preset speed.

OPS053020 • Press the brake pedal. OPS053019 • Depress the clutch pedal if If any method other than the equipped with a manual transaxle. CRUISE button was used to cancel cruising speed and the system is still • Shift into N (Neutral) with an auto- activated, the most recent set speed matic transaxle. will automatically resume when the • Push the CANCEL switch located RES+ switch is pushed. on the steering wheel. It will not resume, however, if the • Decrease the vehicle speed lower vehicle speed has dropped below than the memory speed by approx- approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). imately 12mph(20km/h). • Decrease the vehicle speed to less than approximately 15 mph (25 km/h).

5 40 Driving your vehicle

To turn cruise control off, do one of the following:

OPS053017 • Press the CRUISE button (the CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster will go off). • Turn the ignition off. Both of these actions cancel cruise control operation. If you want to resume cruise control operation, repeat the steps provided in “To set cruise control speed” on the previous page.

541 Driving your vehicle

ACTIVE ECO SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) Active ECO operation • When the Active ECO is activated, Limitation of Active ECO oper- it will remain on until the Active ation: ECO button is pressed again. If the following conditions occur while Active ECO does not turn off when Active ECO is operating, the system the engine is restarted. To turn off operation is limited even though Active ECO, press the Active ECO there is no change in the ECO indi- button again. cator. • If Active ECO is turned off, the sys- • When the coolant temperature is tem will return to normal mode. low: The system will be limited until engine performance becomes nor- When Active ECO is activated: mal. • The acceleration may slightly be • When driving up a hill: The system OPS053030 reduced eventhough you depress will be limited to gain power when Active ECO helps improve fuel effi- the accelerator fully. driving uphill because the engine torque is restricted. ciency by controlling certain engine • The air conditioner performance and transaxle system operating may be limited. • When using sports mode: The sys- parameters. Fuel efficiency depends tem will be limited according to the • The shift pattern of the automatic on the driver's driving habit and road shift location. transaxle may change. condition. • When the accelerator pedal is • The engine noise may get louder. • When the Active ECO button is deeply depressed for a few sec- pressed the ECO indicator (green) onds: The system will be limited, will illuminate to show that the The above situations are normal judging that the driver wants to Active ECO is operating. conditions when the active eco sys- speed up. tem is activated to improve fuel efficiency.

5 42 Driving your vehicle

ISG (IDLE STOP AND GO) SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) Your vehicle may be equipped with Auto stop You must reach a speed of at least the ISG system, which reduces fuel 5 mph (8 km/h) since last idle stop. To stop the engine in idle stop consumption by automatically shut- mode The engine will stop and the green ting down the engine, when the vehi- AUTO STOP indicator ( ) on the cle is at a standstill. (For example : ■ Type A instrument cluster will illuminate. red light, stop sign and traffic jam) The engine starts automatically as soon as the starting conditions are met. The ISG system is ON whenever the engine is running.

✽ NOTICE OPS053028 When the engine automatically ■ Type B starts by the ISG system, some warning lights (ABS, ESC, ESC OFF, EPS or Parking brake warning light) may turn on for a few seconds. This happens because of low battery voltage. It does not mean the system is malfunctioning.

OPS053029 Stop the vehicle completely by pressing the brake pedal.

543 Driving your vehicle

Auto start To restart the engine from idle stop mode • Release the brake pedal. or • Move the shift gear to the R (Reverse) position or the sports mode while depressing the brake pedal. OPS053014 The engine will start and the green OTF054124 AUTO STOP indicator ( ) on the If your vehicle is equipped with clus- instrument cluster will go out. ter type B, a message "Auto Stop" also will appear on the LCD display.

OPS053024 If you open the engine hood in auto stop mode, the ISG system will deactivate (the light on the ISG OFF button will illuminate). A message "Auto Stop Deactivated Start Manually" will appear on the LCD display. (if equipped) Turn the engine on manually.

5 44 Driving your vehicle

The engine will also restart auto- Condition of ISG system oper- matically without the driver’s any ation actions if the following occurs: The ISG system will operate - When a certain amount of time has under the following condition: passed with the climate control sys- - The driver’s seat belt is fastened. tem on. - The driver’s door and engine hood - When the front defroster is on. are closed. - The brake vaccum pressure is low. - The brake vaccum pressure is ade- - The battery charging status is low. quate. - The vehicle speed exceeds 1 MPH - The battery is sufficiently charged. (1 km/h). OPS053025 - The outside temperature is more - The fan speed is in the highest The green AUTO STOP indicator than 28.4°F (-2°C). position when the air conditioning is ( ) on the instrument cluster will - The outside temperature is under on. blink for 5 seconds and a message 89.6°F (32°C). - Engine is turned off by Auto Stop “Auto Start” will appear on the LCD - The engine coolant temperature is for a long time. display (if equipped). not low. - If you unfasten the seat belt or open the driver's door while depressing the brake pedal.

545 Driving your vehicle

ISG system deactivation • If you press the ISG OFF button again, the system will be activated and the light on the ISG OFF button will turn off.

OPS053026 OPS053014 • If the ISG system does not meet the operation condition, the ISG system is deactivated. The light on the ISG OFF button will illuminate and a message “Auto Stop Conditions not met” will appear on the LCD display (if equipped). • If the light or notice comes on continuously, please check the operation condition. OPS053027 • If you want to deactivate the ISG system, press the ISG OFF button. The light on the ISG OFF button will illuminate and a message “Auto Stop off” will appear on the LCD display (if equipped).

5 46 Driving your vehicle

ISG system malfunction • If the ISG OFF button light is not turned off by pressing the ISG OFF WARNING - Engine The system may not operate button again or if the ISG system repair when: continuously does not work cor- Turn the ignition switch to the rectly, please contact an author- LOCK (OFF) position or remove ized Kia dealer as soon as possi- the key from the ignition com- ble. pletely before performing work on the vehicle in the engine area. Failure to do so could result in serious injuries due to sudden engine reactivation.

✽ NOTICE If the AGM battery is reconnected OPS053014 or replaced, ISG function will not • If the ISG related sensors or sys- operate immediately. tem error occurs, the yellow AUTO If you want to use the ISG function, STOP indicator ( ) on the instru- the battery sensor needs to be cali- ment cluster will stay on after blink- brated for approximately 4 hours ing for 5 seconds and the light on with the ignition off and then, turn the ISG OFF button will illuminate. the engine on and off 2 or 3 times.

547 Driving your vehicle

ECONOMICAL OPERATION Your vehicle's fuel economy depends • Don't "ride" the brake or clutch • Keep your vehicle in good condi- mainly on your style of driving, where pedal. This can increase fuel con- tion. For better fuel economy and you drive and when you drive. sumption and also increase wear reduced maintenance costs, main- Each of these factors affects how on these components. In addition, tain your vehicle in accordance many miles (kilometers) you can get driving with your foot resting on the with the maintenance schedule in from a gallon (liter) of fuel. To operate brake pedal may cause the brakes section 7. If you drive your vehicle your vehicle as economically as pos- to overheat, which reduces their in severe conditions, more frequent sible, use the following driving sug- effectiveness and may lead to maintenance is required (see sec- gestions to help save money in both more serious consequences. tion 7 for details). fuel and repairs: • Take care of your tires. Keep them • Keep your vehicle clean. For maxi- • Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a inflated to the recommended pres- mum service, your vehicle should moderate rate. Don't make "jack- sure. Incorrect inflation, either too be kept clean and free of corrosive rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts much or too little, results in unnec- materials. It is especially important and maintain a steady cruising essary tire wear. Check the tire that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be speed. Don't race between stop- pressures at least once a month. allowed to accumulate on the lights. Try to adjust your speed to • Be sure that the wheels are underside of the vehicle. This extra the traffic so you don't have to aligned correctly. Improper align- weight can result in increased fuel change speeds unnecessarily. ment can result from hitting curbs consumption and also contribute to Avoid heavy traffic whenever pos- or driving too fast over irregular corrosion. sible. Always maintain a safe dis- surfaces. Poor alignment causes • Travel lightly. Don't carry unneces- tance from other vehicles so you faster tire wear and may also result sary weight in your vehicle. Weight can avoid unnecessary braking. in other problems as well as reduces fuel economy. This also reduces brake wear. greater fuel consumption. • Don't let the engine idle longer • Drive at a moderate speed. The than necessary. If you are waiting faster you drive, the more fuel your (and not in traffic), turn off your vehicle uses. Driving at a moderate engine and restart only when speed, especially on the highway, you're ready to go. is one of the most effective ways to reduce fuel consumption.

5 48 Driving your vehicle

• Remember, your vehicle does not • Use your air conditioning sparingly. require extended warm-up. After The air conditioning system is WARNING the engine has started, allow the operated by engine power so your - Engine off during motion engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds fuel economy is reduced when you Never turn the engine off to prior to placing the vehicle in gear. use it. coast down hills or anytime the In very cold weather, however, give • Open windows at high speeds can vehicle is in motion. The power your engine a slightly longer warm- reduce fuel economy. steering and power brakes will up period. • Fuel economy is less in crosswinds not function properly without • Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine. and headwinds. To help offset the engine running. In addition, Lugging is driving too slowly in a some of this loss, slow down when turning off the ignition while very high gear resulting in engine driving in these conditions. driving could engage the steer- bucking. If this happens, shift to a ing wheel lock resulting in loss lower gear. Over-revving is racing of vehicle steering. Keep the the engine beyond its safe limit. Keeping a vehicle in good operating engine on and downshift to an This can be avoided by shifting at condition is important both for econ- appropriate gear for engine the recommended speed. omy and safety. Therefore, have an braking effect. authorized Kia dealer perform scheduled inspections and maintenance.

549 Driving your vehicle

SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS Hazardous driving conditions • If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, Reducing the risk of a rollover When hazardous driving conditions use second gear. Accelerate slow- This multi-purpose passenger vehi- are encountered such as water, ly to avoid spinning the drive cle is defined as a Crossover Utility snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar haz- wheels. Vehicle (CUV). CUV’s have higher ards, follow these suggestions: • Use sand, rock salt, or other non- ground clearance and a narrower • Drive cautiously and allow extra slip material under the drive track to make them capable of per- distance for braking. wheels to provide traction when forming in a wide variety of off-road stalled in ice, snow, or mud. applications. Specific design charac- • Avoid sudden braking or steering. teristics give them a higher center of • When braking with non-ABS gravity than ordinary vehicles. An brakes pump the brake pedal with WARNING - Downshifting advantage of the higher ground a light up-and-down motion until Do not downshift with an auto- clearance is a better view of the the vehicle is stopped. matic transaxle while driving on road, which allows you to anticipate Do not pump the brake pedal on a slippery surfaces. The sudden problems. They are not designed for vehicle equipped with ABS. change in tire speed could cornering at the same speeds as cause the tires to skid and conventional passenger vehicles, result in an accident. any more than low-slung sports vehicles are designed to perform satis- factorily in off-road conditions. Due to this risk, driver and passengers are strongly recommended to buckle their seat belts. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. There are steps that a driver can make to reduce the risk of a rollover.

5 50 Driving your vehicle

If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or Rocking the vehicle CAUTION - Vehicle rocking abrupt maneuvers, do not load your If it is necessary to rock the vehicle roof rack with heavy cargo, and to free it from snow, sand, or mud, Prolonged rocking may cause never modify your vehicle in any way. first turn the steering wheel right and engine overheating, transaxle left to clear the area around your damage or failure, and tire damage. WARNING - Replacement front wheels. Then, shift back and tires forth between 1st (First) and R (Reverse) in vehicles equipped with Always use the size and type of a manual transaxle or R (Reverse) CAUTION - Spinning tires tires recommended in the tire and any forward gear in vehicles Do not spin the wheels, espe- section of the manual. equipped with an automatic Installation of variant tires can cially at speeds more than 35 transaxle. Do not race the engine, mph (56 km/h). Spinning the affect the safety and perform- and spin the wheels as little as pos- ance of your vehicle. wheels at high speeds when the sible. If you are still stuck after a few vehicle is stationary could tries, have the vehicle pulled out by a cause a tire to overheat which tow vehicle to avoid engine overheat- could result in tire damage that ing and possible damage to the may injure bystanders. transaxle.

The ESC system should be turned OFF prior to rocking the vehicle.

551 Driving your vehicle

Smooth cornering Driving at night • Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare from other driver's headlights. • Keep your headlights clean and properly aimed. (On vehicles not equipped with the automatic headlight aiming feature.) Dirty or improperly aimed headlights will make it much more difficult to see at night. • Avoid staring directly at the headlights of oncoming vehicles. You could be temporarily blinded, and it OUN056051 OCM053010 will take several seconds for your Avoid braking or gear changing in Because night driving presents more eyes to readjust to the darkness. corners, especially when roads are hazards than driving in the daylight, wet. Ideally, corners should always here are some important tips to be taken under gentle acceleration. If remember: you follow these suggestions, tire • Slow down and keep more dis- wear will be held to a minimum. tance between you and other vehicles, as it may be more difficult to see at night, especially in areas where there may not be any street lights.

5 52 Driving your vehicle

Driving in the rain • A heavy rainfall will make it harder Driving in flooded areas to see and will increase the dis- Avoid driving through flooded areas tance needed to stop your vehicle, unless you are sure the water is no so slow down. higher than the bottom of the wheel • Keep your windshield wiping hub. Drive through any water slowly. equipment in good shape. Replace Allow adequate stopping distance your windshield wiper blades when because brake performance may be they show signs of streaking or affected. missing areas on the windshield. After driving through water, dry the • If your tires are not in good condi- brakes by gently applying them sev- tion, making a quick stop on wet eral times while the vehicle is moving pavement can cause a skid and slowly. possibly lead to an accident. Be 1VQA3003 sure your tires are in good shape. Rain and wet roads can make driving • Turn on your headlights to make it dangerous, especially if you’re not easier for others to see you. prepared for the slick pavement. Here are a few things to consider • Driving too fast through large pud- when driving in the rain: dles can affect your brakes. If you must go through puddles, try to drive through them slowly. • If you believe you may have gotten your brakes wet, apply them lightly while driving until normal braking operation returns.

553 Driving your vehicle

Driving off-road Fuel, engine coolant and engine - Under/over Drive carefully off-road because your WARNING oil vehicle may be damaged by rocks or inflated tires High speed travel consumes more roots of trees. Become familiar with Always check the tires for proper fuel than urban motoring. Do not for- the off-road conditions where you inflation before driving. get to check both the engine coolant are going to drive before you begin Underinflated or overinflated and engine oil. driving. tires can cause poor handling, loss of vehicle control, and sudden tire failure leading to acci- Drive belt Highway driving dents, injuries, and even death. A loose or damaged drive belt may Tires For proper tire pressures, refer to result in overheating of the engine. Adjust the tire inflation pressures to “Tires and wheels” in section 8. specification. Low tire inflation pressures will result in overheating and possible failure of the tires. WARNING - Tire tread Avoid using worn or damaged tires Always check the tire tread which may result in reduced traction before driving your vehicle. or tire failure. Worn-out tires can result in loss Never exceed the maximum tire of vehicle control. Worn-out tires inflation pressure shown on the tires. should be replaced as soon as possible. For further information and tread limits, refer to "Tires and wheels" in section 7.

5 54 Driving your vehicle

WINTER DRIVING Snowy or icy conditions Snow tires To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it If you mount snow tires on your vehi- may be necessary to use snow tires cle, make sure they are radial tires of or to install tire chains on your tires. the same size and load range as the If snow tires are needed, it is neces- original tires. Mount snow tires on all sary to select tires equivalent in size four wheels to balance your vehicle’s and type of the original equipment handling in all weather conditions. tires. Failure to do so may adversely Keep in mind that the traction provid- affect the safety and handling of your ed by snow tires on dry roads may vehicle. Furthermore, speeding, not be as high as your vehicle's orig- rapid acceleration, sudden brake inal equipment tires.You should drive 1VQA3005 applications, and sharp turns are cautiously even when the roads are Severe weather conditions in the potentially very hazardous practices. clear. Check with the tire dealer for winter result in greater wear and During deceleration, use engine maximum speed recommendations. other problems. To minimize the braking to the fullest extent. Sudden Do not install studded tires without problems of winter driving, you brake applications on snowy or icy first checking local, state and munic- should follow these suggestions: roads may cause skids to occur. You ipal regulations for possible restric- need to keep sufficient distance tions against their use. between the vehicle in operation in front of your vehicle. Also, apply the brake gently. It should be noted that installing tire chains on the tire will provide a greater driving force, but will not prevent side skids. ✽ NOTICE Tire chains are not legal in all states. Check state laws before fitting tire chains.

555 Driving your vehicle

Tire chains When using tire chains, install them When mounting snow chains, park on the front tires only. the vehicle on level ground away from traffic. Turn on the vehicle Hazard Warning flashers and place a triangu- - Snow chains CAUTION lar emergency warning device behind Make sure the snow chains are the vehicle if available. Always place the correct size and type for the vehicle in P (Park), apply the your tires. Incorrect snow parking brake and turn off the engine chains can cause damage to the before installing snow chains. vehicle body and suspension • The use of chains may adversely and may not be covered by your affect vehicle handling. vehicle manufacturer warranty. • Do not exceed 20 mph (30 km/h) or the chain manufacturer’s recom- 1VQA3007 mended speed limit, whichever is Since the sidewalls of radial tires are Chain installation lower. thinner, they can be damaged by mounting some types of snow chains When installing chains, follow the • Drive carefully and avoid bumps, on them. Therefore, the use of snow manufacturer's instructions and holes, sharp turns, and other road tires is recommended instead of mount them as tightly as you can. hazards, which may cause the snow chains. Do not mount tire Drive slowly with chains installed. If vehicle to bounce. chains on vehicles equipped with you hear the chains contacting the • Avoid sharp turns or locked-wheel aluminum wheels; snow chains may body or chassis, stop and tighten braking. cause damage to the wheels. If snow them. If they still make contact, slow chains must be used, use wire-type down until it stops. Remove the chains with a thickness of less than chains as soon as you begin driving 0.59 in (15 mm). Damage to your on cleared roads. vehicle caused by improper snow chain use is not covered by your vehicle manufacturers warranty.

5 56 Driving your vehicle

Check battery and cables To keep locks from freezing CAUTION - Snow chains Winter puts additional burdens on To keep the locks from freezing, • Chains that are the wrong size the battery system. Visually inspect squirt an approved de-icer fluid or or improperly installed can the battery and cables as described glycerine into the key opening. If a damage your vehicle's brake in section 7. The level of charge in lock is covered with ice, squirt it with lines, suspension, body and your battery can be checked by an an approved de-icing fluid to remove wheels. authorized Kia dealer or a service the ice. If the lock is frozen internally, • Stop driving and retighten the station. you may be able to thaw it out by chains any time you hear them using a heated key. Handle the heat- hitting the vehicle. ed key with care to avoid injury. Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary Use high quality ethylene gly- In some climates it is recommended Use approved window washer col coolant that a lower viscosity "winter weight" anti-freeze in system Your vehicle is delivered with high qual- oil be used during cold weather. See To keep the water in the window ity ethylene glycol coolant in the cool- section 8 for recommendations. If washer system from freezing, add an ing system. It is the only type of coolant you aren't sure what weight oil you approved window washer anti-freeze that should be used because it helps should use, consult an authorized solution in accordance with instruc- prevent corrosion in the cooling sys- Kia dealer. tions on the container. Window wash- tem, lubricates the water pump and er anti-freeze is available from an prevents freezing. Be sure to replace authorized Kia dealer and most auto Check spark plugs and igni- parts outlets. Do not use engine or replenish your coolant in accor- tion system dance with the maintenance schedule coolant or other types of anti-freeze in section 7. Before winter, have your Inspect your spark plugs as as these may damage the paint finish. coolant tested to assure that its freez- described in section 7 and replace ing point is sufficient for the tempera- them if necessary. Also check all tures anticipated during the winter. ignition wiring and components to be sure they are not cracked, worn or damaged in any way.

557 Driving your vehicle

TRAILER TOWING Don’t let your parking brake Don't let ice and snow accu- We do not recommend using this freeze mulate underneath vehicle for trailer towing. Under some conditions your parking Under some conditions, snow and brake can freeze in the engaged ice can build up under the fenders position. This is most likely to happen and interfere with the steering. When when there is an accumulation of driving in severe winter conditions snow or ice around or near the rear where this may happen, you should brakes or if the brakes are wet. If periodically check underneath the there is a risk the parking brake may vehicle to be sure the movement of freeze, apply it only temporarily while the front wheels and the steering you put the gear shift lever in P components are not obstructed. (Park, automatic transaxle) or in first or reverse gear (manual transaxle) and block the rear wheels so the Carry emergency equipment vehicle cannot roll. Then release the Depending on the severity of the parking brake. weather, you should carry appropriate emergency equipment. Some of the items you may want to carry include tow straps or chains, flash- light, emergency flares, sand, shov- el, jumper cables, window scraper, gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, blan- ket, etc.

5 58 Driving your vehicle

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT Tire and loading information label

OPS053100N/OPS053104N/OPS053102N/OPS053101N/OPS053103N/OPS053105N The label located on the driver's door sill gives the original tire size, cold tire pressures recommended for your vehicle, the number of people that can be in your vehicle and vehicle capacity weight.

559 Driving your vehicle

Vehicle capacity weight: Seating capacity: Towing capacity: 827 lbs. (375 kg) Total - 5 persons We do not recommend using this Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi- (Front seat : 2 persons, vehicle for trailer towing. mum combined weight of occupants Rear seat : 3 persons) and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped Seating capacity is the maximum with a trailer, the combined weight number of occupants including a includes the tongue load. driver, your vehicle may carry. However, the seating capacity may be reduced based upon the weight of all of the occupants, and the weight of the cargo being carried or towed. Do not overload the vehicle as there is a limit to the total weight, or load limit including occupants and cargo, the vehicle can carry.

5 60 Driving your vehicle

Cargo capacity: Steps for determining correct 6.If your vehicle will be towing a trail- The cargo capacity of your vehicle load limit er, load from your trailer will be will increase or decrease depending 1.Locate the statement "The com- transferred to your vehicle. Consult on the weight and the number of bined weight of occupants and this manual to determine how this occupants and the tongue load, if cargo should never exceed XXX kg reduces the available cargo and your vehicle is equipped with a trail- or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's plac- luggage load capacity of your vehi- er. ard. cle. 2.Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3.Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. 4.The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.) 5.Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calcu- lated in Step 4.

561 Driving your vehicle

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

ABC ABC ABC

C190F01JM C190F02JM C190F03JM

Item Description Total Item Description Total Item Description Total Vehicle Capacity 1400 lbs Vehicle Capacity 1400 lbs Vehicle Capacity 1400 lbs A A A Weight (635 kg) Weight (635 kg) Weight (635 kg) Subtract Occupant Subtract Occupant Subtract Occupant 300 lbs 750 lbs 860 lbs B Weight B Weight B Weight (136 kg) (340 kg) (390 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 172 lbs (78 kg) × 5 Available Cargo and 1100 lbs Available Cargo and 650 lbs Available Cargo and 540 lbs C C C Luggage weight (499 kg) Luggage weight (295 kg) Luggage weight (245 kg) Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's capacity weight.

5 62 Driving your vehicle

Certification label To find out the actual loads on your The label will help you decide how front and rear axles, you need to go much cargo and installed equipment to a weigh station and weigh your your vehicle can carry. vehicle.Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the center- If you carry items inside your vehicle line. - like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else - they are moving as fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop WARNING - Over loading or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, Never exceed the GVWR for the items will keep going and can your vehicle, the GAWR for cause an injury if they strike the driv- either the front or rear axle and er or a passenger. OEN056020 vehicle capacity weight. The certification label is located on Exceeding these ratings can the driver's door sill at the center pil- affect your vehicle’s handling lar. and braking ability. This label shows the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle. This is called the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. This label also tells you the maximum weight that can be supported by the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

563 Driving your vehicle

WARNING - Over loading WARNING - Loose cargo Do not overload your vehicle. Do not travel with unsecured Overloading your vehicle can blunt objects in the passenger cause heat buildup in your vehi- compartment of your vehicle cle's tires and possible tire fail- (e.g. suit cases or unsecured ure, increased stopping dis- child seats). These items may tances and poor vehicle han- strike occupant during a sud- dling all of which may result in a den stop or crash. crash.

✽ NOTICE Overloading your vehicle may cause damage. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

5 64 Driving your vehicle

VEHICLE WEIGHT GLOSSARY This section will guide you in the Cargo weight GVWR proper loading of your vehicle and/or This figure includes all weight added (Gross vehicle weight rating) trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle to the Base Curb Weight, including This is the maximum allowable weight within its design rating capa- cargo and optional equipment. weight of the fully loaded vehicle bility, with or without a trailer. (including all options, equipment, Properly loading your vehicle will passengers and cargo). The GVWR provide maximum return of the vehi- GAW (Gross axle weight) is shown on the certification label cle design performance. Before load- This is the total weight placed on located on the driver’s door sill. ing your vehicle, familiarize yourself each axle (front and rear) - including with the following terms for determin- vehicle curb weight and all payload. ing your vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle's specifications and the certification GAWR label: (Gross axle weight rating) This is the maximum allowable Base curb weight weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers This is the weight of the vehicle are shown on the certification label. including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not The total load on each axle must include passengers, cargo, or option- never exceed its GAWR. al equipment. GVW (Gross vehicle weight) Vehicle curb weight This is the Base Curb Weight plus This is the weight of your new vehicle actual Cargo Weight plus passen- when you picked it up from your deal- gers. er plus any aftermarket equipment.

565 What to do in an emergency

Road warning ...... 6-2 If you have a flat tire (with Tire Mobility Kit) . . 6-23 • Hazard warning flasher ...... 6-2 • Introduction ...... 6-23 In case of an emergency while driving...... 6-3 • Components of the Tire Mobility Kit ...... 6-25 • If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing...... 6-3 • Using the Tire Mobility Kit ...... 6-26 • If you have a flat tire while driving ...... 6-3 • Distributing the sealant...... 6-27 • If engine stalls while driving ...... 6-3 • Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . 6-28 If the engine will not start ...... 6-4 • Technical Data ...... 6-29 • If engine doesn’t turn over or turns over slowly . . . . 6-4 Towing ...... 6-30 • If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . . 6-4 • Towing service ...... 6-30 Emergency starting ...... 6-5 • Removable towing hook (front) ...... 6-31 • Jump starting...... 6-5 • Emergency towing ...... 6-32 • Push-starting ...... 6-7 If the engine overheats...... 6-8 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ...... 6-9 • Low tire pressure indicator ...... 6-10 • TPMS malfunction indicator ...... 6-11 • Changing a tire with TPMS ...... 6-12 6 If you have a flat tire (with Spare Tire) ...... 6-13 • Jack and tools ...... 6-13 • Removing and storing the spare tire ...... 6-15 • Changing tires ...... 6-15 • Use of temporary compact spare tire ...... 6-20 What to do in an emergency

ROAD WARNING Hazard warning flasher Depress the flasher switch with the ignition switch in any position. The flasher switch is located in the center console switch panel. All turn signal lights will flash simultaneously.

• The hazard warning flasher operates whether your vehicle is running or not. • The turn signals do not work when the hazard flasher is on. • Care must be taken when using OPS063001 the hazard warning flasher while The hazard warning flasher serves the vehicle is being towed. as a warning to other drivers to exercise extreme caution when approaching, overtaking, or passing your vehicle. It should be used whenever emergency repairs are being made or when the vehicle is stopped near the edge of a roadway.

26 What to do in an emergency

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING If the engine stalls at a cross- 2.When the vehicle is stopped, turn If the engine stalls while driv- road or crossing on your emergency hazard flashing ers, set the parking brake and put If the engine stalls at a crossroad or 1.Reduce your speed gradually, the transaxle in P (Park, automatic crossing, set the shift lever in the N keeping a straight line. Move cau- transaxle) or reverse (manual (Neutral) position and then push the tiously off the road to a safe place. transaxle). vehicle to a safe place. 2.Turn on your emergency flashers. 3.Have all passengers get out of the vehicle. Be sure they all get out on 3.Try to start the engine again. If your If you have a flat tire while the side of the vehicle that is away vehicle will not start, contact an driving from traffic. authorized Kia dealer or seek other qualified assistance. If a tire goes flat while you are driv- 4.When changing a flat tire, follow ing: the instruction provided later in this 1.Take your foot off the accelerator section. ✽ NOTICE pedal and let the vehicle slow If there was a check engine light and down while driving straight ahead. loss of power or stall and if safe to do Do not apply the brakes immedi- so to wait at least 10 seconds to ately or attempt to pull off the road restart the vehicle after it stalls. This as this may cause a loss of control. may reset the car so it will no longer When the vehicle has slowed to run at low power (limp home) condi- such a speed that it is safe to do tion. so, brake carefully and pull off the road. Drive off the road as far as possible and park on a firm level ground. If you are on a divided highway, do not park in the median area between the two traffic lanes.

63 What to do in an emergency

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START If engine doesn't turn over or If engine turns over normally turns over slowly WARNING - Push/pull but does not start start 1.If your vehicle has an automatic 1.Check the fuel level. Do not push or pull the vehicle transaxle, be sure the shift lever is 2.With the ignition switch in the to start it. Push or pull starting in N (Neutral) or P (Park) and the LOCK position, check all connec- may cause the catalytic con- emergency brake is set. tors at the ignition coils and spark verter to overload and create a 2.Check the battery connections to plugs. Reconnect any that may be fire hazard. be sure they are clean and tight. disconnected or loose. 3.Turn on the interior light. If the light 3.Check the fuel line in the engine dims or goes out when you operate compartment. the starter, the battery is dis- 4.If the engine still does not start, call charged. an authorized Kia dealer or seek 4.Check the starter connections to other qualified assistance. be sure they are securely tightened. 5.Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. See instructions for "Jump starting".

46 What to do in an emergency

EMERGENCY STARTING

Jumper Cables Jump starting - Battery Jump starting can be dangerous if WARNING done incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid Never attempt to check the elec- harm to yourself or damage to your trolyte level of the battery as vehicle or battery, follow these jump this may cause the battery to (-) rupture or explode causing seri- (+) starting procedures. If in doubt, we (-) strongly recommend that you have a ous injury. competent technician or towing serv- (+) Discharged ice jump start your vehicle. Booster battery battery WARNING - Frozen 1VQA4001 CAUTION - 12 volt battery batteries Connect cables in numerical order Use only a 12-volt jumper sys- Do not attempt to jump start the and disconnect in reverse order. tem. You can damage a 12-volt vehicle if the discharged battery starting motor, ignition system, is frozen or if the electrolyte and other electrical parts level is low as the battery may beyond repair by use of a 24- rupture or explode. volt power supply (either two 12-volt batteries in series or a 24-volt motor generator set).

65 What to do in an emergency

Jump starting procedure Do not allow the jumper cables to WARNING - Battery 1.Make sure the booster battery is contact anything except the correct Keep all flames or sparks away 12-volt and that its negative termi- battery terminals or the correct from the battery. The battery nal is grounded. ground. Do not lean over the battery when making connections. produces hydrogen gas which 2.If the booster battery is in another will explode if exposed to flame vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to or sparks. come in contact. WARNING - Battery 3.Turn off all unnecessary electrical cables loads. Do not connect the jumper WARNING - Sulfuric acid 4.Connect the jumper cables in the cable from the negative terminal risk exact sequence shown in the illus- of the booster battery to the When jump starting your vehi- tration. First connect one end of a negative terminal of the dis- cle be careful not to get acid on jumper cable to the positive termi- charged battery. This can cause yourself, your clothing or on the nal of the discharged battery (1), the discharged battery to over- vehicle. Automobile batteries then connect the other end to the heat and crack, releasing bat- contain sulfuric acid. This is positive terminal of the booster tery acid. poisonous and highly corro- battery (2). sive. Proceed to connect one end of the other jumper cable to the negative terminal of the booster battery (3), then the other end to a solid, stationary, metallic point (for example, the engine lifting bracket) away from the battery (4). Do not connect it to or near any part that moves when the engine is cranked.

66 What to do in an emergency

5.Start the engine of the vehicle with Push-starting the booster battery and let it run at Vehicles equipped with automatic 2,000 rpm, then start the engine of transaxle lock system cannot be the vehicle with the discharged push-started. battery. Follow the directions in this section If the cause of your battery discharg- for jump-starting. ing is not apparent, you should have your vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer. WARNING - Tow starting vehicle Never tow a vehicle to start it because the sudden surge forward when the engine starts could cause a collision with the tow vehicle.

67 What to do in an emergency

IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS If your temperature gauge indicates 4.Check to see if the water pump overheating, you experience a loss drive belt is missing. If it is not WARNING - Radiator cap of power, or hear loud pinging or missing, check to see that it is Do not remove the radiator cap knocking, the engine will probably be tight. If the drive belt seems to be when the engine is hot. This too hot. If this happens, you should: satisfactory, check for coolant leak- may result in coolant being ing from the radiator, hoses or blown out of the opening and 1.Pull off the road and stop as soon under the vehicle. (If the air condi- cause serious burns. as it is safe to do so. tioning had been in use, it is normal for cold water to be draining 2.Place the shift lever in P (Park, from it when you stop). 6.If you cannot find the cause of the automatic transaxle) or Neutral overheating, wait until the engine (manual transaxle) and set the temperature has returned to nor- parking brake. If the air condition- WARNING - Under the hood mal. Then, if coolant has been lost, ing is on, turn it off. carefully add coolant to the reser- 3.If engine coolant is running out While the engine is running, voir to bring the fluid level in the under the vehicle or steam is com- keep hair, hands and clothing reservoir up to the halfway mark. away from moving parts such ing out from underneath the hood, 7.Proceed with caution, keeping stop the engine. Do not open the as the fan and drive belts to prevent injury. alert for further signs of overheat- hood until the coolant has stopped ing. If overheating happens again, running or the steaming has call an authorized Kia dealer for stopped. If there is no visible loss 5.If the water pump drive belt is bro- assistance. of engine coolant and no steam, ken or engine coolant is leaking Serious loss of coolant indicates leave the engine running and out, stop the engine immediately check to be sure the engine cool- there is a leak in the cooling system and call the nearest authorized Kia and this should be checked as soon ing fan is operating. If the fan is not dealer for assistance. running, turn the engine off. as possible by an authorized Kia dealer.

86 What to do in an emergency

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) As an added safety feature, your Your vehicle has also been equipped vehicle has been equipped with a tire with a TPMS malfunction indicator to pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicate when the system is not that illuminates a low tire pressure operating properly. The TPMS mal- telltale when one or more of your function indicator is combined with tires is significantly under-inflated. the low tire pressure telltale. When Accordingly, when the low tire pres- the system detects a malfunction, sure telltale illuminates, you should the telltale will flash for approximate- stop and check your tires as soon as ly one minute and then remain con- possible, and inflate them to the tinuously illuminated. This sequence proper pressure. Driving on a signifi- will continue upon subsequent vehi- OPS063002 cantly under-inflated tire causes the cle start-ups as long as the malfunc- tire to overheat and can lead to tire tion exists. When the malfunction (1) Low tire pressure telltale / failure. Under-inflation also reduces indicator is illuminated, the system TPMS malfunction indicator fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may not be able to detect or signal may affect the vehicle’s handling and low tire pressure as intended. TPMS Each tire, including the spare (if pro- stopping ability. malfunctions may occur for a variety vided), should be checked monthly of reasons, including the installation when cold and inflated to the inflation of replacement or alternate tires or Please note that the TPMS is not a wheels on the vehicle that prevent pressure recommended by the vehi- substitute for proper tire mainte- cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac- the TPMS from functioning properly. nance, and it is the driver’s responsi- Always check the TPMS malfunction ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If bility to maintain correct tire pres- your vehicle has tires of a different telltale after replacing one or more sure, even if under-inflation has not tires or wheels on your vehicle to size than the size indicated on the reached the level to trigger illumina- vehicle placard or tire inflation pres- ensure that the replacement or alter- tion of the TPMS low tire pressure nate tires and wheels allow the sure label, you should determine the telltale. proper tire inflation pressure for TPMS to continue to function proper- those tires.) ly.

69 What to do in an emergency

✽ NOTICE Low tire pressure tell- Then the Low Tire Pressure telltale If the TPMS, Low Tire Pressure tale may flash for approximately one indicator do not illuminate for 3 sec- minute and then remain continuously onds when the ignition switch is illuminated after restarting and about When the tire pressure monitoring 20 minutes of continuous driving at turned to the ON position or engine system warning indicators are illumi- is running, or if they remain illumi- speed above 15.5 mph (25 km/h) nated, one or more of your tires is before you have the low pressure tire nated after coming on for approxi- significantly under-inflated. mately 3 seconds, take your vehicle repaired and replaced on the vehicle. to your nearest authorized Kia deal- If the telltale illuminates, immediately In winter or cold weather, the low tire er and have the system checked. reduce your speed, avoid hard cor- pressure telltale may be illuminated if nering and anticipate increased stop- the tire pressure was adjusted to the ping distances. You should stop and recommended tire inflation pressure check your tires as soon as possible. in warm weather. It does not mean Inflate the tires to the proper pres- your TPMS is malfunctioning sure as indicated on the vehicle’s because the decreased temperature placard or tire inflation pressure label leads to a proportional lowering of located on the driver’s side center pil- tire pressure. lar outer panel. If you cannot reach a service station or if the tire cannot When you drive your vehicle from a hold the newly added air, replace the warm area to a cold area or from a low pressure tire with the spare tire. cold area to a warm area, or the outside temperature is greatly higher or lower, you should check the tire inflation pressure and adjust the tires to the recommended tire inflation pressure.

6 10 What to do in an emergency

TPMS (Tire Pressure • The TPMS malfunction indicator WARNING - Low pressure Monitoring System) may blink for approximately 1 damage malfunction indicator minute and then remain continuous- Do not drive on low pressure ly illuminated if the vehicle is moving around electric power supply cables tires. Significantly low tire pres- The TPMS malfunction indicator will sure can cause the tires to over- or radios transmitters such as at illuminate after it blinks for approxi- police stations, government and heat and fail making the vehicle mately one minute when there is a unstable resulting in increased public offices, broadcasting sta- problem with the Tire Pressure tions, military installations, airports, braking distances and a loss of Monitoring System. Have the system vehicle control. or transmitting towers, etc. This can checked by an authorized Kia dealer interfere with normal operation of as soon as possible to determine the the Tire Pressure Monitoring cause of the problem. System (TPMS). • The TPMS malfunction indicator may blink for approximately 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated if snow chains are used or some separate electronic devices such as notebook computer, mobile charger, remote starter or navigation etc., are used in the vehicle. This can interfere with normal operation of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).

611 What to do in an emergency

Changing a tire with TPMS Even if you replace the low pressure If an original mounted tire is replaced If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire tire with the spare tire, the Low Tire with the spare tire, the TPMS sensor Pressure telltale will come on. Have Pressure telltale will remain on until on the replaced spare wheel should the flat tire repaired by an authorized the low pressure tire is repaired and be initiated and the TPMS sensor on Kia dealer as soon as possible or placed on the vehicle. the original mounted wheel should replace the flat tire with the spare After you replace the low pressure be deactivated. If the TPMS sensor tire. tire with the spare tire, the TPMS on the original mounted wheel locat- malfunction indicator may illuminate ed in the spare tire carrier still acti- after a few minutes because the vates, the tire pressure monitoring CAUTION - Repair agents TPMS sensor mounted on the spare system may not operate properly. NEVER use a puncture-repair- wheel is not initiated. Have the tire with TPMS serviced or ing agent to repair and/or inflate replaced by an authorized Kia deal- Once the low pressure tire is reinflat- er. a low pressure tire. The tire ed to the recommended pressure sealant can damage the tire and installed on the vehicle or the pressure sensor. If used, you TPMS sensor mounted on the will have to replace the tire pres- replaced spare wheel is initiated by sure sensor. an authorized Kia dealer, the TPMS malfunction indicator and the low tire Each wheel is equipped with a tire pressure telltale will extinguish within pressure sensor mounted inside the a few minutes of driving. tire behind the valve stem. You must If the indicator is not extinguished use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec- after a few minutes of driving, please ommended that you always have visit an authorized Kia dealer. your tires serviced by an authorized Kia dealer.

6 12 What to do in an emergency

You may not be able to identify a low • The TPMS cannot alert you to This device complies with Part tire by simply looking at it. Always severe and sudden tire damage 15 of the FCC rules. use a good quality tire pressure caused by external factors such as Operation is subject to the following gauge to measure the tire's inflation nails or road debris. two conditions: pressure. Please note that a tire that • If you feel any vehicle instability, 1.This device may not cause harmful is hot (from being driven) will have a immediately take your foot off the interference, and higher pressure measurement than a accelerator, apply the brakes grad- tire that is cold (from sitting station- ually and with light force, and slow- 2.This device must accept any inter- ary for at least 3 hours and driven ly move to a safe position off the ference received, including inter- less than 1 mile (1.6 km) during that road. ference that may cause undesired 3 hour period). operation. Allow the tire to cool before measur- ✽ ing the inflation pressure. Always be NOTICE - Protecting TPMS sure the tire is cold before inflating to Tampering with, modifying, or dis- the recommended pressure. abling the Tire Pressure Monitoring Do not use any tire sealant if your System (TPMS) components may vehicle is equipped with a Tire interfere with the system's ability to Pressure Monitoring System. The liq- warn the driver of low tire pressure uid sealant can damage the tire conditions and/or TPMS malfunc- pressure sensors. tions. Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) components may void the warranty for that portion of the vehicle.

613 What to do in an emergency

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE Jack and tools (if equipped) Jacking instructions • Always move the vehicle complete- The jack is provided for emergency ly off the road and onto the shoulder tire changing only. before trying to change a tire. The jack should be used on a firm level To prevent the jack from “rattling” ground. If you cannot find a firm, while the vehicle is in motion, store it level place off the road, call a towing properly. service company for assistance. Follow jacking instructions to reduce • Be sure to use the correct front and the possibility of personal injury. rear jacking positions on the vehicle; never use the bumpers or any WARNING - Tire Jack other part of the vehicle for jack Do not place any portion of your support. • Do not allow anyone to remain in OPS063003 body under a vehicle that is only supported by a jack since the vehicle while it is on the jack. The jack, jack handle, wheel lug nut the vehicle can easily roll off the • Make sure any children present are wrench are stored in the luggage jack. Use vehicle support in a secure place away from the compartment. stands. road and from the vehicle to be Pull up the luggage box cover to raised with the jack. reach this equipment. (1) Jack handle WARNING - Changing (2) Jack tires (3) Wheel lug nut wrench Never attempt vehicle repairs in the traffic lanes of a public road or highway.

6 14 What to do in an emergency

Removing and storing the Changing tires WARNING spare tire (if equipped) - Running vehicle on jack Do not start or run the engine of the vehicle while the vehicle is on the jack as this may cause the vehicle to fall off the jack.

1VQA4022 OAM069008 1.Park on a level surface and apply Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt the parking brake firmly. counterclockwise. 2.Place the transaxle shift lever in R Store the tire in the reverse order of (Reverse) with manual transaxle or removal. P (Park) with automatic transaxle. To prevent the spare tire and tools 3.Activate the hazard warning flash- from “rattling” while the vehicle is in ers. motion, store them properly.

615 What to do in an emergency

• To prevent vehicle movement while changing a tire, always set the parking brake fully, and always block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel being changed. • We recommend that the wheels of the vehicle be blocked, and that no person remain in a vehicle that is being jacked.

1VQA4023 OPS063004 4.Remove the wheel lug nut wrench, 6.Loosen the wheel lug nuts counter- jack, jack handle, and spare tire clockwise one turn each, but do from the vehicle. not remove any nut until the tire 5.Block both the front and rear of the has been raised off the ground. wheel that is diagonally opposite from the jack position.

6 16 What to do in an emergency

9.Loosen the wheel nuts and remove them with your fingers. Slide the wheel off the studs and lay it flat so it cannot roll away.To put the wheel on the hub, pick up the spare tire, line up the holes with the studs and slide the wheel onto them. If this is difficult, tip the wheel slightly and get the top hole in the wheel lined up with the top stud.Then jiggle the OPS063006 wheel back and forth until the OAM069009 wheel can slide over the other studs. 8.Insert the jack handle into the jack and turn it clockwise, raising the vehicle until the tire just clears the ground. This measurement is approximately 1 in. (30 mm). Before removing the wheel lug nuts, make sure the vehicle is sta- ble and that there is no chance for OPS063005 movement or slippage. 7.Place the jack at the front (1) or rear (2) jacking position closest to the tire you are changing. Place the jack at the designated locations under the frame.

617 What to do in an emergency

Wheels may have sharp edges. 10. To install the wheel, hold it on the Handle them carefully to avoid possi- studs, put the wheel nuts on the ble severe injury. Before putting the studs and tighten them finger wheel into place, be sure that there tight. Jiggle the tire to be sure it is is nothing on the hub or wheel (such completely seated, then tighten as mud, tar, gravel, etc.) that pre- the nuts as much as possible vents the wheel from fitting solidly with your fingers again. against the hub. 11. Insert the wrench into the jack and lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the wheel nut WARNING - Installing a wrench counterclockwise. wheel OPS063007 Make sure the wheel makes Then position the wrench as shown good contact with the hub when in the drawing and tighten the wheel installed. If the contact of the nuts. Be sure the socket is seated mounting surface between the completely over the nut. Do not stand wheel and hub is not good, the on the wrench handle or use an wheel nuts could come loose extension pipe over the wrench han- and cause the loss of a wheel. dle. Go around the wheel tightening Loss of a wheel may result in every nut following the numerical loss of control of the vehicle. sequence shown in the image until they are all tight. Then double-check each nut for tightness. After changing wheels, have an authorized Kia dealer tighten the wheel nuts to their proper torque as soon as possible.

Wheel nut tightening torque: 65~79 lb·ft (9~11 kg·m)

6 18 What to do in an emergency

If you have a tire gauge, remove the valve cap and check the air pressure. CAUTION - Reusing lug WARNING - Wheel studs If the pressure is lower than recom- nuts If the studs are damaged, they mended, drive slowly to the nearest Make certain during wheel may lose their ability to retain service station and inflate to the cor- removal that the same nuts that the wheel.This could lead to the rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust were removed are reinstalled - loss of the wheel and a colli- it until it is correct. Always reinstall or, if replaced, that nuts with sion. the valve cap after checking or metric threads and the same adjusting the tire pressure. If the cap chamfer configuration are used. is not replaced, dust and dirt may get Your vehicle has metric threads To prevent the jack, jack handle, into the tire valve and air may leak on the wheel studs and nuts. wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire from the tire. If you lose a valve cap, Installation of a non-metric from rattling while the vehicle is in buy another and install it as soon as thread nut on a metric stud will motion, store them properly. possible. not secure the wheel to the hub Check the inflation pressures as After you have changed the wheels, properly and will damage the soon as possible after installing the always secure the flat tire in its place stud so that it must be replaced. spare tire. Adjust it to the specified and return the jack and tools to their pressure, if necessary. Refer to proper storage locations. “Tires and wheels” in chapter 8. Note that most lug nuts do not have metric threads. Be sure to use extreme care in checking for thread style before installing aftermarket lug nuts or wheels. If in doubt, consult an authorized Kia dealer.

619 What to do in an emergency

Important - use of compact spare When using a compact spare tire, tire (if equipped) WARNING observe the following precautions: Your vehicle is equipped with a com- The compact spare tire is for • Under no circumstances should pact spare tire. This compact spare emergency use only. Do not you exceed 50 mph (80 km/h); a tire takes up less space than a regu- operate your vehicle on this higher speed could damage the lar-size tire. This tire is smaller than a compact spare at speeds over tire. conventional tire and is designed for 50 mph (80 km/h). The original • Ensure that you drive slowly temporary use only. tire should be repaired or enough for the road conditions to replaced as soon as possible to avoid all hazards. Any road hazard, avoid failure of the spare possi- such as a pothole or debris, could CAUTION bly leading to personal injury or seriously damage the compact • You should drive carefully death. spare. when the compact spare is in • Any continuous road use of this tire use. The compact spare could result in tire failure, loss of should be replaced by the The compact spare should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa). vehicle control, and possible per- proper conventional tire and sonal injury. rim at the first opportunity. ✽ • Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi- • The operation of this vehicle NOTICE mum load rating or the load-carry- is not recommended with Check the inflation pressure after ing capacity shown on the sidewall more than one compact spare installing the spare tire. Adjust it to of the compact spare tire. tire in use at the same time. the specified pressure, as necessary.

6 20 What to do in an emergency

• Avoid driving over obstacles. The • The compact spare tire should not compact spare tire diameter is be used on any other wheels, nor smaller than the diameter of a con- should standard tires, snow tires, ventional tire and reduces the wheel covers or trim rings be used ground clearance approximately 1 with the compact spare wheel. If inch (25 mm), which could result in such use is attempted, damage to damage to the vehicle. these items or other vehicle com- • Do not take this vehicle through an ponents may occur. automatic vehicle wash while the • Do not use more than one compact compact spare tire is installed. spare tire at a time. • Do not use tire chains on the com- • Do not tow a trailer while the compact spare tire. Because of the pact spare tire is installed. smaller size, a tire chain will not fit properly. This could damage the vehicle and result in loss of the chain. • Do not use the compact spare tire on any other vehicle because this tire has been designed especially for your vehicle. • The compact spare tire’s tread life is shorter than a regular tire. Inspect your compact spare tire regularly and replace worn compact spare tires with the same size and design, mounted on the same wheel.

621 What to do in an emergency

Jack label 1. Model Name

■ Example 2. Maximum allowable load ■ Type A 3. When using the jack, set your parking brake. 4. When using the jack, stop the engine. 5. Do not get under a vehicle that is supported by a jack. 6. The designated locations under the frame OHYK064001 7. When supporting the vehicle, the ■ Type B base plate of jack must be vertical under the lifting point. 8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles with manual transmission or move the shift lever to the P position on vehicles with automatic transmission. 9. The jack should be used on firm level ground. OHYK064002 10. Jack manufacture ❈ The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. For 11. Production date more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.

6 22 What to do in an emergency

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (TIRE MOBILITY KIT, IF EQUIPPED) When two or more tires are flat, do Introduction not use the tire mobility kit because the supported one sealant of Tire Mobility Kit is only used for one flat tire.

WARNING - Tire wall Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit to repair punctures in the tire walls. This can result in an acci- OAM060013L dent due to tire failure.

For safe operation, carefully read OPS063008 and follow the instructions in this manual before use. With the Tire Mobility Kit you stay (1) Compressor mobile even after experiencing a tire puncture. (2) Sealant bottle The system of compressor and sealing The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary compound effectively and comfortably fix to the tire and the tire should be seals most punctures in a passenger inspected by an authorized Kia deal- car tire caused by nails or similar er as soon as possible. objects and reinflates the tire. After you ensured that the tire is properly sealed you can drive cautiously on the tire (distance up to 200 km (120 miles)) at a max. speed of (80 km/h) in order to reach a service station or tire dealer for the tire replacement.

623 What to do in an emergency

It is possible that some tires, espe- Notes on the suggested use of • Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if a cially with larger punctures or dam- the Tire Mobility Kit tire is severely damaged by driving age to the sidewall, cannot be sealed run flat or with insufficient air pres- • Park your car at the side of the road completely. sure. so that you can work with the Tire Air pressure loss in the tire may Mobility Kit away from moving traf- • Do not remove any foreign objects adversely affect tire performance. fic. such as nails or screws that have penetrated the tire. For this reason, you should avoid • To be sure your vehicle will not abrupt steering or other driving move, even when you're on fairly • Provided the car is outdoors, leave maneuvers, especially if the vehicle level ground, always set your park- the engine running. Otherwise is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in ing brake. operating the compressor may use. eventually drain the car battery. • Only use the Tire Mobility Kit for The Tire Mobility Kit is not designed sealing/inflation passenger car tires. • Never leave the Tire Mobility Kit or intended as a permanent tire Only punctured areas located with- unattended while it is being used. repair method and is to be used for in the tread region of the tire can be • Do not leave the compressor run- one tire only. sealed using the tire mobility kit. ning for more than 10 min. at a time This instruction shows you step by • Do not use on motorcycles, bicycles or it may overheat. step how to temporarily seal the or any other type of tires. • Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if puncture simply and reliably. • When the tire and wheel are dam- the ambient temperature is below - Read the section "Notes on the safe aged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit for 22°F (-30°C). use of the Tire Mobility Kit". your safety. • Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may not be effective for tire damage larger than approximately 0.24 in (6 mm). Please contact the nearest Kia dealership if the tire cannot be made roadworthy with the Tire Mobility Kit.

6 24 What to do in an emergency

Components of the Tire Mobility Kit 9. Hose to connect compressor and sealant bottle or compressor and wheel Connectors, cable and connection hose are stored in the compressor housing.

WARNING - Expired sealant Do not use the Tire sealant after the sealant has expired (i.e. pasted the expiration date on the sealant container). This can increase the risk of tire failure.

WARNING - Sealant • Keep out of reach of children. • Avoid contact with eyes. OAM060015L • Do not swallow. 0. Speed restriction label 4. Holder for the sealant bottle 1. Sealant bottle and label with 5. Compressor Strictly follow the specified speed restriction 6. On/off switch sequence, otherwise the sealant 2. Filling hose from sealant bottle to 7. Pressure gauge for displaying the may escape under high pressure. wheel tire inflation pressure 3. Connectors and cable for the 8. Screw cap for reducing tire infla- power outlet direct connection tion pressure

625 What to do in an emergency

Using the Tire Mobility Kit 1. Detach the speed restriction label (0) from the sealant bottle (1), and place it in a highly visible place inside the vehicle such as on the steering wheel to remind the driver not to drive too fast. 2. Screw connection hose (9) onto the connector of the sealant bottle. 3. Ensure that screw cap (8) is closed. OPS063008 OPS043204 4. Unscrew the valve cap from the 6. Ensure that the compressor is 7.Plug the compressor power cord valve of the defective wheel and switched off, position 0. into the front passenger side power screw filling hose (2) of the sealant outlet of the vehicle. bottle onto the valve. 5. Insert the sealant bottle into the housing (4) of the compressor so WARNING that the bottle is upright. Only use the front passenger side power outlet when connecting the power cord.

6 26 What to do in an emergency

8. With the engine start/stop button 9. Switch off the compressor. Distributing the sealant position on or ignition switch posi- 10. Detach the hoses from the 11. Immediately drive approximately tion on, switch on the compressor sealant bottle connector and 4~6miles (7~10km or, about and let it run for approximately 5~7 from the tire valve. 10min) to evenly distribute the minutes to fill the sealant up to sealant in the tire. proper pressure. (refer to the Tire Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its stor- and Wheels, chapter 8). The infla- age location in the vehicle. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph tion pressure of the tire after filling (80 km/h). If possible, do not fall below a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). is unimportant and will be WARNING - Carbon checked/corrected later. monoxide While driving, if you experience any Be careful not to overinflate the tire Do not leave your vehicle run- unusual vibration, ride disturbance or and stay away from the tire when ning in a poorly ventilated area noise, reduce your speed and drive filling it. for extended periods of time. with caution until you can safely pull Carbon monoxide poisoning off of the side of the road. and suffocation can occur. Call for road side service or towing. WARNING - Tire pressure When you use the Tire Mobility Kit, Do not attempt to drive your the tire pressure sensors and wheel vehicle if the tire pressure is may be damaged by sealant, remove below 29 PSI(200kpa). This the sealant stained with tire pressure could result in an accident due sensors and wheel and inspect in to sudden tire failure. authorized dealer.

627 What to do in an emergency

Checking the tire inflation pres- ✽ NOTICE Notes on the safe use of the sure The pressure gauge may show high- Tire Mobility Kit 1.After driving approximately 4 er than actual reading when the • Park your car at the side of the ~6miles(7~10km or about 10min), compressor is running. To get an road so that you can work with the stop at a safety location. accurate tire pressure, the compres- TMK away from moving traffic. 2.Connect connection hose (9) of the sor needs to be turned off. Place your warning triangle in a compressor directly to the tire prominent place to make passing valve. - To reduce the inflation pres- vehicles aware of your location. 3.Plug the compressor power cord sure: Loosen the screw cap (8) • To be sure your vehicle will not into the vehicle power outlet. on the compressor hose. move, even when you're on fairly 4.Adjust the tire inflation pressure to level ground, always set your park- the recommended tire inflation. CAUTION - Tire pressure ing brake. With the ignition switched on, pro- sensor • Only use the TMK for sealing/infla- ceed as follows. When you use the Tire Mobility tion passenger car tires. Do not - To increase the inflation pres- Kit including sealant not use on motorcycles, bicycles or sure : Switch on the compressor, approved by Kia, the tire pres- any other type of tires. position I. To check the current sure sensors may be damaged • Do not remove any foreign objects- inflation pressure setting, briefly by sealant. The sealant on the such as nails or screws -that have switch off the compressor. tire pressure sensor and wheel penetrated the tire. should be removed when you • Before using the TMK, read the replace the tire with a new one precautionary advice printed on and inspect the tire pressure the sealant bottle! sensors in authorized dealer. • Provided the car is outdoors, leave the engine running. Otherwise operating the compressor may eventually drain the car battery.

6 28 What to do in an emergency

• Never leave the TMK unattended Technical Data while it is being used. System voltage: DC 12 V • Do not leave the compressor run- Working voltage: DC 10 - 15 V ning for more than 10 min. at a time Amperage rating: max. 15 A or it may overheat. Suitable for use at temperatures: • Do not use the TMK if the ambient -22 ~ +158°F (-30 ~ +70°C) temperature is below -22°F (-30°C). Max. working pressure: • When the tire and wheel are dam- 87 psi (6 bar) aged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit Size for your safety. Compressor: 6.7 x 5.9 x 2.4 in. (170 x 150 x 60 mm) Sealant bottle: 3.3 x 2.8 ø in. (85 x 70 ø mm) Compressor weight: 1.77 lbs (0.8 kg) Sealant volume: 12.2 cu. in. (200 ml)

629 What to do in an emergency

TOWING Towing service For trailer towing guidelines information, refer to “Trailer towing” in chap- WARNING - Side and ter 5. curtaion AB If your vehicle is equipped with It is acceptable to tow the vehicle side and curtain air bag, set the with the rear wheels on the ground ignition switch to LOCK or ACC (without dollies) and the front wheels position when the vehicle is off the ground. being towed. If any of the loaded wheels or sus- The side and curtain air bag pension components are damaged may deploy when the ignitions or the vehicle is being towed with the is ON, and the rollover sensor front wheels on the ground, use a detects the situation as a rollover. dolly towing dolly under the front wheels. When being towed by a commercial tow truck and wheel dollies are not used, the front of the vehicle should always be lifted, not the rear. dolly OXM069028 If emergency towing is necessary, we recommend having it done by an authorized Kia dealer or a commercial tow-truck service. Proper lifting and towing procedures are necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies or flatbed is recommended.

6 30 What to do in an emergency

When towing your vehicle in an Removable towing hook (front) emergency without wheel dollies : (if equipped) 1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC position. 2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N (Neutral). 3. Release the parking brake.

OUN046030 CAUTION - Towing gear position Failure to place the transaxle shift lever in N (Neutral) may cause internal damage to the OPS063009 transaxle. 1.Remove the towing hook from the tool case.

OCM054034 2.Remove the hole cover pressing the lower part of the cover on the front bumper. CAUTION - Towing • Do not tow the vehicle backwards with the front wheels on the ground as this may cause damage to the vehicle. • Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Use wheel lift or flatbed equipment.

631 What to do in an emergency

Emergency towing If towing service is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be Front temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing hook under the front (or rear) of the vehicle. Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the brakes. Towing in this manner may be done only on hard-surfaced roads for a OPS063010 OPS063010 short distance and at low speeds. 3.Install the towing hook by turning it Rear (if equipped) Also, the wheels, axles, power train, clockwise into the hole until it is steering and brakes must all be in fully secured. good condition. 4.Remove the towing hook and • Do not use the tow hooks to pull a install the cover after use. vehicle out of mud, sand or other conditions from which the vehicle cannot be driven out under its own power. • Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than the vehicle doing the towing. OPS063012 • The drivers of both vehicles should If towing is necessary, we recom- communicate with each other fre- mend you to have it done by an quently. authorized Kia dealer or a commercial tow truck service.

6 32 What to do in an emergency

• Attach a towing strap to the tow Emergency towing precautions hook. • Turn the ignition switch to ACC so • Using a portion of the vehicle other the steering wheel isn’t locked. than the tow hooks for towing may • Place the transaxle shift lever in N damage the body of your vehicle. (Neutral). • Only use a cable or chain specifi- • Release the parking bake. cally intended for use in towing vehicles. Securely fasten the cable • Press the brake pedal with more or chain to the towing hook provid- force than usual since you will have ed. reduced brake performance. • Before emergency towing, check • More steering effort will be that the hook is not broken or dam- OPA067014 required because the power steer- aged. • Use a towing strap less than 16 ing system will be disabled. • Fasten the towing cable or chain feet (5 m) long. Attach a white or • If you are driving down a long hill, securely to the hook. red cloth (about 12 inches (30 cm) the brakes may overheat and brake wide) in the middle of the strap for performance will be reduced. Stop • Do not jerk the hook. Apply it easy visibility. often and let the brakes cool off. steadily and with even force. • Drive carefully so that the towing • If the car is being towed with all • To avoid damaging the hook, do strap is not loose during towing. four wheels on the ground, it can not pull from the side or at a verti- be towed only from the front. Be cal angle. Always pull straight sure that the transaxle is in neutral. ahead. Be sure the steering is unlocked by placing the ignition switch in the ACC position. A driver must be in the towed vehicle to operate the steering and brakes.

633 What to do in an emergency

CAUTION • To avoid serious damage to the automatic transaxle, limit the vehicle speed to 10 mph (15 km/h) and drive less than 1 mile (1.5 km) when towing. • Before towing, check the automatic transaxle for fluid leaks under your vehicle. If the automatic transaxle fluid is leaking, a flatbed equipment or towing dolly must be used.

6 34 Maintenance

Engine compartment ...... 7-3 • Filter replacement ...... 7-37 Maintenance services ...... 7-5 Wiper blades ...... 7-39 • Owner’s responsibility ...... 7-5 • Blade inspection...... 7-39 • Owner maintenance precautions ...... 7-6 • Blade replacement ...... 7-39 Owner maintenance ...... 7-7 Battery...... 7-43 • Owner maintenance schedule...... 7-7 • For best battery service ...... 7-43 Scheduled maintenance service...... 7-9 • Battery recharging ...... 7-44 Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 7-23 • Reset items ...... 7-45 Engine oil...... 7-27 Tires and wheels ...... 7-46 • Checking the engine oil level ...... 7-27 • Tire care ...... 7-46 • Changing the engine oil and filter ...... 7-28 • Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ...... 7-46 Engine coolant ...... 7-29 • Checking tire inflation pressure...... 7-47 • Tire rotation ...... 7-48 • Checking the coolant level ...... 7-29 • Wheel alignment and tire balance ...... 7-49 • Changing the coolant ...... 7-31 • Tire replacement ...... 7-50 Brake/clutch fluid...... 7-32 • Wheel replacement ...... 7-51 • Checking the brake/clutch fluid level ...... 7-32 • Tire traction ...... 7-51 Washer fluid ...... 7-34 • Tire maintenance...... 7-51 • Checking the washer fluid level ...... 7-34 • Tire sidewall labeling ...... 7-51 Parking brake ...... 7-34 Fuses ...... 7-61 • Checking the parking brake...... 7-34 • Fuse/relay panel description...... 7-66 7 Air cleaner...... 7-35 Light bulbs ...... 7-74 • Filter replacement ...... 7-35 • Front light replacement ...... 7-75 Climate control air filter ...... 7-37 • Side repeater light bulb replacement ...... 7-81 • Filter inspection...... 7-37 • Rear combination light bulb replacement ...... 7-81 • High mounted stop light bulb replacement ...... 7-83 • License plate light bulb replacement...... 7-84 • Interior light bulb replacement ...... 7-85 Appearance care...... 7-86 • Exterior care ...... 7-86 • Interior care ...... 7-91 Emission control system ...... 7-93 California perchlorate notice ...... 7-96

7 Maintenance

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

■ 1.6L GDI

1. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 2. Engine oil filler cap 3. Engine oil dipstick 4. Engine coolant reservoir 5. Radiator cap 6. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir 7. Positive battery terminal 8. Negative battery terminal 9. Fuse box 10. Air cleaner

* The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

OPS073001

73 Maintenance

■ 2.0L GDI

* The actual engine room in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

OPS073002

47 Maintenance

MAINTENANCE SERVICES You should exercise the utmost care Owner’s responsibility We recommend you have your vehi- to prevent damage to your vehicle cle maintained and repaired by an and injury to yourself whenever per- authorized Kia dealer. An authorized forming any maintenance or inspec- ✽ NOTICE Kia dealer meets Kia’s high service tion procedures. Maintenance Service and Record quality standards and receives tech- Should you have any doubts con- Retention are the owner's responsi- nical support from Kia in order to pro- cerning the inspection or servicing of bility. vide you with a high level of service your vehicle, we strongly recom- satisfaction. mend that you have an authorized You should retain documents that Kia dealer perform this work. show proper maintenance has been An authorized Kia dealer has factory performed on your vehicle in accor- trained technicians and genuine Kia dance with the scheduled mainte- parts to service your vehicle proper- nance service charts shown on the ly. For expert advice and quality serv- following pages. You need this infor- ice, see an authorized Kia dealer. mation to establish your compliance with the servicing and maintenance Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi- requirements of your vehicle war- cient servicing may result in opera- ranties. tional problems with your vehicle that Detailed warranty information is pro- could lead to vehicle damage, an vided in your Warranty & Consumer accident, or personal injury. Information manual. Repairs and adjustments required as a result of improper maintenance or a lack of required maintenance are not covered.

75 Maintenance

Owner maintenance precautions WARNING - Maintenance work Improper or incomplete service may result in problems. This section gives Do not wear jewelry or loose instructions only for the maintenance clothing while working under items that are easy to perform. the hood of your vehicle with the engine running. These can As explained earlier in this section, become entangled in moving several procedures can be done only parts, if you must run the engine by an authorized Kia dealer with spe- while working under the hood, cial tools. make certain that you remove all jewelry (especially rings, ✽ NOTICE bracelets, watches, and neck- Improper owner maintenance dur- laces) and all neckties, scarves, ing the warranty period may affect and similar loose clothing warranty coverage. For details, read before getting near the engine the separate Warranty & Consumer or cooling fans. Information manual provided with the vehicle. If you're unsure about any servicing or maintenance procedure, have it done by an authorized Kia dealer.

67 Maintenance

OWNER MAINTENANCE The following lists are vehicle checks Owner maintenance schedule While operating your vehicle: and inspections that should be per- When you stop for fuel: • Note any changes in the sound of formed by the owner or an author- the exhaust or any smell of • Check the engine oil level. ized Kia dealer at the frequencies exhaust fumes in the vehicle. indicated to help ensure safe, • Check the coolant level in the • Check for vibrations in the steering dependable operation of your vehi- coolant reservoir. cle. wheel. Notice any increased steer- • Check the windshield washer fluid ing effort or looseness in the steer- Any adverse conditions should be level. ing wheel, or change in its straight- brought to the attention of your deal- • Look for low or under-inflated tires. ahead position. er as soon as possible. Check if the front of the radiator • Notice if your vehicle constantly These Owner Maintenance Checks and condenser are clean and not turns slightly or “pulls” to one side are generally not covered by war- blocked with leaves, dirt or insects when traveling on smooth, level ranties and you may be charged for etc. If any of the above parts are road. labor, parts and lubricants used. extremely dirty or you are not sure • When stopping, listen and check of their condition, take your vehicle for unusual sounds, pulling to one to an authorized Kia dealer. side, increased brake pedal travel or “hard-to-push” brake pedal. • If any slipping or changes in the operation of your transaxle occurs, check the transaxle fluid level. • Check the automatic transaxle P (Park) function. • Check the parking brake. • Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle (water dripping from the air conditioning system during or after use is normal).

77 Maintenance

At least monthly: At least once a year: • Check the coolant level in the • Clean the body and door drain engine coolant reservoir. holes. • Check the operation of all exterior • Lubricate the door hinges and lights, including the stoplights, turn checks, and hood hinges. signals and hazard warning flash- • Lubricate the door and hood locks ers. and latches. • Check the inflation pressures of all • Lubricate the door rubber weather- tires including the spare. strips. • Check the air conditioning system. At least twice a year • Inspect and lubricate the automat- (i.e., every Spring and Fall): ic transaxle linkage and controls. • Check the radiator, heater and air • Clean the battery and terminals. conditioning hoses for leaks or • Check the brake fluid level. damage. • Check the windshield washer spray and wiper operation. Clean the wiper blades with clean cloth dampened with washer fluid. • Check the headlight alignment. • Check the muffler, exhaust pipes, shields and clamps. • Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear and function. • Check for worn tires and loose wheel lug nuts.

87 Maintenance

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE Follow the Normal Maintenance If your vehicle is operated under the Schedule if the vehicle is usually above conditions, you should operated where none of the following inspect, replace or refill more fre- conditions apply. If any of the follow- quently than the following Normal ing conditions apply, follow the Maintenance Schedule. After 120 Maintenance Under Severe Usage months or 150,000 miles continue to Conditions. follow the prescribed maintenance • Repeated short distance driving. intervals. • Driving in dusty conditions or sandy areas. • Extensive use of brakes. • Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are being used. • Driving on rough or muddy roads. • Driving in mountainous areas. • Extended periods of idling or low speed operation. • Driving for a prolonged period in cold temperatures and/or extremely humid climates. • More than 50% driving in heavy city traffic during hot weather above 90°F (32°C).

79 Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.

*1 lnspect "Water Pump" when replacing the drive belt or *5 When replacing coolant, use only a qualified coolant timing belt. additive for your vehicle and never mix hard water in *2 Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be the coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant maintenance free but periodic inspection is recom- mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine mended for this maintenance schedule depends on damage. fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters *6 If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are avail- starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately able from your authorized Kia dealer along with infor- regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an mation on how to use them. Do not mix other additives. authorized Kia dealer for details. *3 Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. *4 The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.

7 10 Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.) 7,500 miles or 6 months (Continued) ❑ Inspect air cleaner filter ❑ Replace engine oil and filter ❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refriger- (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months) ant and performance (if equipped) ❑ Add fuel additive *6 ❑ Inspect cooling system *1 (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months) ❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots ❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear ❑ Inspect visually the following items. (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months) 1) Battery condition 2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid ❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or 3) Brake lines, hoses and connections replace. 4) Brake pedal and operation 5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts 6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped) 7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped) 8) Exhaust pipe and muffler 9) Front suspension ball joints 10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses 11) Lubricate all locks and hinges 12) Parking brakes 13) Steering operation and linkage 14) Suspension mounting bolts (Continued)

711 Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.) 15,000 miles or 12 months (Continued) ❑ Inspect air cleaner filter ❑ Add fuel additive *6 ❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refriger- (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months) ant and performance (if equipped) ❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear ❑ Inspect cooling system *1 (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months) ❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots ❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or ❑ Inspect visually the following items replace. 1) Battery condition 2) Brake fluid / clutch(if equipped) fluid 3) Brake lines, hoses and connections 4) Brake pedal and operation 5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts 6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped) 7) Disc brakes and pads(if equipped) 8) Exhaust pipe and muffler 9) Front suspension ball joints 10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses 11) Lubricate all locks and hinges 12) Parking brakes 13) Steering operation and linkage 14) Suspension mounting bolts ❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped) ❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months) (Continued)

7 12 Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.) 30,000 miles or 24 months (Continued) ❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrig- 12) Parking brakes erant and performance (if equipped) 13) Steering operation and linkage ❑ Inspect cooling system *1 14) Suspension mounting bolts ❑ ❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots Replace air cleaner filter ❑ ❑ Inspect fuel filter *2 Replace climate control air filter (if equipped) ❑ ❑ Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection Replace engine oil and filter (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months) ❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter *2 ❑ Add fuel additive *6 ❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months) (Every 37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 48 months) ❑ ❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months) ❑ Inspect visually the following items 1) Battery condition ❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or 2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid replace. 3) Brake lines, hoses and connections 4) Brake pedal and operation 5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts 6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped) 7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped) 8) Exhaust pipe and muffler 9) Front suspension ball joints 10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses 11) Lubricate all locks and hinges (Continued)

713 Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.) 45,000 miles or 36 months (Continued) ❑ Inspect air cleaner filter ❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped) ❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrig- ❑ Replace engine oil and filter erant and performance (if equipped) (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months) ❑ Inspect cooling system *1 ❑ Add fuel additive *6 (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months) ❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots ❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear ❑ Inspect visually the following items (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months) 1) Battery condition 2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid ❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or 3) Brake lines, hoses and connections replace. 4) Brake pedal and operation 5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts 6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped) 7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped) 8) Exhaust pipe and muffler 9) Front suspension ball joints 10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses 11) Lubricate all locks and hinges 12) Parking brakes 13) Steering operation and linkage 14) Suspension mounting bolts (Continued)

7 14 Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.) 60,000 miles or 48 months (Continued) ❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrig- 8) Exhaust pipe and muffler erant and performance (if equipped) 9) Front suspension ball joints 10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses ❑ Inspect cooling system *1 11) Lubricate all locks and hinges ❑ Inspect drive belt *4 12) Parking brakes (First, 60,000 miles or 72 months 13) Steering operation and linkage after every 15,000 miles or 24 months) 14) Suspension mounting bolts ❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots ❑ Replace air cleaner filter ❑ Inspect fuel filter *2 ❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped) ❑ Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection ❑ Replace engine oil and filter ❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter *2 (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months) ❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap ❑ Add fuel additive *6 ❑ Inspect visually the following items (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months) 1) Battery condition ❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear 2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months) 3) Brake lines, hoses and connections 4) Brake pedal and operation ❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or 5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts replace. 6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped) 7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped) (Continued)

715 Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.) 75,000 miles or 60 months (Continued) ❑ Inspect air cleaner filter 8) Exhaust pipe and muffler ❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrig- 9) Front suspension ball joints erant and performance (if equipped) 10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses 11) Lubricate all locks and hinges ❑ 1 Inspect cooling system * 12) Parking brakes ❑ Inspect drive belt *4 13) Steering operation and linkage (First 60,000 miles or 72 months after 14) Suspension mounting bolts every 15,000 miles or 24 months) ❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped) ❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots ❑ Replace engine oil and filter ❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months) (Every 37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 48 months) ❑ Add fuel additive *6 ❑ Inspect visually the following items (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months) 1) Battery condition ❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear 2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months) 3) Brake lines, hoses and connections 4) Brake pedal and operation ❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or 5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts replace. 6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped) 7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped) (Continued)

7 16 Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.) 90,000 miles or 72 months (Continued) ❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refriger- 8) Exhaust pipe and muffler ant and performance (if equipped) 9) Front suspension ball joints ❑ Inspect cooling system *1 10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses ❑ Inspect drive belt *4 11) Lubricate all locks and hinges (First 60,000 miles or 72 months after 12) Parking brakes every 15,000 miles or 24 months) 13) Steering operation and linkage ❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots 14) Suspension mounting bolts ❑ Inspect fuel filter *2 ❑ Replace air cleaner filter ❑ Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection ❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped) ❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter *2 ❑ Replace engine oil and filter ❑ Inspect valve clearance (Engine 1.6) *3 (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months) (Every 90,000 miles or 72 months) ❑ Add fuel additive *6 ❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months) ❑ Inspect visually the following items ❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear 1) Battery condition (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months) 2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid ❈ 3) Brake lines, hoses and connections Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace. 4) Brake pedal and operation 5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts 6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped) 7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped) (Continued)

717 Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.) 105,000 miles or 84 months (Continued) ❑ Inspect air cleaner filter 11) Lubricate all locks and hinges ❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrig- 12) Parking brakes erant and performance (if equipped) 13) Steering operation and linkage 14) Suspension mounting bolts ❑ Inspect cooling system *1 ❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped) ❑ Inspect drive belt *4 (First 60,000 miles or 72 months after ❑ Replace engine oil and filter every 15,000 miles or 24 months) (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months) ❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots ❑ Add fuel additive *6 ❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months) (Every 37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 48 months) ❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated), ❑ Inspect visually the following items ❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear 1) Battery condition (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months) 2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid 3) Brake lines, hoses and connections ❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or 4) Brake pedal and operation replace. 5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts 6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped) 7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped) 8) Exhaust pipe and muffler 9) Front suspension ball joints 10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses (Continued)

7 18 Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.) 120,000 miles or 96 months (Continued) ❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrig- 10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses erant and performance (if equipped) 11) Lubricate all locks and hinges ❑ Inspect cooling system *1 12) Parking brakes 13) Steering operation and linkage ❑ 4 Inspect drive belt * 14) Suspension mounting bolts (First 60,000 miles or 72 months after every 15,000 miles or 24 months) ❑ Replace air cleaner filter ❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots ❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped) ❑ Inspect fuel filter *2 ❑ Replace engine coolant*5 (First, 120,000 miles or 120 months ❑ Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection after every 30,000 miles or 24 months) ❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter *2 ❑ Replace engine oil and filter ❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months) ❑ Inspect visually the following items ❑ Add fuel additive *6 (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months) 1) Battery condition 2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid ❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear 3) Brake lines, hoses and connections (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months) 4) Brake pedal and operation 5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts ❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or 6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped) replace. 7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped) 8) Exhaust pipe and muffler 9) Front suspension ball joints (Continued)

719 Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.) 135,000 miles or 108 months (Continued) ❑ Inspect air cleaner filter ❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped) ❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrig- ❑ Replace engine oil and filter erant and performance (if equipped) (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months) ❑ 1 Inspect cooling system * ❑ Add fuel additive *6 ❑ Inspect drive belt *4 (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months) (First 60,000 miles or 72 months after ❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear every 15,000 miles or 24 months) (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months) ❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots ❈ ❑ Inspect visually the following items Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or 1) Battery condition replace. 2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid 3) Brake lines, hoses and connections 4) Brake pedal and operation 5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts 6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped) 7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped) 8) Exhaust pipe and muffler 9) Front suspension ball joints 10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses 11) Lubricate all locks and hinges 12) Parking brakes 13) Steering operation and linkage 14) Suspension mounting bolts (Continued)

7 20 Maintenance

NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.) 150,000 miles or 120 months (Continued) ❑ Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrig- 8) Exhaust pipe and muffler erant and performance (if equipped) 9) Front suspension ball joints 10) Fuel tank, cap, lines and hoses ❑ Inspect cooling system *1 11) Lubricate all locks and hinges ❑ Inspect drive belt *4 12) Parking brakes (First 60,000 miles or 72 months after 13) Steering operation and linkage every 15,000 miles or 24 months) 14) Suspension mounting bolts ❑ Inspect drive shaft and boots ❑ Replace air cleaner filter ❑ Inspect fuel filter *2 ❑ Replace climate control air filter (if equipped) ❑ Inspect fuel line, hoses and connection ❑ Replace engine coolant *5 ❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter *2 (First 120,000 miles or 120 months after every 30,000 miles or 24 months) ❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) (Every 37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 48 months) ❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months) ❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap ❑ 6 ❑ Inspect visually the following items Add fuel additive * 1) Battery condition (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months) 2) Brake fluid / clutch (if equipped) fluid ❑ Rotate tires - including tire pressure and tread wear 3) Brake lines, hoses and connections (Every 7,500 miles or 12 months) 4) Brake pedal and operation 5) Chassis/body nuts and bolts ❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or 6) Drum brake and linings (if equipped) replace. 7) Disc brakes and pads (if equipped) (Continued) No check, No service required ❑ Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)

721 Maintenance

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals. R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE DRIVING MAINTENANCE ITEM OPERATION INTERVALS CONDITION ENGINE OIL AND FILTER R EVERY 3,750 miles OR 6 months A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K AIR CLEANER FILTER R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E SPARK PLUGS R MORE FREQUENTLY A, B, H, I, K DISC BRAKE/ PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H REAR BRAKE DRUMS/ LININGS, PARKING BRAKE I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/ LOWER I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, F, G, H, I ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BSALL JOINT DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS I EVERY 7,500 miles OR 6 months C, D, E, F, G, H MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL R EVERY 80,000 miles A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID R EVERY 60,000 miles A, C, E, F, G, H, I CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E (FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS A - Repeatedly driving shorts distanse of less than 5miles in normal E - Driving in sandy areas temperature or less than 10miles in freezing temperature F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C) B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread H - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack roads I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very J - Driving over 100 MPH cold weather K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions 7 22 Maintenance

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS Engine oil and filter Fuel filter (cartridge) Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con- The engine oil and filter should be A clogged filter can limit the speed at nections changed at the intervals specified in which the vehicle may be driven, Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and the maintenance schedule. If the damage the emission system and connections for leakage and dam- vehicle is being driven in severe con- cause multiple issues such as hard age. Have an authorized Kia dealer ditions, more frequent oil and filter starting. If an excessive amount of replace any damaged or leaking changes are required. foreign matter accumulates in the parts immediately. fuel tank, the filter may require replacement more frequently. Drive belts After installing a new filter, run the Vapor hose and fuel filler cap Inspect all drive belts for evidence of engine for several minutes, and The vapor hose and fuel filler cap cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil check for leaks at the connections. should be inspected at those inter- saturation and replace if necessary. Fuel filters should be installed by an vals specified in the maintenance Drive belts should be checked peri- authorized Kia dealer. schedule. Make sure that a new odically for proper tension and vapor hose or fuel filler cap is cor- adjusted as necessary. rectly replaced.

723 Maintenance

Vacuum crankcase ventilation Air cleaner filter Valve clearance (if equipped) hoses (if equipped) A Genuine Kia air cleaner filter is Inspect for excessive valve noise Inspect the surface of hoses for evi- recommended when the filter is and/or engine vibration and adjust if dence of heat and/or mechanical replaced. necessary. An authorized Kia dealer damage. Hard and brittle rubber, should perform the operation. cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterio- Spark plugs ration. Particular attention should be Make sure to install new spark plugs Cooling system paid to examine those hose surfaces of the correct heat range. Check the cooling system compo- nearest to high heat sources, such nents, such as the radiator, coolant as the exhaust manifold. reservoir, hoses and connections for Inspect the hose routing to assure leakage and damage. Replace any that the hoses do not come in con- damaged parts. tact with any heat source, sharp edges or moving components which Coolant might cause heat damage or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose The coolant should be changed at connections, such as clamps and the intervals specified in the mainte- couplings, to make sure they are nance schedule. secure, and that no leaks are present. Hoses should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of deterioration or damage.

7 24 Maintenance

Manual transaxle fluid ✽ NOTICE Brake hoses and lines (if equipped) Automatic transaxle fluid color is Visually check for proper installation, Inspect the manual transaxle fluid basically red. chafing, cracks, deterioration and according to the maintenance sched- As the vehicle is driven, the auto- any leakage. Replace any deteriorat- ule. matic transaxle fluid will begin to ed or damaged parts immediately. look darker. It is the normal condition and you Automatic transaxle fluid should not judge the need to replace Brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid (if equipped) the fluid based upon the changed Check the brake fluid level in the Automatic transaxle fluid should not color. brake fluid reservoir. The level should be checked under normal usage be between “MIN” and “MAX” marks conditions. on the side of the reservoir. Use only CAUTION - Transaxle hydraulic brake fluid conforming to But in severe conditions, the fluid fluids DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification. should be changed at an authorized The use of a non-specified fluid Kia dealer in accordance to the could result in transaxle mal- scheduled maintenance at the begin- function and failure. Parking brake ning of this section. Inspect the parking brake system including the parking brake lever (or pedal) and cables.

725 Maintenance

Brake discs, pads, calipers Suspension mounting bolts Drive shafts and boots and rotors Check the suspension connections Check the drive shafts, boots and Check the pads for excessive wear, for looseness or damage. Retighten clamps for cracks, deterioration, or discs for run out and wear, and to the specified torque. damage. Replace any damaged calipers for fluid leakage. parts and, if necessary, repack the grease. For more information on checking Steering gear box, linkage & the pads or lining wear limit, we rec- boots/lower arm ball joint ommend you to refer to the Kia web- Air conditioning refrigerant site. With the vehicle stopped and engine (http://www.kiatechinfo.com) off, check for excessive free-play in Check the air conditioning lines and the steering wheel. connections for leakage and damage. Exhaust pipe and muffler Check the linkage for bends or damage. Check the dust boots and ball Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, joints for deterioration, cracks, or muffler and hangers for cracks, dete- damage. Replace any damaged rioration, or damage. Start the parts. engine and listen carefully for any exhaust gas leakage. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.

7 26 Maintenance

ENGINE OIL Checking the engine oil level 3. Turn the engine off and wait for a ■ Type A ■ Type A few minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to return to the oil pan. 4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and re-insert it fully.

WARNING - Radiator hose Be very careful not to touch the OAM072003 radiator hose when checking or ■ Type B OAM072001 adding the engine oil as it may ■ Type B be hot enough to burn you.

5. Pull the dipstick out again and check the level. The level should be between F and L.

CAUTION - Replacing engin oil • Do not overfill the engine oil. It OPS073004 OPS073003 may damage the engine. If it is near or at L, add enough oil to 1. Be sure the vehicle is on level • Do not spill engine oil, when bring the level to F. Do not overfill. ground. adding or changing engine 2. Start the engine and allow it to oil. If you drop the engine oil Use a funnel to help prevent oil reach normal operating tempera- on the engine room, wipe it off from being spilled on engine com- ture. immediately. ponents.

727 Maintenance

Use only the specified engine oil. Changing the engine oil and (Refer to “Recommended lubricants filter and capacities” in chapter 8.) Have engine oil and filter changed by an authorized Kia dealer according to the Maintenance Schedule at the beginning of this chapter.

CALIFORNIA PROPO- SITION 65 WARNING Engine oil contains chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects and reproductive harm. Used engine oil may cause irritation or cancer of the skin if left in contact with the skin for prolonged periods of time. Always protect your skin by washing your hands thoroughly with soap and warm water as soon as possible after handling used oil.

7 28 Maintenance

ENGINE COOLANT The high-pressure cooling system Checking the coolant level Turn the engine off and wait until it has a reservoir filled with year round cools down. Use extreme care when antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is WARNING removing the radiator cap. Wrap a filled at the factory. thick towel around it, and turn it Removing radiator counterclockwise slowly to the first Check the antifreeze protection and cap coolant level at least once a year, at stop. Step back while the pressure is the beginning of the winter season, released from the cooling system. and before traveling to a colder cli- When you are sure all the pressure mate. Never attempt to remove the has been released, press down on radiator cap while the engine is the cap, using a thick towel, and con- operating or hot. Doing so tinue turning counterclockwise to might lead to cooling system remove it. and engine damage and could result in serious personal injury from escaping hot coolant or steam.

729 Maintenance

Recommended engine coolant WARNING - Cooling fan • When adding coolant, use only Use caution when deionized water or soft water for working near the your vehicle and never mix hard blade of the cooling water in the coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture fan. The electric can result in serious malfunction or motor (cooling fan) is engine damage. controlled by engine coolant • The engine in your vehicle has alu- temperature, refrigerant pres- minum engine parts and must be sure and vehicle speed. it may protected by an ethylene-glycol- sometimes operate even when based coolant to prevent corrosion the engine is not running. OAM072005 and freezing. Check the condition and connections • DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol of all cooling system hoses and coolant or mix them with the spec- heater hoses. Replace any swollen ified coolant. or deteriorated hoses. • Do not use a solution that contains more than 60% antifreeze or less The coolant level should be filled than 35% antifreeze, which would between F and L marks on the side reduce the effectiveness of the of the coolant reservoir when the solution. engine is cool. If the coolant level is low, add enough specified coolant to provide protection against freezing and corrosion. Bring the level to F, but do not overfill. If frequent additions are required, see an authorized Kia dealer for a cooling system inspection.

7 30 Maintenance

For mixture percentage, refer to the Changing the coolant following table. Have the coolant changed by an Mixture Percentage authorized Kia dealer according to Ambient (volume) the Maintenance Schedule at the Temperature beginning of this chapter. Antifreeze Water 5°F (-15°C) 35 65 Put a thick cloth around the radiator cap before refilling the coolant in -13°F (-25°C) 40 60 order to prevent the coolant from -31°F (-35°C) 50 50 overflowing into engine parts such as -49°F (-45°C) 60 40 the alternator.

OPS073005

WARNING Radiator cap

Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine and radiator are hot. Scalding hot coolant and steam may blow out under pressure which may result in serious injury.

731 Maintenance

BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID Checking the brake/clutch* Never mix different types of fluid. fluid level CAUTION - Proper fluid Only use brake fluid in brake In the event the brake/clutch* system system. Small amounts of requires frequent additions of fluid, improper fluids (such as engine the vehicle should be inspected by oil) can cause damage to the an authorized Kia dealer. brake system.

When changing and adding If the level is low, add fluid to the brake/clutch* fluid, handle it carefully. MAX level. The level will fall with Do not let it come in contact with accumulated mileage. This is a nor- your eyes. If brake/ clutch* fluid mal condition associated with the should come in contact with your wear of the brake linings and/or eyes, immediately flush them with a OXM079008 clutch disc (if equipped). If the fluid large quantity of fresh tap water. level is excessively low, have the Check the fluid level in the reservoir Have your eyes examined by a doc- brake/clutch* system checked by an tor as soon as possible. periodically. The fluid level should be authorized KIA dealer. between MAX and MIN marks on the side of the reservoir. Before removing the reservoir cap Use only the specified brake/clutch* and adding brake/clutch* fluid, clean fluid. (Refer to “Recommended lubri- the area around the reservoir cap cants and capacities” in chapter 8.) thoroughly to prevent brake/clutch* fluid contamination. * if equipped

7 32 Maintenance

CAUTION - Brake/clutch* fluid Do not allow brake/clutch* fluid to contact the vehicle's body paint, as paint damage will result.

Brake/clutch* fluid, which has been exposed to open air for an extended time should never be used as its quality cannot be guaranteed. It should be disposed of properly.

733 Maintenance

WASHER FLUID PARKING BRAKE Checking the washer fluid Check the fluid level in the washer Checking the parking brake level fluid reservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plain water may be used if ■ Type A washer fluid is not available. However, use washer solvent with antifreeze characteristics in cold climates to prevent freezing.

WARNING - Flammable Fluid Do not allow the washer fluid to come in contact with open OPS073006 OPS053011 ■ flames or sparks.The windshield Type B washer fluid reservoir is flammable under certain circumstances. Check the stroke of the parking This can result in a fire. brake by counting the number of “clicks’’ heard while fully applying it from the released position. Also, the parking brake alone should securely hold the vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the stroke is more or less than specified, have the parking brake adjusted by an authorized Kia OPS073007 dealer. The reservoir is translucent so that you can check the level with a quick Stroke : 6~8 “clicks’’ at a force of visual inspection. 44 lbs (20 kg, 196 N).

7 34 Maintenance

AIR CLEANER Filter replacement

OAM079044 OAM079046

OAM079043 1. Loosen the air cleaner cover 2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner. attaching clips and open the cover. 3. Replace the air cleaner filter. It must be replaced when necessary, and should not be washed. 4. Lock the cover with the cover attaching clips. You can clean the filter when inspect- ing the air cleaner element. Clean the filter by using compressed air.

735 Maintenance

Replace the filter according to the Maintenance Schedule. CAUTION - Air filter main- If the vehicle is operated in extreme- tenance ly dusty or sandy areas, replace the • Do not drive with the air clean- element more often than the usual er removed; this will result in recommended intervals. (Refer to excessive engine wear. “Maintenance under severe usage • When removing the air cleaner conditions” in this chapter.) filter, be careful that dust or dirt does not enter the air intake, or damage may result. • Use a Kia genuine part. Use of non-genuine parts could damage the air flow sensor.

7 36 Maintenance

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED) Filter inspection The climate control air filter should be replaced according to the maintenance schedule. If the vehicle is operated in severely air-polluted cities or on dusty rough roads for a long period, it should be inspected more frequently and replaced earlier. When you replace the climate control air filter, replace it performing the following procedure, and be careful to avoid damaging other components. OPS073008 OPS073009 1. Open the glove box. 2. With the glove box open, remove the Air filter cover.

737 Maintenance

OPS073010 OPS073011 3. Remove the climate control air fil- 4. Replace the climate control air filter. ter case by pulling out both sides 5. Reassemble in the reverse order of the cover. of disassembly.

When replacing the climate control air filter install it properly. Otherwise, the system may produce noise and the effectiveness of the filter may be reduced.

7 38 Maintenance

WIPER BLADES Blade inspection Contamination of either the wind- Blade replacement shield or the wiper blades with for- When the wipers no longer clean eign matter can reduce the effective- adequately, the blades may be worn ness of the windshield wipers. or cracked, and require replacement. Common sources of contamination are insects, tree sap, and hot wax To prevent damage to the wiper arms treatments used by some commer- or other components, do not attempt cial vehicle washes. If the blades are to move the wipers manually. not wiping properly, clean both the The use of a non-specified wiper window and the blades with a good blade could result in wiper malfunc- cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse tion and failure. thoroughly with clean water.

1JBA5122 CAUTION - Wiper blades Commercial hot waxes applied by To prevent damage to the wiper automatic vehicle washes have been blades, do not use gasoline, known to make the windshield diffi- kerosene, paint thinner, or other cult to clean. solvents on or near them.

739 Maintenance

Front windshield wiper blade

1JBA7037

OHM078059

1LDA5023 Type B Type A 1. Raise the wiper arm. 1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the wiper blade assembly to expose CAUTION - Wiper arms the plastic locking clip. Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against the windshield, CAUTION - Wiper arms since it may chip or crack the 1JBA7038 windshield. Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against the windshield, 2. Compress the clip and slide the since it may chip or crack the blade assembly downward. windshield. 3. Lift it off the arm. 4. Install the blade assembly in the reverse order of removal.

7 40 Maintenance

Rear window wiper blade

OHM078060 OHM078061

2. Lift up the wiper blade clip. Then 3. Install the new blade assembly in OHM078062 pull down the blade assembly and the reverse order of removal. remove it. 1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out the wiper blade assembly.

741 Maintenance

OHM078063 2. Install the new blade assembly by inserting the center part into the slot in the wiper arm until it clicks into place. 3. Make sure the blade assembly is installed firmly by trying to pull it slightly. To prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components, have an authorized Kia dealer replace the wiper blade.

7 42 Maintenance

BATTERY For best battery service Always read the following WARNING - Risk of instructions carefully when explosion handling a battery. Keep lit cigarettes and If any electrolyte gets into all other flames or your eyes, flush your eyes sparks away from the with clean water for at least battery. 15 minutes and get immedi- The battery contains ate medical attention. hydrogen -- a highly If electrolyte gets on your combustible gas which skin, thoroughly wash the will explode if it comes contacted area. If you feel in contact with a flame or pain or burning sensation, OXM079100 spark. get medical attention imme- Keep batteries out of the diately. • Keep the battery securely mount- reach of children An inappropriately disposed ed. because batteries con- battery can be harmful to the • Keep the battery top clean and dry. tain highly corrosive environment and human • Keep the terminals and connec- SULFURIC ACID and health. Dispose the battery tions clean, tight, and coated with electrolytes. Do not according to your local law(s) petroleum jelly or terminal grease. allow battery acid to or regulation. • Rinse any spilled electrolyte from contact your skin, eyes, Never attempt to recharge the bat- the battery immediately with a clothing or paint finish. tery when the battery cables are con- solution of water and baking soda. Wear eye protection nected. • If the vehicle is not going to be when charging or work- used for an extended time, discon- ing near a battery. nect the battery cables. Always provide ventilation when working in an enclosed space.

743 Maintenance

✽ NOTICE Battery recharging - Risk of elec- WARNING If you connect unauthorized elec- Your vehicle has a maintenance-free, trocution tronic devices to the battery, the bat- calcium-based battery. Never touch the electrical igni- tery may be discharged. Never use • If the battery becomes discharged tion system while the vehicle is unauthorized devices. in a short time (because, for exam- running. This system works ple, the headlights or interior lights with high voltage which can were left on while the vehicle was "zap" you. not in use), recharge it by slow charging (trickle) for 10 hours. • If the battery gradually discharges CALIFORNIA PROPO- because of high electric load while SITION 65 WARNING the vehicle is being used, recharge Battery posts, terminals, and it at 20-30A for two hours. related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects and reproductive harm. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer. Wash hands after handling.

7 44 Maintenance

When recharging the battery, 1.Turn off the battery charger main Reset items observe the following precautions: switch. Items should be reset after the bat- • The battery must be removed from 2.Unhook the negative clamp from tery has been discharged or the bat- the vehicle and placed in an area the negative battery terminal. tery has been disconnected. with good ventilation. 3.Unhook the positive clamp from • Auto up/down window • Do not allow cigarettes, sparks, or the positive battery terminal. (See chapter 4) flame near the battery. • Before performing maintenance or • Sunroof (See chapter 4) • Watch the battery during charging, recharging the battery, turn off all • Trip computer (See chapter 4) and stop or reduce the charging accessories and stop the engine. rate if the battery cells begin • Climate control system • The negative battery cable must be (See chapter 4) gassing (boiling) violently or if the removed first and installed last temperature of the electrolyte of when the battery is disconnected. • Clock (See chapter 4) any cell exceeds 120°F (49°C). • Audio (See chapter 4) • Wear eye protection when checking the battery during charging. • Disconnect the battery charger in the following order.

745 Maintenance

TIRES AND WHEELS Tire care - Tire under For proper maintenance, safety, and WARNING maximum fuel economy, you must inflation always maintain recommended tire Inflate your tire consistent with inflation pressures and stay within the instructions provided in this the load limits and weight distribution manual. Severe under inflation recommended for your vehicle. can lead to severe heat buildup, causing blowouts, tread separation and other tire fail- Recommended cold tire infla- ures that can result in the loss tion pressures of vehicle control. This risk is All tire pressures (including the OXM079101L much higher on hot days and spare) should be checked when the All specifications (sizes and pres- when driving for long periods at tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the sures) can be found on a label high speeds. vehicle has not been driven for at attached to the driver’s side center least three hours or driven less than pillar. one mile (1.6 km). Recommended pressures must be maintained for the best ride, vehicle handling, and minimum tire wear. For recommended inflation pressure, refer to “Tire and wheels” in chapter 8.

7 46 Maintenance

• Underinflation also results in Always observe the following: Checking tire inflation pressure excessive wear, poor handling and • Check tire pressure when the tires Check your tires once a month or reduced fuel economy. Wheel are cold. (After vehicle has been more. deformation also is possible. Keep parked for at least three hours or your tire pressures at the proper Also, check the tire pressure of the hasn't been driven more than one spare tire. levels. If a tire frequently needs mile (1.6 km) since startup.) refilling, have it checked by an authorized Kia dealer. • Check the pressure of your spare tire each time you check the pres- How to check • Overinflation produces a harsh sure of other tires. Use a good quality gauge to check ride, excessive wear at the center tire pressure. You cannot tell if your of the tire tread, and a greater pos- • Never overload your vehicle. Be careful not to overload a vehicle tires are properly inflated simply by sibility of damage from road haz- looking at them. Radial tires may ards. luggage rack if your vehicle is equipped with one. look properly inflated even when • Warm tires normally exceed rec- they're underinflated. ommended cold tire pressures by 4 Check the tire's inflation pressure to 6 psi (28 to 41 kPa). Do not when the tires are cold. - "Cold" release air from warm tires to means your vehicle has been sitting adjust the pressure or the tires will for at least three hours or driven no be underinflated. more than 1 mile (1.6 km). • Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation valve caps. Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If a valve cap is missing, install a new one as soon as possible.

747 Maintenance

Remove the valve cap from the tire • Inspect your tires frequently for Tire rotation valve stem. Press the tire gauge firm- proper inflation as well as wear and To equalize tread wear, it is recom- ly onto the valve to get a pressure damage. Always use a tire pres- mended that the tires be rotated every measurement. If the cold tire inflation sure gauge. 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or sooner if pressure matches the recommended • Tires with too much or too little irregular wear develops. pressure on the tire and loading pressure wear unevenly causing information label, no further adjust- During rotation, check the tires for cor- poor handling, loss of vehicle con- rect balance. ment is necessary. If the pressure is trol, and sudden tire failure leading low, add air until you reach the rec- to accidents, injuries, and even When rotating tires, check for uneven ommended amount. death. The recommended cold tire wear and damage. Abnormal wear is If you overfill the tire, release air by pressure for your vehicle can be usually caused by incorrect tire pres- pushing on the metal stem in the found in this manual and on the tire sure, improper wheel alignment, out- center of the tire valve. Recheck the label located on the driver's side of-balance wheels, severe braking or tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be center pillar. severe cornering. Look for bumps or bulges in the tread or side of tire. sure to put the valve caps back on • Remember to check the pressure the valve stems. They help prevent Replace the tire if you find either of of your spare tire. Kia recommends these conditions. Replace the tire if leaks by keeping out dirt and mois- that you check the spare every ture. fabric or cord is visible. After rotation, time you check the pressure of the be sure to bring the front and rear tire other tires on your vehicle. pressures to specification and check lug nut tightness. Refer to “Tire and wheels” in chapter 8.

7 48 Maintenance

Without a spare tire Disc brake pads should be inspected Wheel alignment and tire bal- for wear whenever tires are rotated. ance The wheels on your vehicle were Rotate radial tires that have an aligned and balanced carefully at the asymmetric tread pattern only from factory to give you the longest tire life front to rear and not from right to left. and best overall performance. • Do not use the compact spare tire In most cases, you will not need to (if equipped) for tire rotation. have your wheels aligned again. However, if you notice unusual tire S2BLA790A wear or your vehicle pulling one way Directional tires (if equipped) WARNING - Mixing tires or the other, the alignment may need Do not mix bias ply and radial to be reset. ply tires under any circum- If you notice your vehicle vibrating stances. This may cause unusu- when driving on a smooth road, your al handling characteristics. wheels may need to be rebalanced.

CAUTION - Wheel weight Improper wheel weights can damage your vehicle's alu- CBGQ0707A minum wheels. Use only approved wheel weights.

749 Maintenance

Tire replacement The ABS works by comparing the Compact spare tire replacement speed of the wheels. The tire size A compact spare tire has a shorter Tread wear indicator affects wheel speed. When replacing tread life than a regular size tire. tires, all 4 tires must use the same Replace it when you can see the size originally supplied with the vehi- tread wear indicator bars on the tire. cle. Using tires of a different size can The replacement compact spare tire cause the ABS (Anti-lock Brake should be the same size and design System) and ESC (Electronic tire as the one provided with your Stability Control) to work irregularly. new vehicle and should be mounted on the same compact spare tire wheel. The compact spare tire is not designed to be mounted on a regular OEN076053 size wheel, and the compact spare tire wheel is not designed for mount- If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear ing a regular size tire. indicator will appear as a solid band across the tread. This shows there is less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. Replace the tire when this happens. Do not wait for the band to appear across the entire tread before replacing the tire.

7 50 Maintenance

Wheel replacement Tire traction Tire sidewall labeling

When replacing the metal wheels for Tire traction can be reduced if you 1 any reason, make sure the new drive on worn tires, tires that are wheels are equivalent to the original improperly inflated or on slippery 5,6 factory units in diameter, rim width road surfaces. Tires should be 7 and offset. replaced when tread wear indicators A wheel that is not the correct size appear. Slow down whenever there 4 may adversely affect wheel and is rain, snow or ice on the road to bearing life, braking and stopping reduce the possibility of losing con- 2 abilities, handling characteristics, trol of the vehicle. 3 ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, snow chain clearance, Tire maintenance speedometer and odometer calibra- 1 I030B04JM tion, headlight aim and bumper In addition to proper inflation, correct height. wheel alignment helps to decrease This information identifies and tire wear. If you find a tire is worn describes the fundamental charac- unevenly, have your dealer check the teristics of the tire and also provides CAUTION - Wheels wheel alignment. the tire identification number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The Wheels that do not meet Kia When you have new tires installed, make sure they are balanced. This TIN can be used to identify the tire in specifications may fit poorly case of a recall. and result in damage to the will increase vehicle ride comfort and vehicle or unusual handling and tire life. Additionally, a tire should poor vehicle control. always be rebalanced if it is removed 1. Manufacturer or brand name from the wheel. Manufacturer or Brand name is shown.

751 Maintenance

2. Tire size designation P - Applicable vehicle type (tires Wheel size designation A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire marked with the prefix “P’’ are Wheels are also marked with impor- size designation. You will need this intended for use on passenger tant information that you need if you information when selecting replace- vehicles or light trucks; however, ever have to replace one. The follow- ment tires for your vehicle. The fol- not all tires have this marking). ing explains what the letters and lowing explains what the letters and 235 - Tire width in millimeters. numbers in the wheel size designa- numbers in the tire size designation 65 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section tion mean. mean. height as a percentage of its Example tire size designation: width. Example wheel size designation: (These numbers are provided as an R - Tire construction code (Radial). 7.0JX17 example only; your tire size designa- 17 - Rim diameter in inches. tor could vary depending on your vehicle.) 108 - Load Index, a numerical code 7.0 - Rim width in inches. associated with the maximum J - Rim contour designation. P235/65R17 108T load the tire can carry. 17 - Rim diameter in inches. T - Speed Rating Symbol. See the speed rating chart in this section for additional information.

7 52 Maintenance

Tire speed ratings 3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire WARNING - Tire age The chart below lists many of the dif- Identification Number) ferent speed ratings currently being Any tires that are over 6 years old, Replace tires within the recom- used for passenger vehicle tires. The based on the manufacturing date, mended time frame. Failure to speed rating is part of the tire size (including the spare tire) should be replace tires as recommended designation on the sidewall of the replaced by new ones. You can find can result in sudden tire failure, tire. This symbol corresponds to that the manufacturing date on the tire which could lead to a loss of tire's designed maximum safe oper- sidewall (possibly on the inside of the control and an accident. ating speed. wheel), displaying the DOT Code. The DOT Code is a series of num- Speed bers on a tire consisting of numbers Rating Maximum Speed and English letters. The manufactur- Symbol ing date is designated by the last four S 112 mph (180 km/h) digits (characters) of the DOT code. T 118 mph (190 km/h) H 130 mph (210 km/h) DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO V 149 mph (240 km/h) The front part of the DOT means a Z Above 149 mph (240 km/h) plant code number, tire size and tread pattern and the last four numbers indicate week and year manufactured. For example: DOT XXXX XXXX 1614 represents that the tire was produced in the 16th week of 2014.

753 Maintenance

4. Tire ply composition and mate- 6. Maximum load rating Tread wear rial This number indicates the maximum The tread wear grade is a compara- The number of layers or plies of rub- load in kilograms and pounds that tive rating based on the wear rate of ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire can be carried by the tire. When the tire when tested under controlled manufacturers also must indicate the replacing the tires on the vehicle, conditions on a specified govern- materials in the tire, which include always use a tire that has the same ment test course. For example, a tire steel, nylon, polyester, and others. load rating as the factory installed graded 150 would wear one-and-a- The letter "R" means radial ply con- tire. half times (1½) as well on the gov- struction; the letter "D" means diago- ernment course as a tire graded 100. nal or bias ply construction; and the 7. Uniform tire quality grading The relative performance of tires letter "B" means belted-bias ply con- depends upon the actual conditions struction. Quality grades can be found where of their use, however, and may applicable on the tire sidewall depart significantly from the norm between tread shoulder and maxi- due to variations in driving habits, 5. Maximum permissible inflation mum section width. pressure service practices and differences in For example: road characteristics and climate. This number is the greatest amount TREADWEAR 200 of air pressure that should be put in These grades are molded on the the tire. Do not exceed the maximum TRACTION AA side-walls of passenger vehicle tires. permissible inflation pressure. Refer TEMPERATURE A The tires available as standard or to the Tire and Loading Information optional equipment on your vehicle Tires degrade over time, even when may vary with respect to grade. label for recommended inflation they are not being used. Regardless pressure. of the remaining tread, we recommend that tires be replaced after approximately six (6) years of normal service. Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process.

7 54 Maintenance

Traction - AA, A, B & C Temperature -A, B & C Tire terminology and definitions The traction grades, from highest to The temperature grades are A (the Air Pressure: The amount of air lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those highest), B and C representing the inside the tire pressing outward on grades represent the tire’s ability to tire’s resistance to the generation of the tire. Air pressure is expressed in stop on wet pavement as measured heat and its ability to dissipate heat pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo- under controlled conditions on spec- when tested under controlled condi- pascal (kPa). ified government test surfaces of tions on a specified indoor laboratory Accessory Weight: This means the asphalt and concrete. A tire marked test wheel. combined weight of optional acces- C may have poor traction perform- Sustained high temperature can sories. Some examples of optional ance. cause the material of the tire to accessories are, automatic The traction grade assigned to this degenerate and reduce tire life, and transaxle, power seats, and air con- tire is based on straight-ahead brak- excessive temperature can lead to ditioning. ing traction tests, and does not sudden tire failure. The grade C cor- Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a include acceleration, cornering, responds to a level of performance tire's height to its width. hydroplaning, or peak traction char- which all passenger vehicle tires Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords acteristics. must meet under the Federal Motor that is located between the plies and Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. the tread. Cords may be made from Grades B and A represent higher steel or other reinforcing materials. levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum Bead: The tire bead contains steel required by law. wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim. Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

755 Maintenance

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of Intended Outboard Sidewall: The Occupant Distribution: Designated air pressure in a tire, measured in side of an asymmetrical tire, that seating positions. pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo- must always face outward when Outward Facing Sidewall: The side pascals (kPa) before a tire has built mounted on a vehicle. of a asymmetrical tire that has a par- up heat from driving. Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for ticular side that faces outward when Curb Weight: This means the weight air pressure. mounted on a vehicle. The outward of a motor vehicle with standard and Load Index: An assigned number facing sidewall bears white lettering optional equipment including the ranging from 1 to 279 that corre- or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or maximum capacity of fuel, oil and sponds to the load carrying capacity model name molding that is higher or coolant, but without passengers and of a tire. deeper than the same moldings on cargo. the inner facing sidewall. Maximum Inflation Pressure: The DOT Markings: A code molded into maximum air pressure to which a Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire the sidewall of a tire signifying that cold tire may be inflated. The maxi- used on passenger cars and some the tire is in compliance with the U.S. mum air pressure is molded onto the light duty trucks and multipurpose Department of Transportation motor sidewall. vehicles. vehicle safety standards. The DOT Maximum Load Rating: The load Recommended Inflation Pressure: code includes the Tire Identification Vehicle manufacturer's recommend- Number (TIN), an alphanumeric des- rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that ed tire inflation pressure and shown ignator which can also identify the on the tire placard. tire manufacturer, production plant, tire. brand and date of production. Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating The sum of curb weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight; and beads are laid at 90 degrees to the GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight production options weight. centerline of the tread. Rating for the Front Axle. Normal Occupant Weight:The Rim: A metal support for a tire and GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight number of occupants a vehicle is upon which the tire beads are seated. Rating for the Rear axle. designed to seat multiplied by 150 Sidewall: The portion of a tire pounds (68 kg). between the tread and the bead.

7 56 Maintenance

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric Vehicle Maximum Load on the All season tires code assigned to a tire indicating the Tire: Load on an individual tire due to Kia specifies all season tires on maximum speed at which a tire can curb and accessory weight plus some models to provide good per- operate. maximum occupant and cargo formance for use all year round, Traction: The friction between the weight. including snowy and icy road condi- tire and the road surface. The Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire: tions. All season tires are identified amount of grip provided. Load on an individual tire that is by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud Tread: The portion of a tire that determined by distributing to each and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow comes into contact with the road. axle its share of the curb weight, tires have better snow traction than accessory weight, and normal occu- all season tires and may be more Treadwear Indicators: Narrow pant weight and driving by 2. bands, sometimes called "wear appropriate in some areas. bars," that show across the tread of a Vehicle Placard: A label permanent- ly attached to a vehicle showing the tire when only 2/32 inch of tread Summer tires remains. original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure. UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Kia specifies summer tires on some Grading Standards, a tire information models to provide superior perform- system that provides consumers with ance on dry roads. Summer tire per- ratings for a tire's traction, tempera- formance is substantially reduced in ture and treadwear. Ratings are snow and ice. Summer tires do not determined by tire manufacturers have the tire traction rating M+S using government testing proce- (Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall. dures. The ratings are molded into if you plan to operate your vehicle in the sidewall of the tire. snowy or icy conditions, Kia recommends the use of snow tires or all Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num- season tires on all four wheels. ber of designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the rated cargo and luggage load.

757 Maintenance

Snow tires Tire chains • When driving on roads covered If you equip your vehicle with snow Tire chains, if necessary, should be with snow or ice, drive at less than tires, they should be the same size installed on the front wheels. 20 mph (30 km/h). and have the same load capacity as Be sure that the chains are installed • Use the SAE “S” class or wire the original tires. Snow tires should in accordance with the manufactur- chains. be installed on all four wheels; other- er's instructions. • If you hear noise caused by chains wise, poor handling may result. To minimize tire and chain wear, do contacting the body, retighten the Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28 not continue to use tire chains when chain to avoid contact with the kPa) more air pressure than the they are no longer needed. vehicle body. pressure recommended for the stan- • To prevent body damage, retighten dard tires on the tire label on the dri- the chains after driving 0.3~0.6 ver's side of the center pillar, or up to miles (0.5~1.0 km). the maximum pressure shown on the • Do not use tire chains on vehicles tire sidewall, whichever is less. equipped with aluminum wheels. Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120 In unavoidable circumstance, use km/h) when your vehicle is equipped a wire type chain. with snow tires. • Use wire chains less than 0.59 inches (15 mm) to prevent damage to the chain’s connection.

7 58 Maintenance

Radial-ply tires Longer wearing tires can be more Low aspect ratio tire Radial-ply tires provide improved susceptible to irregular tread wear. It (if equipped) tread life, road hazard resistance and is very important to follow the tire Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect smoother high speed ride. The radi- rotation interval shown in this section ratio is lower than 50, are provided al-ply tires used on this vehicle are of to achieve the tread life potential of for sporty looks. these tires. Cuts and punctures in belted construction, and are selected Because the low aspect ratio tires to complement the ride and handling radial-ply tires are repairable only in the tread area, because of sidewall are optimized for handling and brak- characteristics of your vehicle. ing, it may be more uncomfortable to Radial-ply tires have the same load flexing. Consult your tire dealer for radial-ply tire repairs. ride in and there is more noise com- carrying capacity, as bias-ply or bias pare with normal tires. belted tires of the same size, and use the same recommended inflation pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires with bias-ply or bias belted tires is not recommended. Any combina- tions of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias belted tires when used on the same vehicle will seriously deteriorate vehicle handling. The best rule to follow is: Identical radial-ply tires should always be used as a set of four.

759 Maintenance

CAUTION CAUTION Because the sidewall of the low • It is not easy to recognize the aspect ratio tire is shorter than tire damage with your own the normal, the wheel and tire of eyes. But if there is the slight- the low aspect ratio tire is easi- est hint of tire damage, even er to be damaged. So, follow the though you cannot see the tire instructions below. damage with your own eyes, - When driving on a rough road have the tire checked or or off road, drive cautiously replaced because the tire because tires and wheels may damage may cause air leak- be damaged. And after driving, age from the tire. inspect tires and wheels. • If the tire is damaged by driv- - When passing over a pothole, ing on a rough road, off road, speed bump, manhole, or curb pothole, manhole, or curb stone, drive slowly so that the stone, it will not be covered by tires and wheels are not dam- the warranty. aged. • You can find out the tire infor- - If the tire is impacted, we rec- mation on the tire sidewall. ommend that you inspect the tire condition or contact an authorized Kia dealer. - To prevent damage to the tire, inspect the tire condition and pressure every 1,900 miles (3,000 km).

7 60 Maintenance

FUSES ■ Micro mini type A vehicle’s electrical system is protected from electrical overload dam- WARNING - Fuse Blown age by fuses. replacement This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels, • Never replace a fuse with anyone located in the driver’s side panel thing but another fuse of the bolster, the other in the engine com- same rating. Normal partment near the battery. • A higher capacity fuse could ■ Cartridge type If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces- cause damage and possibly a Blown sories, or controls do not work, check fire. the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse • Never install a wire or alu- has blown, the element inside the minum foil instead of the fuse will melt. proper fuse - even as a tem- Normal If the electrical system does not porary repair. It may cause work, first check the driver’s side extensive wiring damage and ■ Multi fuse fuse panel. a possible fire. Blown Always replace a blown fuse with • Replace the fuse with the igni- one of the same rating. tion “OFF”, switch off of all If the replacement fuse blows, this electrical devices and then indicates an electrical problem. Avoid separation (-) terminal from using the system involved and imme- the battery in a safe place. Normal diately consult an authorized Kia OPS073054 dealer. Three kinds of fuses are used: micro mini type for lower amperage rating, cartridge type, and multi fuse for higher amperage ratings.

761 Maintenance

Inner panel fuse replacement CAUTION WARNING - Fuse fire Do not use a screwdriver or any • When replacing a blown fuse other metal object to remove or relay with a new one, make fuses because it may cause a sure the new fuse or relay fits short circuit and damage the tightly into the clips The system. incomplete fastening fuse or relay may cause the vehicle ✽ NOTICE wiring and electric systems damage and a possible fire. The actual fuse/relay panel label may differ from equipped items. • Do not remove fuses, relays and terminals fastened with bolts or nuts. The fuses, relays OPS073014 and terminals may be fastened incompletely, and it may cause 1. Turn the ignition switch and all a possible fire. If fuses, relays other switches off. and terminals fastened with 2. Open the fuse panel cover. bolts or nuts are blown, we recommend that you consult with an authorized Kia dealer.

7 62 Maintenance

If you do not have a spare, use a Fuse switch fuse of the same rating from a circuit you may not need for operating the vehicle, such as the power outlet fuse. If the headlights or other electrical components do not work and the fuses are OK, check the fuse panel in the engine compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must be replaced.

OPS073017 3. Pull the suspected fuse straight OPS073015 out. Use the fuse puller provided on the engine compartment fuse Always, put the fuse switch at the ON panel cover. position. 4. Check the removed fuse; replace it If you move the switch to the OFF if it is blown. position, some items such as audio and digital clock must be reset and Spare fuses are provided in the transmitter (or smart key) may not engine compartment fuse panel. work properly. 5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult an authorized Kia dealer.

763 Maintenance

✽ NOTICE Engine compartment fuse replacement CAUTION - Fuse panel If you need to park your vehicle for covers prolonged periods more than 1 month, move the transportation fuse After checking the fuse panel in switch to the OFF position to pre- the engine compartment, vent the battery being discharged. securely install the fuse panel cover with using cover locking sound. If not, electrical failures may occur from water contact.

OPS073016 1. Turn the ignition switch and all other switches off. 2. Remove the fuse panel cover by pressing the tab and pulling the cover up. 3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it is blown. To remove or insert the fuse, use the fuse puller in the engine compartment fuse panel. 4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult an authorized Kia dealer.

7 64 Maintenance

Multi fuse

OPS073039 If the multi fuse is blown, it must be removed as follows: 1. Turn off the engine. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the nuts shown in the pic- ture above. 4. Replace the fuse with a new one of the same rating. 5. Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

✽ NOTICE If the multi fuse is blown, consult an authorized Kia dealer.

765 Maintenance

Fuse/relay panel description

OPS073014 Inside the fuse/relay panel covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.

✽ NOTICE Not all fuse panel descriptions in OPS073018 this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.

7 66 Maintenance

Inner fuse panel Description Fuse rating Protected component

POWER OUTLET 2 20A P_OUTLET

O_S_MIRR_SW, AMP, AUDIO/UVO/AVN 4.0_HEAD UNIT, BCM, TMU, MOOD_LAMP_UNIT, ACC 10A SMK_UNIT, LDC_AMP(400W), LDC_AMP(200W)

POWER OUTLET 1 25A C/LIGHT, REAR_P_OUTLET

DRL 10A BCM(DAY_RUNNNIG_LIGHT_LAMP_POWER)

SUNROOF_MOTOR, LUGGAGE_PORTABLE_LAMP(CHARGE_POWER), SEAT_EXTN_DRV(HEAT- MODULE 6 7.5A ED), REAR_SEAT(IGN2)

WIPER FRT 2 25A FRONT_WIPER_MOTOR(POWER), FRONT_WIPER_RLY(LOW)

REAR_WIPER_MOTOR, MULTI_FUNCTION_SW(WIPER), REAR_WIPER_RLY, WIPER RR 15A REAR_WIPER_RLY_COIL,

AMP 30A AMP, LDC_AMP(400W)

MODULE 5 7.5A BCM, SMK_UNIT

WIPER FRT 1 10A MULTI_FUNCTION_SW(WIPER), BCM(WASHER_MOTOR_POWER),

HTD STRG 15A STEERING_HEATED

A/CON 1 7.5A AIR_CONTROL_UNIT(MANUAL, AUTO), IONIZER, PTC_RLY_COIL, BLOWER_RLY_COIL

OUTSIDE_MIRROR(HEATED), ECU(ELEC. LOAD DEFROST), HTD MIRR 10A AIR_CONTROL_UNIT_MANUAL/AUTO(HEATED_SIGNAL)

767 Maintenance

Description Fuse rating Protected component T/GATE OPEN 15A T/GATE_OPEN_RLY(T/GATE_LATCH_MOTOR), T/GATE_OPEN_RLY_COIL

S/HEATER FRT 20A FRONT_SEAT_EXTN(HEATED_POWER) DOOR_LOCK_RLY, DOOR_LOCK_RLY_COIL, DOOR_UNLOCK_RLY_COIL, DEAD_LOCK_RLY, DR LOCK 20A DEAD_LOCK_RLY_COIL A/BAG IND 7.5A CLUSTER

A/BAG 15A ACU, WCS_ECU

MODULE 4 10A I_S_MIRR_ECM, AUTO_HLLD_ECU

STOP LAMP 15A HAZARD_SW(ESS_INDICATOR_POWER), STOP_SIGNAL_ELECTRONIC_MODULE

MODULE 7 10A SPORTS_MODE_SW(ATM_SHIFT_LOCK_SOLENOID), KEY_LOCK_SOLENOID

S/HEATER RR 20A REAR_SEAT(HEATED_POWER)

P/WDW RH 25A FRONT_P/WINDOW_SW(POWER), P/WINDOW_SAFETY_ECU(POWER)

P/WDW LH 25A FRONT_P/WINDOW_SW(POWER), P/WINDOW_SAFETY_ECU(POWER)

MODULE 1 10A BCM, SEAT_EXTN_DRV

BRAKE SWITCH 1 10A ABS/ESP_UNIT, LDC_AMP(400W)

LOWER_SW, CENTER_SW, TPMS_UNIT, REAR_PARKING_ASSIST_SYSTEM_SNSR, SMART_PARK- ING_ASSIST_SYSTEM_SNSR, SMART_PARKING_ASSIST_SYSTEM_UNIT, MODULE 2 10A AIR_CONTROL_UNIT(MANUAL, AUTO), LANE_DEPARTURE_WARNING_SYSTEM_UNIT, STOP_LP_SW, WATER_FUEL_SNSR

7 68 Maintenance

Description Fuse rating Protected component SHIFT_LEVER_MODULE, REAR_SEAT_WARMER_SW, REAR_SEAT_WARMER, DIAGNOSIS, AVN MODULE 3 10A 4.0_HEAD_UNIT, LDC_AMP(200W), TMU, HLLD_SW, HLLD_ACTR, OIL_LEVEL_SNSR, ENGINE_CONTROL_UNIT, AIR_FLOW_SNSR, START_RLY_COIL, SMK_UNIT, SMATRA_IMMOBI- ECU 7.5A LIZATION I.O.D 2 15A LDC_AMP(200W), AUDIO/UVO/AVN4.0_HEAD_UNIT, TMU OUTSIDE_MIRROR_FOLDING_RLY, OUTSIDE_MIRROR_FOLDING_RLY_COIL, OUTSIDE_MIR- I.O.D 3 7.5A ROR_UNFOLDING_RLY, OUTSIDE_MIRROR_UNFOLDING_RLY_COIL CLUSTER 10A CLUSTER SPEED_SNSR (MT), BACK_UP_LAMP_SW, OIL_PUMP_INVERTER, INHIBITOR, TCU 15A TRANSMISSION_CONTROL_UNIT OBDII(POWER), TPMS_UNIT(POWER), CLUSTER, AIR_CONTROL_UNIT(MANUAL, AUTO), BCM, I.O.D 4 7.5A REAR_PARKING_ASSIST_SYSTEM_BUZZER SPARE 10A -

SUNROOF 2 20A SUNROOF_MOTOR(POWER)

P/SEAT DRV 30A FRNT_SEAT_EXTN(POWER)

SUNROOF 1 20A SUNROOF_MOTOR(POWER)

MDPS 7.5A MDPS_UNIT

A/CON 2 7.5A AIR_CONTROL_UNIT_MANUAL(MAX_BLOWER), AIR_CONTROL_UNIT_AUTO(BLOWER_MOTOR)

START 7.5A E/R_FUSE & RELAY_BOX(RELAY - START / SUB START), PDM

769 Maintenance

Description Fuse rating Protected component GLOVE_BOX_LAMP, DOOR_WARNING_SW, OVER_HEAD_CONSOLE_LAMP, PERSONAL_LAMP, I.O.D 1 7.5A SUNVISOR_LAMP, LUGGAGE_LAMP, PORTABLE_LAMP(DOOR) PDM 2 7.5A SMK_UNIT(BATT_CPU), SMATRA_IMMOBILIZATION(BATT)

PDM 1 20A SMK_UNIT(POWER)

BRAKE SWITCH 2 10A STOP_LAMP_SW(NORMAL_OPEN), SMK_UNIT

7 70 Maintenance

Engine compartment fuse panel

OPS073013

OPS073019

771 Maintenance

Engine compartment fuse panel Description Fuse rating Protected component IG1 40A IGN_SW(B1), BUTTON_START_RLY(IG1), BUTTON_START_RLY(ACC)

BLOWER 40A BLOWER_RLY, BLOWER_MOTOR

RR HTD 40A REAR_GLASS_HEATED_RLY,

ECU 2 30A MAIN_RLY, MAIN_RLY_COIL

ECU 3 15A ECU(AFTER_AIN_RELAY)

IGN COIL 20A IGNITION_COIL(POWER)

ECU 1 20A ECU(AFTER_MAIN_RELAY)

SENSOR 1 10A STOP_LAMP_SW(NORMAL_CLOSE), O2_SNSR, PURGE_CONTROL_SOLENOID_VALVE, OCV,

SENSOR 2 10A CMP, COOLING_FAN_LOW_RLY_COIL

INJECTOR 10A -

B/UP LAMP 10A RR_COMBI_LAMP(BACK_UP_LAMP)

WIPER 10A ECU(WIPER_SWITCH)

F/PUMP 15A FUEL_PUMP_MOTOR

HORN 15A HORN_RLY, HORN_RLY_COIL, HORN

H/LAMP WASHER 20A HEAD_LAMP_WASHER_RLY, HEAD_LAMP_WASHER_RLY_COIL, HEAD_LAMP_WASHER_MOTOR

7 72 Maintenance

Description Fuse rating Protected component B+ 1 50A SMART_JUNCTION_BLOCK(B+1)

B+ 2 50A SMART_JUNCTION_BLOCK(B+2)

B+ 3 50A SMART_JUNCTION_BLOCK(B+3)

IG2 40A IGN_SW(IG2), BUTTON_START_RLY(IG2), START_RLY

MDPS 80A MDPS_UNIT

ALT 125A ALTERNATOR

TCU 20A TRANSMISSION_CONTROL_UNIT

DEICER 20A DEICER

ECU 4 15A ECU(BATT_DIRECT)

ECU 5 15A ECU(BATT_DIRECT)

A/CON 10A A/CON_RLY

C/FAN 40A COOLING_FAN_MOTOR, SUB_FUEL_PUMP, SUB_FUEL_VALVE

INVERTER 50A OIL_PUMP_INVERTER

ABS 1 40A ABS/ESP_UNIT(MOTOR)

ABS 2 30A ABS/ESP_UNIT(SOLENOID)

773 Maintenance

LIGHT BULBS • If you don’t have necessary tools, WARNING - Lights CAUTION - Light the correct bulbs and the expertise, Prior to working on the light, replacement consult an authorized Kia dealer. In firmly apply the parking brake, Be sure to replace the burned- many cases, it is difficult to replace ensure that the ignition switch out bulb with one of the same vehicle light bulbs because other is turned to the LOCK position wattage rating. Otherwise, it parts of the vehicle must be and turn off the lights to avoid may cause damage to the fuse removed before you can get to the sudden movement of the vehi- or electric wiring system. bulb. This is especially true if you cle and burning your fingers or have to remove the headlight receiving an electric shock. assembly to get to the bulb(s). Removing/installing the headlight assembly can result in damage to Use only the bulbs of the specified the vehicle. wattage. • Do not install additional bulb or LED. If you install that, the lamp may not be operated properly and fuse box or electric wiring system may have problem.

7 74 Maintenance

Headlight, position light, turn (1) Headlight (High) signal light, side marker light (2) Headlight (Low) and front fog light bulb (3) Front side marker light replacement (4) Front turn signal ■ Type A (5) Front position light (6) Front fog light (if equipped)

If the headlight aiming adjustment is necessary after the headlight assembly is reinstalled, consult an OHD076046 authorized Kia dealer.

WARNING - Halogen bulbs OPS073020 ■ Type B Handle halogen bulbs with care. • Halogen bulbs contain pressurized gas that will produce flying pieces of glass if broken.

OPS073021

775 Maintenance

• Always handle them carefully, and ✽ NOTICE avoid scratches and abrasions. If WARNING HID lamps have superior perform- the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with - HID Headlight low beam ance vs. halogen bulbs. HID lamps liquids. Never touch the glass with (if equipped) are estimated by the manufacturer bare hands. Residual oil may Do not attempt to replace or to last twice as long or longer than cause the bulb to overheat and inspect the low beam (XENON halogen bulbs depending on their burst when lit. A bulb should be bulb) due to electric shock dan- frequency of use. They will probably operated only when installed in a ger. If the low beam (XENON require replacement at some point headlight. bulb) is not working, have your in the life of the vehicle. Cycling the • If a bulb becomes damaged or vehicle checked by an author- headlamps on and off more than cracked, replace it immediately ized Kia dealer. typical use will shorten HID lamps and carefully dispose of it. life. HID lamps do not fail in the • Wear eye protection when chang- same manner as halogen incandes- ing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool Headlight (HID type) cent lamps. If a headlamp goes out down before handling it. If the light bulb is not operating, have after a period of operation but will the vehicle checked by an authorized immediately relight when the head- Kia dealer. lamp switch is cycled it is likely the HID lamp needs to be replaced. HID lighting components are more com- plex than conventional halogen bulbs thus have higher replacement cost.

7 76 Maintenance

Headlight bulb (High) ■ Type A

OPS073051

OPS073046 OPS073047 ■ 4. Pull out the end of the front Type B bumper. 5. Remove the headlight assembly from the body of the vehicle.

If you can reach the bulb without removing the headlight assembly, OPS073028 you do not need to do step 3,4 and 5.

1. Turn off the engine and open the OPS073026 hood. Disconnect the negative battery cable. Follow the steps 1 to 5 from the previous page. 2. Disconnect the power connector from the back of the headlight 6.Remove the headlight bulb cover assembly. by turning it counterclockwise. 3. Loosen the retaining bolts. 7.Disconnect the headlight bulb socket-connector.

777 Maintenance

8.Unsnap the headlight bulb retain- Headlight bulb (Low) 8.Insert a new bulb by inserting it into ing wire by depressing the end and ■ Type A the housing and rotating in until it pushing it upward. locks into place. 9.Remove the bulb from the head- 9.Install the headlight bulb cover by light assembly. turning it clockwise. 10. Install a new headlight bulb and snap the headlight bulb retaining wire into position by aligning the wire with the groove on the bulb. 11. Connect the headlight bulb socket connector. OPS073047 12. Install the headlight bulb cover by ■ Type B turning it clockwise. 13. Connect the power connector to the back of the headlight assembly. 14. Reinstall the headlight assembly to the body of the vehicle. Low High

OPS073023 Follow the steps 1 to 5 from the previous page. 6.Remove the headlight bulb cover by turning it counterclockwise. 7.Remove the bulb from the assembly by turning it counterclockwise.

7 78 Maintenance

Front turn signal/position light Bulb type LED type ■ Type A Follow the steps 1 to 5 from the pre- If the light bulb is not operating, have vious page. the vehicle checked by an authorized 6. Remove the socket from the Kia dealer. assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on Turn signal the socket align with the slots on the assembly. 7. Remove the bulb from the socket OPS073049 by pressing it in and rotating it ■ Type B counterclockwise until the tabs on Turn signal the bulb align with the slots in the socket. 8. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place. 9. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket OPS073024 with the slots in the assembly and turning the socket clockwise.

Position 10. Reinstall the light assembly to the body of the vehicle.

OPS073048

779 Maintenance

Front side marker Front fog lamp bulbs 3. Disconnect the power connector (if equipped) from the socket. 4. Remove the bulb-socket from the housing by turning the socket counter clockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the housing. 5. Install the new bulb-socket into the housing by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the housing. Push the socket into the housing and turn the socket clock- OPS073025 OPS073028 wise. Follow the steps 1 to 5 from the pre- 6. Connect the power connector to vious page. the socket. 6.Remove the socket from the 7. Reinstall the front bumper under assembly by turning the socket cover. counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on ✽ NOTICE the assembly. If the headlight aiming adjustment 7.Pull the bulb out of the socket. is necessary after the headlight 8.Insert a new bulb into the socket. assembly is reinstalled, consult an OPS073027 9.Install the socket into the assembly authorized Kia dealer. by aligning the tabs on the socket 1. Remove the front bumper under with the slots on the assembly and cover. turning the socket clockwise. 2. Reach your hand into the back of the front bumper.

7 80 Maintenance

Side repeater light bulb Rear combination light bulb (4) Stop and tail light replacement (if equipped) replacement (5) Tail light ■ Type A (6) Tail/Stop light and side marker (LED)

OPS073030 ■ Type B OPS073035 If the light bulb is not operating, have the vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer.

OPS073029

(1) Tail light and side marker (2) Rear turn signal light (3) Back-up light

781 Maintenance

Tail light and side marker, Turn 5. Remove the bulb from the socket signal light and Stop and tail light by pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on ■ Type A the bulb align with the slots in the Tail and side maker socket. 6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it Turn signal into the socket and rotating it until Tail it locks into place. 7. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket Tail and stop with the slots in the assembly and OPS073031 turning the socket clockwise. 1. Open the tailgate. OPS073032 8. Reinstall the light assembly to the 2. Loosen the light assembly retain- ■ Type B body of the vehicle. ing screws with a philips head screwdriver. Tur n 3. Remove the rear combination light signal assembly from the body of the vehicle.

OPS073034

4. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.

7 82 Maintenance

Back-up light 5. Pull the bulb out of the socket. High mounted stop light 6. Insert a new bulb into the socket. replacement 7. Install the socket into the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots on the assembly and turning the socket clockwise. Back-up 8. Reinstall the light assembly to the body of the vehicle.

OPS073032

OPS073036

Back-up

OPS073045 Follow the steps 1 to 3 from the pre- OPS073052 vious page. 1. Open the tailgate. 4. Remove the socket from the 2. Remove the cover. assembly by turning the socket 3. Loosen the retaining bolts. counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.

783 Maintenance

Bulb type LED type (if equipped) License plate light bulb replacement

OPS073037

OPS073053 5.Replace the LED with new one. OPS073050 6.Reinstall in the reverse order. 1. Remove the lens by pressing the tabs. 2. Remove the socket from the lens. 3. Remove the bulb by turning it counter clockwise. 4. Install a new bulb in the socket OPS073038 and install the socket to the lens. 4. Pull out the module from the high 5. Reinstall the lens securely. mounted stop light assembly by pulling both clips. 5. Replace the bulbs by pulling it out. 6. Reinstall in the reverse order.

7 84 Maintenance

Map lamp Luggage lamp Interior light bulb replacement 1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently pry the lens from the interi- or light housing. 2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.

WARNING - Interior lights Room lamp Prior to working on the Interior Vanity mirror lamp Lights, ensure that the “OFF” button is depressed to avoid burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock.

3. Install a new bulb in the socket. 4. Align the lens tabs with the interior light housing notches and snap Glove box lamp the lens into place.

OPS073041/OPS073042/OPS073043/ CAUTION OPS073044/OXM079041 Be careful not to dirty or damage the lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.

785 Maintenance

APPEARANCE CARE Exterior care Finish maintenance Even prompt washing with plain water may not completely remove all Exterior general caution Washing these deposits. A mild soap, safe for It is very important to follow the label To help protect your vehicle’s finish use on painted surfaces, may be directions when using any chemical from rust and deterioration, wash it used. cleaner or polish. Read all warning thoroughly and frequently at least After washing, rinse the vehicle thor- and caution statements that appear once a month with lukewarm or cold oughly with lukewarm or cold water. on the label. water. Do not allow soap to dry on the fin- If you use your vehicle for off-road ish. driving, you should wash it after each off-road trip. Pay special attention to After washing the vehicle, test the the removal of any accumulation of brakes while driving slowly to see if salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign they have been affected by water. If materials. Make sure the drain holes braking performance is impaired, dry in the lower edges of the doors and the brakes by applying them lightly rocker panels are kept clear and while maintaining a slow forward clean. speed. Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings, industrial pollution and similar deposits can damage your vehicle’s finish if not removed immediately.

7 86 Maintenance

Waxing Wax the vehicle when water will no CAUTION - Drying vehicle longer bead on the paint. • Wiping dust or dirt off the Always wash and dry the vehicle body with a dry cloth will before waxing. Use a good quality scratch the finish. liquid or paste wax, and follow the • Do not use steel wool, abra- manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all sive cleaners, acid detergents metal trim to protect it and to main- or strong detergents contain- tain its luster. ing high alkaline or caustic Removing oil, tar, and similar materi- agents on chrome-plated or als with a spot remover will usually anodized aluminum parts. OJB037800 strip the wax from the finish. Be sure This may result in damage to to re-wax these areas even if the rest the protective coating and CAUTION - Wetting engine of the vehicle does not yet need wax- cause discoloration or paint deterioration. • Water washing in the engine ing. compartment including high pressure water washing may cause the failure of electrical circuits located in the engine compartment. • Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

787 Maintenance

Finish damage repair Bright-metal maintenance Underbody maintenance Deep scratches or stone chips in the • To remove road tar and insects, Corrosive materials used for ice and painted surface must be repaired use a tar remover, not a scraper or snow removal and dust control may promptly. Exposed metal will quickly other sharp object. collect on the underbody. If these rust and may develop into a major • To protect the surfaces of bright- materials are not removed, acceler- repair expense. metal parts from corrosion, apply a ated rusting can occur on underbody If your vehicle is damaged and coating of wax or chrome preser- parts such as the fuel lines, frame, requires any metal repair or replace- vative and rub to a high luster. floor pan and exhaust system, even ment, be sure the body shop applies though they have been treated with • During winter weather or in coastal rust protection. anti-corrosion materials to the parts areas, cover the bright metal parts repaired or replaced. with a heavier coating of wax or Thoroughly flush the vehicle under- preservative. If necessary, coat the body and wheel openings with luke- parts with non-corrosive petroleum warm or cold water once a month, jelly or other protective compound. after off-road driving and at the end of each winter. Pay special attention to these areas because it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It will do more harm than good to wet down the road grime without removing it. The lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and frame members have drain holes that should not be allowed to clog with dirt; trapped water in these areas can cause rusting.

7 88 Maintenance

Aluminum or chrome wheel main- Corrosion protection High-corrosion areas tenance Protecting your vehicle from corro- If you live in an area where your vehi- The aluminum or chrome wheels are sion cle is regularly exposed to corrosive coated with a clear protective finish. By using the most advanced design materials, corrosion protection is • Do not use any abrasive cleaner, and construction practices to combat particularly important. Some of the polishing compound, solvent, or corrosion, we produce vehicles of common causes of accelerated cor- wire brushes on aluminum or the highest quality. However, this is rosion are road salts, dust control chrome wheels. They may scratch only part of the job. To achieve the chemicals, ocean air and industrial or damage the finish. long-term corrosion resistance your pollution. • Clean the wheel when it has vehicle can deliver, the owner's cooled. cooperation and assistance is also Moisture breeds corrosion required. • Use only a mild soap or neutral Moisture creates the conditions in detergent, and rinse thoroughly which corrosion is most likely to with water. Also, be sure to clean Common causes of corrosion occur. For example, corrosion is the wheels after driving on salted The most common causes of corro- accelerated by high humidity, partic- roads. This helps prevent corrosion on your vehicle are: ularly when temperatures are just sion. • Road salt, dirt and moisture that is above freezing. In such conditions, • Avoid washing the wheels with allowed to accumulate underneath the corrosive material is kept in con- highspeed vehicle wash brushes. the vehicle. tact with the vehicle’s surface by moisture that evaporates slowly. • Do not use any alkaline or acid • Removal of paint or protective detergents It may damage and cor- coatings by stones, gravel, abra- Mud is particularly corrosive rode the aluminum or chrome sion or minor scrapes and dents because it dries slowly and holds wheels coated with a clear protec- which leave unprotected metal moisture in contact with the vehicle. tive finish. exposed to corrosion. Although the mud appears to be dry, it can still retain the moisture and promote corrosion.

789 Maintenance

High temperatures can also acceler- Keep your vehicle clean • When cleaning lower door panels, ate corrosion of parts that are not The best way to prevent corrosion is rocker panels and frame members, properly ventilated so the moisture to keep your vehicle clean and free be sure that drain holes are kept can be dispersed. For all these rea- of corrosive materials. Attention to open so that moisture can escape sons, it is particularly important to the underside of the vehicle is partic- and not be trapped inside to accel- keep your vehicle clean and free of ularly important. erate corrosion. mud or accumulations of other materials. This applies not only to the visible surfaces but particularly to the • If you live in a high-corrosion area Keep your garage dry underside of the vehicle. — where road salts are used, near Don't park your vehicle in a damp, the ocean, areas with industrial poorly ventilated garage. This cre- pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you ates a favorable environment for cor- To help prevent corrosion should take extra care to prevent rosion. This is particularly true if you You can help prevent corrosion from corrosion. In winter, hose off the wash your vehicle in the garage or beginning by observing the following: underside of your vehicle at least drive it into the garage when it is still once a month and be sure to clean wet or covered with snow, ice or the underside thoroughly when mud. Even a heated garage can con- winter is over. tribute to corrosion unless it is well • When cleaning underneath the ventilated so moisture is dispersed. vehicle, give particular attention to the components under the fenders and other areas that are hidden from view. Do a thorough job; just dampening the accumulated mud rather than washing it away will accelerate corrosion rather than prevent it. Water under high pressure and steam are particularly effective in removing accumulated mud and corrosive materials.

7 90 Maintenance

Keep paint and trim in good con- Don't neglect the interior Interior care dition Moisture can collect under the floor Interior general precautions Scratches or chips in the finish mats and carpeting and cause corro- Prevent chemicals such as perfume, should be covered with "touch-up" sion. Check under the mats periodi- cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand clean- paint as soon as possible to reduce cally to be sure the carpeting is dry. er, and air freshener from contacting the possibility of corrosion. If bare Use particular care if you carry fertil- the interior parts because they may metal is showing through, the atten- izers, cleaning materials or chemi- cause damage or discoloration. If tion of a qualified body and paint cals in the vehicle. they do contact the interior parts, shop is recommended. These should be carried only in wipe them off immediately. If neces- proper containers and any spills or sary, use a vinyl cleaner, see product Bird droppings : Bird droppings are leaks should be cleaned up, flushed instructions for correct usage. highly corrosive and may damage with clean water and thoroughly painted surfaces in just a few hours. dried. - Electrical Always remove bird droppings as CAUTION soon as possible. components Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

791 Maintenance

Cleaning the upholstery and inte- Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt CAUTION - Leather rior trim webbing When cleaning leather products Vinyl Clean the belt webbing with any mild (steering wheel, seats etc.), use Remove dust and loose dirt from soap solution recommended for neutral detergents or low alco- vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow hol content solutions. If you use cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a the instructions provided with the high alcohol content solutions vinyl cleaner. soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the or acid/alkaline detergents, the webbing because this may weaken color of the leather may fade or it. the surface may get stripped off. Fabric Remove dust and loose dirt from fab- Cleaning the interior window glass ric with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu- If the interior glass surfaces of the tion recommended for upholstery or vehicle become fogged (that is, cov- carpets. Remove fresh spots imme- ered with an oily, greasy or waxy diately with a fabric spot cleaner. If film), they should be cleaned with a fresh spots do not receive immediate glass cleaner. Follow the directions attention, the fabric can be stained on the glass cleaner container. and its color can be affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties can be CAUTION - Rear window reduced if the material is not properly maintained. Do not scrape or scratch the inside of the rear window. This Using anything but recommended may result in damage of the rear cleaners and procedures may affect window defroster grid. the fabric’s appearance and fire- resistant properties.

7 92 Maintenance

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM The emission control system of your Caution for the Inspection and 1. Crankcase emission control vehicle is covered by a written limited Maintenance Test (With Electronic system warranty. Please see the warranty Stability Control (ESC) system) The positive crankcase ventilation information contained in the • To prevent the vehicle from mis- system is employed to prevent air Warranty & Maintenance booklet in firing during dynamometer test- pollution caused by blow-by gases your vehicle. ing, turn the Electronic Stability being emitted from the crankcase. Your vehicle is equipped with an Control (ESC) system off by This system supplies fresh filtered air emission control system to meet all pressing the ESC switch. to the crankcase through the air applicable emission regulations. • After dynamometer testing is intake hose. Inside the crankcase, There are three emission control completed, turn the ESC system the fresh air mixes with blow-by systems, as follows. back on by pressing the ESC gases, which then pass through the switch again. PCV valve into the induction system. (1) Crankcase emission control system 2. Evaporative emission con- (2) Evaporative emission control sys- trol (including ORVR: tem Onboard Refueling Vapor (3) Exhaust emission control system Recovery) system The Evaporative Emission Control In order to assure the proper function System is designed to prevent fuel of the emission control systems, it is vapors from escaping into the atmos- recommended that you have your phere. vehicle inspected and maintained by (The ORVR system is designed to an authorized Kia dealer in accor- allow the vapors from the fuel tank to dance with the maintenance sched- be loaded into a canister while refu- ule in this manual. eling at the gas station, preventing the escape of fuel vapors into the atmosphere.)

793 Maintenance

Canister 3. Exhaust emission control Engine exhaust gas precautions Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel system (carbon monoxide) tank are absorbed and stored in the The Exhaust Emission Control • Carbon monoxide can be present onboard canister. When the engine is System is a highly effective system with other exhaust fumes. running, the fuel vapors absorbed in Therefore, if you smell exhaust the canister are drawn into the surge which controls exhaust emissions tank through the purge control sole- while maintaining good vehicle per- fumes of any kind inside your vehi- noid valve. formance. cle, have it inspected and repaired immediately. If you ever suspect exhaust fumes are coming into Vehicle modifications Purge Control Solenoid Valve your vehicle, drive it only with all (PCSV) This vehicle should not be modified. the windows fully open. Have your The purge control solenoid valve is Modification of your vehicle could vehicle checked and repaired controlled by the Engine Control affect its performance, safety or immediately. Module (ECM); when the engine durability and may even violate gov- coolant temperature is low during ernmental safety and emissions reg- idling, the PCSV closes so that evap- ulations. WARNING - Exhaust orated fuel is not taken into the In addition, damage or performance Engine exhaust gases contain engine. After the engine warms up carbon monoxide (CO). Though during ordinary driving, the PCSV problems resulting from any modifi- opens to introduce evaporated fuel to cation may not be covered under colorless and odorless, it is the engine. warranty. dangerous and could be lethal if inhaled. Follow the instructions • If you use unauthorized electronic on this page to avoid CO poi- devices, it may cause the vehicle to soning. operate abnormally, wire damage, battery discharge and fire. For your safety, do not use unauthorized electronic devices.

7 94 Maintenance

• Do not operate the engine in con- Operating precautions for catalyt- fined or closed areas (such as ic converters WARNING - Fire garages) any more than what is • Do not park, idle or drive the necessary to move the vehicle in or WARNING - Catalytic vehicle over or near flamma- out of the area. ble objects, such as grass, converter • When the vehicle is stopped in an vegetation, paper, leaves, etc. open area for more than a short Keep away from the catalytic A hot exhaust system can time with the engine running, converter and exhaust system ignite flammable items under adjust the ventilation system (as while the vehicle is running or your vehicle. immediately thereafter. The needed) to draw outside air into the • Also, do not remove the heat exhaust and catalytic systems vehicle. sink around the exhaust sys- are very hot and may burn you. • Never sit in a parked or stopped tem, do not seal the bottom of vehicle for any extended time with the vehicle or do not coat the the engine running. vehicle for corrosion control. • When the engine stalls or fails to It may present a fire risk under start, excessive attempts to restart certain conditions. the engine may cause damage to the emission control system.

795 Maintenance

CALIFORNIA Your vehicle is equipped with a cat- Failure to observe these precautions PERCHLORATE NOTICE alytic converter emission control could result in damage to the catalyt- Perchlorate Material-special handling device. ic converter and to your vehicle. may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/haz- Therefore, the following precautions Additionally, such actions could void ardouswaste/ perchlorate. must be observed: your warranties. • Use only UNLEADED FUEL for Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers: gasoline engines. Perchlorate containing materials, • Do not operate the vehicle when such as air bag inflators, seatbelt there are signs of engine malfunc- pretensioners and keyless remote tion, such as misfire or a noticeable entry batteries, must be disposed of loss of performance. according to Title 22 California Code • Do not misuse or abuse the of Regulations Section 67384.10 (a). engine. Examples of misuse are coasting with the ignition off and descending steep grades in gear with the ignition off. • Do not operate the engine at high idle speed for extended periods (5 minutes or more). • Do not modify or tamper with any part of the engine or emission control system. All inspections and adjustments must be made by an authorized Kia dealer. • Avoid driving with a extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.

7 96 Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Dimensions ...... 8-2 Engine ...... 8-2 Bulb wattage ...... 8-3 Tires and wheels ...... 8-4 Gross vehicle weight/Luggage volume ...... 8-5 Air conditioning system...... 8-5 Recommended lubricants and capacities ...... 8-6 • Recommended sae viscosity number...... 8-8 Vehicle identification number (VIN) ...... 8-9 Vehicle certification label...... 8-9 Tire specification and pressure label ...... 8-10 Engine number ...... 8-10 Refrigerant label...... 8-10 Consumer assistance (U.S. Only) ...... 8-11 Electrical equipment (U.S. Only) ...... 8-14 Reporting safety defects (U.S. Only) ...... 8-15 Online factory authorized manuals (U.S. Only) ...... 8-15

8 Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

DIMENSIONS Item in (mm) Overall length 162.9 (4,140) Overall width 70.9 (1,800) Overall height 62.9 (1,600) *1/63.6 (1,615) *2/63.5 (1,612) *3 205/60R16 62.1 (1,576) Front tread 215/55R17 61.7 (1,568) 235/45R18 61.4 (1,560) 205/60R16 62.5 (1,588) Rear tread 215/55R17 62.2 (1,580) *1 without roof rack 235/45R18 61.9 (1,573) *2 with roof rack Wheelbase 101.2 (2,570) *3 with sunroof and roof rack

ENGINE Item 1.6L 2.0L Displacement 97.1 (1,591) 121.9 (1,999) cu. in (cc) Bore x Stroke 3.03x3.36 (77x85.44) 3.19x3.81 (81x97) in. (mm) Firing order 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2 No. of cylinders 4. In-line 4. In-line

28 Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

BULB WATTAGE Light Bulb Wattage Bulb type Headlamps (Low/High) 55/60 H13 Headlamps (Low) 55 H7SLL Headlamps (Low)-HID type* 35 D3S Headlamps (High) 55 H7LL Front Front turn signal lamps 28 PY28/8W Front position lamps 8 (Opt : LED) PY28/8W (Opt : LED) Front fog lamps* 35 H8L Front side marker 5 W5W Side Repeater lamps (Outside Mirror)* LED LED Rear Stop/Tail lamps (Bottom) 28/8 P28/8W Bulb Type Rear tail lamps (Mid) 5 W5W Rear tail lamps & side marker (Top) 5 W5W Rear Stop lamps LED LED LED Type Rear Rear Tail lamps & side marker LED LED Rear turn signal lamps 27 PY27W Back-up lamps 16 W16W High mounted stop lamps 5 (Opt :LED*) W5W (Opt : LED*) License plate lamps 5 W5W Map lamps 8 FESTOON Room lamps 8 FESTOON Personal lamps LED LED Interior Vanity mirror lamps 5 FESTOON Glove box lamps 5 FESTOON Luggage lamp 8 FESTOON

* If equipped

83 Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

TIRES AND WHEELS Inflation pressure bar psi (kPa) Normal load Maximum load Wheel lug nut torque Item Tire size Wheel sizee () ()lb•ft, N•mk (g•m) Front Rear Front Rear 205/60R16 6.5JX16 Full size tire 215/55R17 6.5JX17 33 (230) 33 (230) 33 (230) 33 (230) 235/45R18 7.5JX18 65~79 (9~11, 88~107) Compact spare tire T125/80D16 4.0TX16 60 (420) 60 (420) 60 (420) 60 (420) (if equipped)

CAUTION When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle. Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or make it work irregularly.

48 Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

CAPACITY/WEIGHT 1.6 Engine 2.0 Engine Item M/T A/T M/T A/T Gross vehicle weight 3,836 (1,740) 3,902 (1,770) 3,902 (1,770) 4,100 (1,860) lbs. (kg) Luggage volume (VDA) Min : 24.2 (686) cu ft (l) Max : 61.3 (1,735)

Min : Back seat upright without luggage under tray Max : Back seat folded without luggage under tray

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM Item Weight of volume Classification Refrigerant 550g R-134a Compressor lubricant 110g FD46XG (IDEMITSU) We recommend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer for more details.

85 Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy. These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle. Lubricant Volume Classification Engine oil *1 *2 1.6 Engine 3.80 US qt. (3.6 l) 3 (drain and refill) API Service SM* or obove ILSAC GF-4 or above recommended 2.0 Engine 4.23 US qt. (4.0 l) ACEA A5 or above (or equivalent) 1.9~2.0 US qt. 1.6 Engine API Service GL-4 (SAE 75W-85, fill for-life) (1.8~1.9 l) Manual transaxle fluid or other brands meeting the GL-4 specitication 2.0~2.11 US qt. 2.0 Engine approved by Kia Motors Corp. (1.9~2.0 l) MICHANG ATF SP-IV 1.6 Engine SK ATF SP-IV NOCA ATF SP-IV Automatic transaxle fluid 7.71 US qt. (7.3 l) Kia genuine ATF SP-IV 2.0 Engine or other brands meeting the above specification approved by Kia motors corp. *1 Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page. *2 Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings. *3 If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.

68 Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

Lubricant Volume Classification M/T 5.39 US qt. (5.1 l) 1.6 Engine A/T 5.29 US qt. (5.0 l) Mixture of antifreeze and distilled water Coolant (Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum M/T 5.39 US qt. (5.1 l) 2.0 Engine radiator) A/T 5.29 US qt. (5.0 l) 0.7~0.8 US qt. Brake/Clutch fluid FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4 (0.7~0.8 l) Fuel 14.26 US gal. (54 l) Refer to “Fuel requirements” in chapter 1

87 Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

Recommended SAE viscosity Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has Using oils of any viscosity other than number an effect on fuel economy and cold those recommended could result in weather operating (engine start and engine damage. Always be sure to clean the area engine oil flowability). Lower viscosi- around any filler plug, drain plug, or When choosing an oil, consider the ty engine oils can provide better fuel dipstick before checking or draining range of temperature your vehicle economy and cold weather perform- any lubricant. This is especially will be operated in before the next oil ance, however, higher viscosity important in dusty or sandy areas change. Proceed to select the rec- engine oils are required for satisfac- and when the vehicle is used on ommended oil viscosity from the tory lubrication in hot weather. unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug chart. and dipstick areas will prevent dirt and grit from entering the engine and Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers °C -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 other mechanisms that could be Temperature damaged. (°F) -10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 Gasoline 10W-30 Engine Oil *1 5W-20 (5W-30) 1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4). However, if the engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.

88 Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL

OUN088001 OVQ076002N The vehicle identification number The VIN is also on a plate attached OUN086004 (VIN) is the number used in register- to the top of the dashboard. The ing your vehicle and in all legal mat- number on the plate can easily be The vehicle certification label ters pertaining to its ownership, etc. seen through the windshield from attached on the driver’s side center outside. pillar gives the vehicle identification The number is punched on the floor number (VIN). under the front passenger seat. To check the number, remove the cover (1).

89 Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

TIRE SPECIFICATION AND ENGINE NUMBER REFRIGERANT LABEL PRESSURE LABEL ■ Engine 1.6 (IF EQUIPPED)

ORB080005 ■ Engine 2.0 OUN086005 OPS073040 The tires supplied on your new vehi- The refrigerant label is located on cle are chosen to provide the best the underside of the hood. performance for normal driving. The tire label located on the driver's side center pillar gives the tire pressures recommended for your vehicle.

OAM082007L The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown in the drawing.

8 10 Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

CONSUMER ASSISTANCE (U.S. ONLY) Roadside Assistance is provided on all new current Emergency roadside assistance model year Kia Vehicles from the date the vehicle is deliv- Kia's toll free Roadside Assistance hot line is staffed 24 ered to the first retail buyer or otherwise put into use (in- hours a day, 365 days a year and is accessible by dialing service date), whichever is earlier, for a period of 60 1-800-333-4Kia (4542). months or 60,000 miles, whichever is earlier, subject to Please note that you must provide your Vehicle the terms, conditions and exclusions set forth in the Kia Identification Number (VIN) to verify coverage at the time Warranty and Consumer Information Manual applicable of your call. The VIN can be found on the dash of your to your model year vehicle. vehicle on the driver’s side, on the door jamb of the dri- KMA reserves the right to limit or deny services or other ver’s door, your vehicle’s registration or proof of insur- benefits to any owner or driver when, in KMA's judgment, ance card. the claims and/or service requests are excessive in fre- Kia utilizes a network of over 17,000 roadside assistance quency or type of occurrence. providers. Should you accidentally run out of fuel, require a battery jump, or need help changing a tire, a Kia Toll free consumer assistance Roadside Assistance Representative will dispatch some- Kia's toll-free Consumer Assistance hot line is staffed one to deliver a small quantity of gas, change a flat tire from 5:00 AM to 6:00 PM PST, Monday through Friday with your inflated spare, or arrange a battery jump to and is accessible by dialing 1-800-333-4Kia (4542). allow you to proceed to your destination. We have access For more information regarding assistance available, to a network of over 10,000 locksmiths to help you should please refer to your Kia Warranty & Consumer you become locked out of your Kia. Information Manual. In the event that mechanical difficulty renders your vehicle undriveable due to a warranty-related concern, Kia’s Roadside Assistance Representative will arrange to transport your vehicle to the nearest Kia dealer or to an alternative service location.

811 Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

Your vehicle must be accessible to our dispatch transport Trip interruption vehicle, as determined by our driver, to receive this serv- Trip interruption expense benefits are provided in the ice. In the event that Kia does not have a dealer or an event that a warranty-related disablement occurs more alternative service location available in a particular loca- than 150 miles from your home, and the repairs require tion, Kia will work with a reputable local service facility to more than 24 hours to complete. Reasonable reimburse- ensure that you receive prompt service. Warranty repairs ment is included for meals, lodging, or rental vehicle are performed at no cost. expenses. Trip interruption coverage is limited to $100 per day subject to a three day maximum limit per incident. ✽ NOTICE You must contact the Kia Roadside Assistance Center to Roadside Assistance benefits are not available for any obtain pre-authorization of expenses. Once the Kia Kia vehicle that has ever been or should be issued a “sal- Roadside Assistance Center gives authorization for trip vage” title or similar “branded” title under any state’s interruption benefits, they will assist you in making the law or has been declared a “total loss” or equivalent by necessary arrangements. Insurance deductibles, a financial institution or insurance company. expenses, and claims paid by your insurance company or other providers are not eligible for reimbursement. Fleet vehicles are excluded from reimbursement under Kia’s Trip Interruption Policy.

8 12 Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

Registering your vehicle in a foreign country 3. There may not be an Authorized Kia Dealer in the area If you plan to register your vehicle in a foreign country, in which you plan to register your vehicle. You may you should confirm that it conforms to the regulations in additionally experience difficulty in obtaining services that country. Even if you successfully register the vehicle in a foreign country for any number of reasons. in a foreign country, you may experience the following Further, we cannot assume any responsibility for prob- problems and should therefore consider the possibility of lems that result from unsatisfactory service or lack of having to deal with them: service outside of the United States. 1. The fuel specified for your vehicle may be unavailable. If other than the specified fuel is used, it could cause damage to the engine, the fuel injection system, and other fuel-related parts which may not be covered under your New Vehicle Emissions Limited Warranty. 2. We must, therefore, clearly state that when you leave the country in which you purchased your Kia new and register it in another country, problems arising from the use of fuel other than the specified fuel are not subject to manufacturer’s warranty. Because vehicles like yours may not be marketed in the new country of registration, parts, servicing techniques and tools necessary to maintain and repair your vehicle may be unavailable. Even if vehicles like yours are sold there, mechanical specifications required by the government may vary enough from the country of purchase to cause additional problems.

813 Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT (U.S. ONLY) The electrical system of your vehicle is designed to per- Installation of a mobile two-way radio system form under all reasonably expected operating conditions. If a mobile two-way radio system is installed improperly, However, before any additional electrical equipment is or if an excessively powerful type of system is used, other installed in your vehicle, consult an Authorized Kia electronic systems may be adversely affected. To avoid Dealer, in order to ensure that you do not void your war- damage to your vehicle, consult an Authorized Kia Dealer ranty. concerning the proper equipment and installation. Certain electrical equipment, or the way in which it is Kia motor vehicles are designed and manufactured to installed, may adversely affect the operation of your vehi- meet or exceed all applicable safety standards. cle, including such systems as the engine control system, the audio system and the electrical charging system and thus potentially void all or part of your warranty. For your safety, however, we strongly urge you to read We assume no responsibility for any expense you may and follow all directions in this Owner's Manual, particu- incur or for any malfunction of your vehicle or any of its larly the information under the headings "NOTICE", components or systems that may result from the installa- "CAUTION" and "WARNING". tion of additional electrical equipment that is not supplied, or recommended for installation by, Kia. If, after reading this manual, you have any questions regarding the operation of your vehicle, safety issues and defects please contact your Kia's toll-free Consumer Assistance hot line as below:

National Consumer Affairs Manager Kia Motors America, Inc. P.O. Box 52410 Irvine, CA 92619-2410 1-800-333-4Kia (4542)

8 14 Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ONLINE FACTORY AUTHORIZED MANUALS (U.S. ONLY) (U.S. ONLY) If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could The following publications are available on cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should www.KiaTechinfo.com at no charge. immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Kia Motors America, Inc. Service manual: This manual covers maintenance and recommended pro- If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an cedures for repair to engine and chassis components. It investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simple group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy cam- enough for most mechanically inclined owners to under- paign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in indi- stand. vidual problems between you, your dealer, or Kia Motors America, Inc. Electrical troubleshooting manual: This manual complements the Service Manual by provid- To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety ing indepth troubleshooting information for each electrical Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- circuit in your vehicle. 9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave., SE., West Building, Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain Owner's manual: other information about motor vehicle safety from This manual describes the overall features and operating http://www.safercar.gov. procedures for the vehicle.

815 Index

I Index

A Antenna...... 4-143 Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ...... 5-27 A/V Mode ...... 4-62 Appearance care ...... 7-86 Active ECO system...... 5-42 Exterior care...... 7-86 Active ECO operation ...... 5-42 Interior care ...... 7-91 Limitation of Active ECO operation ...... 5-42 Armrest (rear) ...... 3-15 When Active ECO is activated...... 5-42 Audio remote control ...... 4-144 Air bag collision sensors ...... 3-54 Audio system ...... 4-143 Air bag inflation conditions ...... 3-54 Antenna ...... 4-143 Air bag operation ...... 3-38 Audio remote control ...... 4-144 Air bag warning label ...... 3-60 Aux, USB and iPod® port ...... 4-145 Air bag warning light ...... 3-40 Speaker lightings ...... 4-146 Air bags...... 3-37 Auto light position ...... 4-87 Air bag collision sensors ...... 3-54 Auto start ...... 5-44 Air bag inflation conditions ...... 3-54 Auto stop...... 5-43 Air bag warning label...... 3-60 Automatic climate control system ...... 4-110 Air bag warning light ...... 3-40 Air Conditioning refrigerant label ...... 4-122 Curtain air bag ...... 3-53 Automatic heating and air conditioning...... 4-111 Driver's and passenger's front air bag ...... 3-49 Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant Occupant Detection System (ODS) ...... 3-44 and compressor lubricant ...... 4-121 Operation ...... 3-38 Climate control air filter...... 4-120 Side air bag...... 3-52 Manual heating and air conditioning ...... 4-112 SRS components and functions ...... 3-41 System operation ...... 4-118 Air cleaner ...... 7-35 Automatic transaxle ...... 5-17 Air Conditioning refrigerant label ...... 4-109,122 Automatic transaxle operation ...... 5-17 Airconditioning system ...... 4-100,110 Good driving practices ...... 5-22 Automatic climate control system ...... 4-110 Ignition key interlock system...... 5-22 Manual climate control system ...... 4-100 Shift lock system ...... 5-21

I 2 Index

Shift-lock override ...... 5-21 C Sports mode ...... 5-19 Aux, USB and iPod® port...... 4-145 Capacities (Lubricants)...... 8-6 Care B Exterior care...... 7-86 Interior care ...... 7-91 Base curb weight ...... 5-65 Tire care ...... 7-46 Battery...... 7-43 Cargo area cover ...... 4-139 Battery replacement (Remote keyless entry) ...... 4-7 Cargo weight...... 5-65 Battery replacement (Smart key) ...... 4-16 Center console storage ...... 4-128 Battery saver function...... 4-85 Central door lock switch...... 4-19 Before driving...... 5-4 Certification label ...... 5-63 Before entering vehicle ...... 5-4 Checking tire inflation pressure ...... 7-47 Before starting ...... 5-4 Child restraint system ...... 3-29 Necessary inspections ...... 5-4 Lower anchor system ...... 3-35 Brake system...... 5-23 Seat belt ...... 3-31 Anti-lock brake system (ABS)...... 5-27 Tether anchor system ...... 3-34 Electronic stability control (ESC) ...... 5-29 Child-protector rear door lock